31026355-bts3606 series technical manual

System DescriptionTable of Contents i.........................................................................................List of Figures v...............................................................................................List of Tables vi................................................................................................Chapter 1 Overview of BTS3606 1-1..................................................................

1.1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO 1-1........................1.2 Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO Network Solution 1-2.......................

1.2.1 Introduction to BSS/AN 1-3.............................................................1.2.2 Introduction to CN 1-5.....................................................................

1.3 Role and Application of the BTS3606 1-6...............................................1.3.1 Role in the Network 1-6..................................................................1.3.2 Application of the BTS3606 1-6......................................................

Chapter 2 Product Features 2-1.........................................................................2.1 Technical Features 2-1...........................................................................2.2 Large Coverage 2-2................................................................................

2.2.1 Receiver Sensitivity 2-2..................................................................2.2.2 Transmit Power (Measured at RF Port) 2-2....................................2.2.3 Cascading with the ODU3601C 2-3................................................

2.3 Flexible Networking 2-3...........................................................................2.3.1 Networking Interfaces 2-3...............................................................2.3.2 Networking Modes 2-3....................................................................2.3.3 Clock Sources 2-3..........................................................................

2.4 Convenient Operation and Maintenance 2-4..........................................2.4.1 System Status Monitoring 2-4.........................................................2.4.2 Data Configuration 2-4....................................................................2.4.3 Alarm Processing 2-4.....................................................................2.4.4 Security Management 2-4...............................................................2.4.5 Test Function 2-4............................................................................2.4.6 Site Monitoring 2-5..........................................................................2.4.7 Upgrade 2-5....................................................................................2.4.8 Operation on the Equipment 2-5.....................................................2.4.9 Auto Restart 2-5..............................................................................2.4.10 Reverse Maintenance 2-5.............................................................

2.5 Easy Upgrade and Expansion 2-5..........................................................2.5.1 High Compatibility 2-5.....................................................................2.5.2 Flexible Configuration 2-6...............................................................2.5.3 Smooth Expansion 2-6...................................................................

2.6 Serial Products for Seamless Coverage 2-6...........................................Chapter 3 Product Structure 3-1.........................................................................

3.1 Cabinet Physical Features 3-1................................................................

3.2 Cabinet Configuration 3-2.......................................................................3.3 Functional Structure of the BTS3606 3-3................................................

3.3.1 Baseband Subsystem 3-4...............................................................3.3.2 RF Subsystem 3-4..........................................................................3.3.3 Antenna Subsystem 3-5.................................................................3.3.4 Power Supply Subsystem 3-5.........................................................

3.4 Physical Interfaces 3-6............................................................................Chapter 4 Major Functions 4-1...........................................................................

4.1 Power Control and Rate Control 4-1.......................................................4.1.1 Forward Power Control 4-1.............................................................4.1.2 Reverse Power Control 4-2............................................................4.1.3 Rate Control 4-3.............................................................................

4.2 Handoff 4-3.............................................................................................4.2.1 Soft Handoff 4-3..............................................................................4.2.2 Softer Handoff 4-3..........................................................................4.2.3 Virtual Soft Handoff 4-4..................................................................4.2.4 Hard Handoff 4-4............................................................................

4.3 Radio Configuration 4-4..........................................................................4.4 Channel Configuration 4-4......................................................................

4.4.1 CDMA2000 1X Channels 4-5.........................................................4.4.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Channels 4-6...............................................

4.5 Multi-Channel Function 4-8.....................................................................4.6 Receiving Diversity 4-8...........................................................................4.7 Cell Breathing 4-8...................................................................................

Chapter 5 Product Reliability 5-1........................................................................5.1 System Reliability 5-1..............................................................................

5.1.1 De-rating Design 5-1.......................................................................5.1.2 Quality Control of Components 5-1................................................5.1.3 Thermal Design 5-1........................................................................5.1.4 EMC Design 5-2.............................................................................5.1.5 Redundancy Design 5-2.................................................................5.1.6 Reliability Measures for Input Power 5-2........................................5.1.7 Maintainability Design 5-2...............................................................5.1.8 Fault Monitoring and Handling 5-2..................................................

5.2 Hardware Reliability 5-3..........................................................................5.2.1 Protection against Wrong Insertion of Boards 5-3..........................5.2.2 BCKM Active-Standby Switchover 5-3...........................................5.2.3 BCIM Backup Slots 5-3...................................................................5.2.4 BCIM/BCKM Power Backup 5-3.....................................................5.2.5 N+1 Redundancy for Baseband Fans 5-3......................................5.2.6 Abis Interface Link Backup 5-4.......................................................

5.2.7 CE Pool Design for CCPMs 5-4......................................................5.2.8 Status Monitoring and Alarm Report 5-4........................................5.2.9 Distributed Power Supply 5-4.........................................................

5.3 Software Reliability 5-4...........................................................................5.3.1 Periodic Check on Key Resources 5-4...........................................5.3.2 Process Monitoring 5-4...................................................................5.3.3 Data Check 5-5...............................................................................5.3.4 Fault Isolation 5-5...........................................................................5.3.5 Reversible Upgrade 5-5..................................................................5.3.6 Log Function 5-5.............................................................................

Chapter 6 Operation and Maintenance 6-1........................................................6.1 Structure of the O&M System 6-1...........................................................

6.1.1 Structure of Local O&M System 6-1...............................................6.1.2 Structure of M2000 System 6-2......................................................

6.2 O&M Functions 6-3.................................................................................6.2.1 Security Management 6-3...............................................................6.2.2 Alarm Management 6-4..................................................................6.2.3 Loading Management 6-4...............................................................6.2.4 Configuration Management 6-5......................................................6.2.5 Equipment Management 6-5..........................................................6.2.6 Test Management 6-5.....................................................................6.2.7 Tracing Management 6-5................................................................

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 7-1..............................................................7.1 Engineering Specifications 7-1................................................................7.2 Capacity Specifications 7-1.....................................................................

7.2.1 CDMA2000 1X Capacity 7-2...........................................................7.2.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Capacity 7-2................................................

7.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications 7-2..........................................7.3.1 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 450 MHz Band 7-2.....7.3.2 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 800 MHz Band 7-3.....7.3.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 1900 MHz Band 7-4...

7.4 ODU3601C Cascading Specifications 7-4..............................................Appendix A Technical Standards A-1.................................................................

A.1 General Technical Standards A-1...........................................................A.2 Um Interface Standards A-1....................................................................

A.2.1 Physical Layer A-1..........................................................................A.2.2 MAC Layer A-1...............................................................................A.2.3 Service Capability A-1....................................................................

A.3 Abis Interface Standards A-2..................................................................A.3.1 Physical Layer A-2..........................................................................A.3.2 ATM Layer A-2................................................................................

A.3.3 ATM Adaptation Layer A-2.............................................................A.3.4 TCP/IP A-3......................................................................................A.3.5 Abis Interface High-Layer Protocol A-3..........................................A.3.6 Self-Defined Standard A-3..............................................................

A.4 Lightning Protection Standards A-3........................................................A.5 Safety Standards A-3..............................................................................A.6 EMC Standards A-4................................................................................A.7 Environment Standards A-5....................................................................

Appendix B Abbreviations and Acronyms B-1....................................................

System PincipleTable of Contents i.........................................................................................List of Figures vi...............................................................................................List of Tables viii................................................................................................Chapter 1 Overall Structure 1-1..........................................................................

1.1 Physical Structure 1-1.............................................................................1.2 Logical Structure 1-3...............................................................................

Chapter 2 Baseband Subsystem 2-1..................................................................2.1 Overview of Baseband Subsystem 2-1...................................................

2.1.1 Functional Structure 2-1.................................................................2.1.2 Introduction to Baseband Boards 2-2.............................................

2.2 BCKM 2-2................................................................................................2.2.1 Structure and Principle 2-3.............................................................2.2.2 External Interfaces 2-4....................................................................2.2.3 Technical Specifications 2-5...........................................................

2.3 BCIM 2-5.................................................................................................2.3.1 Structure and Principle 2-6.............................................................2.3.2 External Interfaces 2-7....................................................................2.3.3 Technical Specifications 2-7...........................................................

2.4 CCPM 2-7...............................................................................................2.4.1 Structure and Principle 2-8.............................................................2.4.2 External Interfaces 2-11....................................................................2.4.3 Technical Specifications 2-11...........................................................

2.5 CECM 2-11...............................................................................................2.5.1 Structure and Principle 2-12.............................................................2.5.2 External Interfaces 2-15....................................................................2.5.3 Technical Specifications 2-15...........................................................

2.6 HPCM 2-16...............................................................................................2.6.1 Structure and Principle 2-16.............................................................2.6.2 External Interfaces 2-17....................................................................2.6.3 Technical Specifications 2-17...........................................................

2.7 BBKM 2-18................................................................................................2.7.1 Structure and Principle 2-18.............................................................2.7.2 External Interfaces 2-19....................................................................2.7.3 Technical Specifications 2-19...........................................................

2.8 BESP 2-19................................................................................................2.8.1 Structure and Principle 2-19.............................................................2.8.2 External Interfaces 2-21....................................................................2.8.3 Technical Specifications 2-21...........................................................

2.9 CSLM 2-21................................................................................................2.9.1 Structure and Principle 2-22.............................................................2.9.2 External Interfaces 2-22....................................................................2.9.3 Technical Specifications 2-23...........................................................

2.10 CFAN 2-23..............................................................................................2.10.1 CFMM 2-23.....................................................................................2.10.2 CFIB 2-26.......................................................................................

Chapter 3 Radio Frequency Subsystem 3-1......................................................3.1 Overview of the RF Subsystem 3-1........................................................

3.1.1 Functional Structure of the Radio Frequency Subsystem 3-1........3.1.2 Introduction to RF Modules 3-2......................................................

3.2 CTRM 3-2................................................................................................3.2.1 Structure and Principle 3-3.............................................................3.2.2 External Interfaces 3-5....................................................................3.2.3 Specifications 3-5...........................................................................

3.3 CHPA 3-6................................................................................................3.3.1 Structure and Principle 3-6.............................................................3.3.2 External Interfaces 3-7....................................................................3.3.3 Specifications 3-7...........................................................................

3.4 CDDU 3-7................................................................................................3.4.1 Structure and Principle 3-8.............................................................3.4.2 External Interfaces 3-8....................................................................3.4.3 Specifications 3-9...........................................................................

3.5 CTBM 3-9................................................................................................3.5.1 Structure and Principle 3-9.............................................................3.5.2 External Interfaces 3-10....................................................................3.5.3 Specifications 3-10...........................................................................

3.6 CRFM 3-11................................................................................................3.6.1 CMCB 3-11.......................................................................................3.6.2 BBFL 3-14.........................................................................................

3.7 CPCM 3-15...............................................................................................3.7.1 Structure and Principle 3-15.............................................................3.7.2 External Interfaces 3-16....................................................................

3.7.3 Specifications 3-16...........................................................................Chapter 4 Antenna Subsystem 4-1....................................................................

4.1 RF Antenna 4-1.......................................................................................4.1.1 Antenna 4-1....................................................................................4.1.2 Feeder and Jumper 4-3..................................................................4.1.3 Lightning Arrester 4-3.....................................................................4.1.4 Tower-Mounted Amplifier 4-4.........................................................

4.2 Satellite Synchronization Antenna 4-4....................................................4.2.1 Introduction to GPS and GLONASS 4-5.........................................4.2.2 Antenna 4-6....................................................................................4.2.3 Feeder and Jumper 4-6..................................................................4.2.4 Lightning Arrester of Antennas 4-7.................................................4.2.5 Receiver 4-7...................................................................................

Chapter 5 Power Supply Subsystem 5-1............................................................5.1 Overview of Power Supply Subsystem 5-1.............................................5.2 Power Distribution Plans 5-1...................................................................

5.2.1 The +24 VDC Power Input Mode 5-2.............................................5.2.2 The -48 VDC Power Input Mode 5-2..............................................

5.3 PSUDC/ 5-3............................................................................................5.3.1 Structure and Principle 5-3.............................................................5.3.2 External Interfaces 5-4....................................................................5.3.3 Technical Specifications 5-4...........................................................

Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Subsystem 6-1............................................6.1 Overview of Environment Monitoring Subsystem 6-1.............................6.2 EAC 6-1...................................................................................................

6.2.1 Structure 6-1...................................................................................6.2.2 Functions 6-2..................................................................................6.2.3 External Interfaces 6-2....................................................................

6.3 PIB 6-3....................................................................................................6.3.1 Outlook 6-3.....................................................................................6.3.2 Functions 6-4..................................................................................6.3.3 External Interfaces 6-4....................................................................

Chapter 7 Lightning Protection and Grounding 7-1............................................7.1 Overview of Lightning Protection and Grounding 7-1.............................

7.1.1 Lightning Protection 7-1..................................................................7.1.2 Equipment Grounding 7-1...............................................................

7.2 BTS Lightning Protection Principle 7-1...................................................7.2.1 Lightning Protection Principle 7-1...................................................7.2.2 Lightning Protection for Power supply 7-3......................................7.2.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables 7-5......................................7.2.4 Lightning Protection for Antenna System 7-7.................................

7.2.5 Lighting Protection for Serial Port 7-8.............................................7.3 Grounding of BTS Equipment 7-8...........................................................

7.3.1 Internal Grounding of Cabinet 7-8..................................................7.3.2 External Grounding of Cabinet 7-8.................................................7.3.3 Grounding of AC Lightning Arrester 7-9.........................................7.3.4 Grounding of Trunk Cables 7-9......................................................

Chapter 8 BTS Signal Flows 8-1........................................................................8.1 Overview of BTS Signal Flows 8-1..........................................................

8.1.1 Abis Signal 8-1................................................................................8.1.2 Clock Signal 8-1..............................................................................8.1.3 Local MMI Signal 8-2......................................................................

8.2 Abis Traffic Signal Flow 8-4....................................................................8.2.1 Forward Traffic Signal Flow 8-4......................................................8.2.2 Reverse Traffic Signal Flow 8-4......................................................

8.3 Abis Signaling Flow 8-5...........................................................................8.3.1 Forward Signaling Flow 8-5............................................................8.3.2 Reverse Signaling Flow 8-5............................................................

8.4 O&M Signal Flow 8-5..............................................................................8.5 Clock Signal Flow 8-6.............................................................................

Chapter 9 BTS Configuration 9-1.......................................................................9.1 Configuration Principle 9-1......................................................................9.2 Cabinet Configuration 9-1.......................................................................

9.2.1 Configuration of Baseband Boards 9-1...........................................9.2.2 Configuration of RF Modules 9-4....................................................9.2.3 Configuration of PSUs 9-6..............................................................

9.3 Configuration of Antennas 9-6................................................................9.3.1 RF Antennas 9-6.............................................................................9.3.2 GPS/GLONASS Synchronization Antennas 9-7.............................

9.4 Networking Configuration 9-7..................................................................9.4.1 Star Networking 9-7........................................................................9.4.2 Chain Networking 9-8.....................................................................9.4.3 Tree Networking 9-9.......................................................................9.4.4 Fractional ATM Networking 9-10......................................................9.4.5 Cascading with ODU3601Cs 9-11....................................................

9.5 Configuration of Auxiliary Equipment 9-12................................................9.5.1 Environment Monitoring Instrument 9-12..........................................9.5.2 DDF 9-12..........................................................................................

9.6 Typical Configuration 9-12........................................................................9.6.1 O(1) Configuration 9-13....................................................................9.6.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration 9-13..............................................................

Appendix A Performance of Receiver and Transmitter A-1................................

A.1 Introduction to Band Class A-1...............................................................A.1.1 800 MHz Band A-1.........................................................................A.1.2 1900 MHz Band A-3.......................................................................A.1.3 450 MHz Band A-4.........................................................................A.1.4 2 GHz Band A-6..............................................................................

A.2 Performance of Receiver A-6..................................................................A.2.1 Frequency Coverage A-6................................................................A.2.2 Access Probe Acquisition A-7.........................................................A.2.3 R-TCH Demodulation Performance A-7.........................................A.2.4 Receiving Performance A-16............................................................A.2.5 Limitations on Emissions A-18..........................................................A.2.6 Received Signal Quality Indicator (RSQI) A-18................................

A.3 Performance of Transmitter A-19..............................................................A.3.1 Frequency Requirements A-19.........................................................A.3.2 Modulation Requirements A-19........................................................A.3.3 RF Output Power A-20.....................................................................A.3.4 Limitations on Emissions A-20..........................................................

Appendix B EMC Performance B-1....................................................................B.1 EMI Performance B-1..............................................................................B.2 EMS Performance B-2............................................................................

Appendix C Environment Requirements C-1......................................................C.1 Storage Environment C-1........................................................................C.2 Transportation Environment C-3.............................................................C.3 Operation Environment C-5....................................................................

Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms D-1....................................................D.1 Component D-1.......................................................................................D.2 Terminology D-2......................................................................................

Interface Protocols and Service FlowsTable of Contents i.........................................................................................List of Figures iii...............................................................................................List of Tables iv................................................................................................Chapter 1 Interface Protocols 1-1.......................................................................

1.1 Introduction to BTS3606 External Interfaces 1-1....................................1.2 CDMA2000 1X Um Interface 1-2............................................................

1.2.1 Physical Layer 1-4..........................................................................1.2.2 Data Link Layer 1-5........................................................................

1.3 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um Interface 1-7..................................................1.3.1 Physical Layer 1-9..........................................................................1.3.2 MAC Layer 1-9................................................................................

1.4 Abis Interface 1-12....................................................................................

1.4.1 Physical Layer 1-14..........................................................................1.4.2 Data Link Layer 1-14........................................................................1.4.3 Layer 3 1-15......................................................................................

Chapter 2 Call Processing 2-1............................................................................2.1 MS Call Processing 2-1...........................................................................

2.1.1 MS Initialization State 2-2...............................................................2.1.2 MS Idle State 2-5............................................................................2.1.3 System Access State 2-7................................................................2.1.4 MS Control on the Traffic Channel State 2-9..................................2.1.5 Registration 2-10..............................................................................2.1.6 Handoff 2-11.....................................................................................

2.2 BTS Call Processing 2-13.........................................................................2.2.1 Pilot and Sync Channel Processing 2-13.........................................2.2.2 Paging Channel and Quick Paging Channel Processing 2-14.........2.2.3 Access Channel Processing 2-15.....................................................2.2.4 Traffic Channel Processing 2-16......................................................2.2.5 Registration 2-18..............................................................................2.2.6 Handoff 2-19.....................................................................................

Chapter 3 Service Flows 3-1..............................................................................3.1 CDMA2000 1X Service Flows 3-2...........................................................

3.1.1 Voice Service 3-2............................................................................3.1.2 Handoff 3-8.....................................................................................3.1.3 SMS Delivery 3-13............................................................................3.1.4 Packet Data Service 3-16.................................................................

3.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Service Flows 3-19................................................3.2.1 Service Flows 3-20...........................................................................3.2.2 Handoff 3-25.....................................................................................

Appendix A Abbreviations and Acronyms A-1....................................................

HUAWEI

1. System Description

2. System Pinciple

3. Interface Protocols and Service Flows

Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station Technical Manual

V200R001

Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station

Technical Manual

Manual Version T2-030255-20040730-C-2.10

Product Version V200R001

BOM 31026355

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual

Release Notes

This manual applies to Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station V200R001.

Organization

This technical manual introduces the architecture, product features, and technical specifications of Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station.

It is organized into three modules:

Module 1 System Description

This module gives an overall introduction to the product features, product architecture, main functions, reliability design, operation and maintenance system and technical indices.

Module 2 System Pinciple

This module describes the overall structure of the BTS3606, baseband subsystem, radio frequency subsystem, antenna subsystem, power supply subsystem, environment monitoring subsystem, lightning protection and grounding, BTS signal flows, and BTS configuration.

Module 3 Interface Protocols and Service Flows

This module introduces the Um interface protocol, Abis interface protocol, MS and BTS call processing, and service flows of the BTS3606.

Intended Audience

The manual is intended for the following readers:

Engineering technicians Telecom management personnel System engineers

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

Courier New Terminal Display is in Courier New.

II. Command conventions


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

x | y | ... Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

x | y | ... * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ] * Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.

III. GUI conventions


< > Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK> button.

[ ] Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.

/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

IV. Keyboard operation

Format Description

<Key> Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example, <Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.

<Key1+Key2> Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

<Key1, Key2> Press the keys in turn. For example, <Alt, A> means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

V. Mouse operation

Action Description

Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).

Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.

Drag Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.

VI. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

operation.

Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.

Technical Manual Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station Table of Contents

i

Table of Contents

System Description

Chapter 1 Overview of BTS3606 .................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO ........................................................ 1-1 1.2 Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO Network Solution ....................................................... 1-2

1.2.1 Introduction to BSS/AN ........................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.2 Introduction to CN ................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 Role and Application of the BTS3606................................................................................ 1-6 1.3.1 Role in the Network................................................................................................. 1-6 1.3.2 Application of the BTS3606..................................................................................... 1-6

Chapter 2 Product Features ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Technical Features ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Large Coverage ................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2.1 Receiver Sensitivity................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2.2 Transmit Power (Measured at RF Port) .................................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Cascading with the ODU3601C .............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Flexible Networking ........................................................................................................... 2-3 2.3.1 Networking Interfaces ............................................................................................. 2-3 2.3.2 Networking Modes .................................................................................................. 2-3 2.3.3 Clock Sources ......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.4 Convenient Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................... 2-4 2.4.1 System Status Monitoring ....................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.2 Data Configuration .................................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.3 Alarm Processing .................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.4 Security Management ............................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.5 Test Function........................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.6 Site Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 2-5 2.4.7 Upgrade................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.4.8 Operation on the Equipment ................................................................................... 2-5 2.4.9 Auto Restart ............................................................................................................ 2-5 2.4.10 Reverse Maintenance ........................................................................................... 2-5

2.5 Easy Upgrade and Expansion ........................................................................................... 2-5 2.5.1 High Compatibility ................................................................................................... 2-5 2.5.2 Flexible Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-6 2.5.3 Smooth Expansion .................................................................................................. 2-6

2.6 Serial Products for Seamless Coverage............................................................................ 2-6


ii

Chapter 3 Product Structure ........................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 Cabinet Physical Features................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-2 3.3 Functional Structure of the BTS3606 ................................................................................ 3-3

3.3.1 Baseband Subsystem ............................................................................................. 3-4 3.3.2 RF Subsystem......................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.3 Antenna Subsystem ................................................................................................ 3-5 3.3.4 Power Supply Subsystem ....................................................................................... 3-5

3.4 Physical Interfaces............................................................................................................. 3-6

Chapter 4 Major Functions ........................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Power Control and Rate Control........................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1 Forward Power Control ........................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Reverse Power Control ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 Rate Control ............................................................................................................ 4-3

4.2 Handoff .............................................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2.1 Soft Handoff ............................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2.2 Softer Handoff ......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.3 Virtual Soft Handoff ................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2.4 Hard Handoff ........................................................................................................... 4-4

4.3 Radio Configuration ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.4 Channel Configuration ....................................................................................................... 4-4

4.4.1 CDMA2000 1X Channels ........................................................................................ 4-5 4.4.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Channels ............................................................................. 4-6

4.5 Multi-Channel Function...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.6 Receiving Diversity ............................................................................................................ 4-8 4.7 Cell Breathing .................................................................................................................... 4-8

Chapter 5 Product Reliability ....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 System Reliability............................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 De-rating Design ..................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Quality Control of Components ............................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Thermal Design....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.4 EMC Design ............................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.5 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.6 Reliability Measures for Input Power....................................................................... 5-2 5.1.7 Maintainability Design ............................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.8 Fault Monitoring and Handling ................................................................................ 5-2

5.2 Hardware Reliability........................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 Protection against Wrong Insertion of Boards ........................................................ 5-3 5.2.2 BCKM Active-Standby Switchover .......................................................................... 5-3 5.2.3 BCIM Backup Slots ................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 BCIM/BCKM Power Backup.................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.5 N+1 Redundancy for Baseband Fans..................................................................... 5-3


iii

5.2.6 Abis Interface Link Backup...................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.7 CE Pool Design for CCPMs .................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.8 Status Monitoring and Alarm Report ....................................................................... 5-4 5.2.9 Distributed Power Supply........................................................................................ 5-4

5.3 Software Reliability ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3.1 Periodic Check on Key Resources.......................................................................... 5-4 5.3.2 Process Monitoring ................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3.3 Data Check.............................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.4 Fault Isolation.......................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.5 Reversible Upgrade ................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.6 Log Function............................................................................................................ 5-5

Chapter 6 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................ 6-1 6.1 Structure of the O&M System............................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.1 Structure of Local O&M System.............................................................................. 6-1 6.1.2 Structure of M2000 System..................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 O&M Functions .................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2.1 Security Management ............................................................................................. 6-3 6.2.2 Alarm Management................................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.3 Loading Management ............................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.4 Configuration Management..................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.5 Equipment Management ......................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.6 Test Management ................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.7 Tracing Management .............................................................................................. 6-5

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 Engineering Specifications ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.2 Capacity Specifications...................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2.1 CDMA2000 1X Capacity ......................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Capacity .............................................................................. 7-2

7.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications ........................................................................... 7-2 7.3.1 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 450 MHz Band.................................... 7-2 7.3.2 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 800 MHz Band.................................... 7-3 7.3.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 1900 MHz Band.................................. 7-4

7.4 ODU3601C Cascading Specifications............................................................................... 7-4

Appendix A Technical Standards ................................................................................................A-1 A.1 General Technical Standards............................................................................................A-1 A.2 Um Interface Standards ....................................................................................................A-1

A.2.1 Physical Layer.........................................................................................................A-1 A.2.2 MAC Layer ..............................................................................................................A-1 A.2.3 Service Capability ...................................................................................................A-1

A.3 Abis Interface Standards ...................................................................................................A-2 A.3.1 Physical Layer.........................................................................................................A-2 A.3.2 ATM Layer ..............................................................................................................A-2


iv

A.3.3 ATM Adaptation Layer ............................................................................................A-2 A.3.4 TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................A-3 A.3.5 Abis Interface High-Layer Protocol .........................................................................A-3 A.3.6 Self-Defined Standard ............................................................................................A-3

A.4 Lightning Protection Standards .........................................................................................A-3 A.5 Safety Standards...............................................................................................................A-3 A.6 EMC Standards .................................................................................................................A-4 A.7 Environment Standards.....................................................................................................A-5

Appendix B Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................B-1

System Pinciple

Chapter 1 Overall Structure.......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Physical Structure.............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Logical Structure................................................................................................................ 1-3

Chapter 2 Baseband Subsystem ................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Overview of Baseband Subsystem.................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Functional Structure ................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Introduction to Baseband Boards............................................................................ 2-2

2.2 BCKM................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-3 2.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 2-5

2.3 BCIM .................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-6 2.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 2-7 2.3.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 2-7

2.4 CCPM ................................................................................................................................ 2-7 2.4.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-8 2.4.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-11 2.4.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-11

2.5 CECM .............................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.5.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-12 2.5.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-15 2.5.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-15

2.6 HPCM .............................................................................................................................. 2-16 2.6.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-16 2.6.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-17 2.6.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-17

2.7 BBKM............................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.7.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-18 2.7.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-19


v

2.7.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-19 2.8 BESP ............................................................................................................................... 2-19

2.8.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-19 2.8.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-21 2.8.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-21

2.9 CSLM............................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.9.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-22 2.9.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-22 2.9.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-23

2.10 CFAN ............................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.10.1 CFMM.................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.10.2 CFIB .................................................................................................................... 2-26

Chapter 3 Radio Frequency Subsystem ..................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Overview of the RF Subsystem ......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Functional Structure of the Radio Frequency Subsystem ...................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Introduction to RF Modules ..................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 CTRM................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-3 3.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-5

3.3 CHPA................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-6 3.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-7

3.4 CDDU................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-8 3.4.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-9

3.5 CTBM................................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.5.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-9 3.5.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 3-10 3.5.3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 3-10

3.6 CRFM............................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.1 CMCB.................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.2 BBFL ..................................................................................................................... 3-14

3.7 CPCM .............................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.7.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 3-15 3.7.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 3-16 3.7.3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 3-16

Chapter 4 Antenna Subsystem .................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 RF Antenna........................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1 Antenna ................................................................................................................... 4-1


vi

4.1.2 Feeder and Jumper................................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.3 Lightning Arrester.................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.4 Tower-Mounted Amplifier ........................................................................................ 4-4

4.2 Satellite Synchronization Antenna..................................................................................... 4-4 4.2.1 Introduction to GPS and GLONASS ....................................................................... 4-5 4.2.2 Antenna ................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.3 Feeder and Jumper................................................................................................. 4-6 4.2.4 Lightning Arrester of Antennas................................................................................ 4-7 4.2.5 Receiver .................................................................................................................. 4-7

Chapter 5 Power Supply Subsystem........................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Overview of Power Supply Subsystem.............................................................................. 5-1 5.2 Power Distribution Plans.................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.1 The +24 VDC Power Input Mode ............................................................................ 5-2 5.2.2 The –48 VDC Power Input Mode ............................................................................ 5-2

5.3 PSUDC/DC ............................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 5-4

Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Subsystem......................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Overview of Environment Monitoring Subsystem.............................................................. 6-1 6.2 EAC.................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2.1 Structure.................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.2.3 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 PIB ..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3.1 Outlook .................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3.2 Functions................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.3 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 6-4

Chapter 7 Lightning Protection and Grounding......................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Overview of Lightning Protection and Grounding .............................................................. 7-1

7.1.1 Lightning Protection ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.2 Equipment Grounding ............................................................................................. 7-1

7.2 BTS Lightning Protection Principle .................................................................................... 7-1 7.2.1 Lightning Protection Principle.................................................................................. 7-1 7.2.2 Lightning Protection for Power supply .................................................................... 7-3 7.2.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables..................................................................... 7-5 7.2.4 Lightning Protection for Antenna System................................................................ 7-7 7.2.5 Lighting Protection for Serial Port ........................................................................... 7-8

7.3 Grounding of BTS Equipment............................................................................................ 7-8 7.3.1 Internal Grounding of Cabinet ................................................................................. 7-8 7.3.2 External Grounding of Cabinet................................................................................ 7-8 7.3.3 Grounding of AC Lightning Arrester ........................................................................ 7-9


vii

7.3.4 Grounding of Trunk Cables ..................................................................................... 7-9

Chapter 8 BTS Signal Flows......................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Overview of BTS Signal Flows .......................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Abis Signal .............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.2 Clock Signal ............................................................................................................ 8-1 8.1.3 Local MMI Signal..................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Abis Traffic Signal Flow ..................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.1 Forward Traffic Signal Flow .................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Reverse Traffic Signal Flow .................................................................................... 8-4

8.3 Abis Signaling Flow ........................................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.1 Forward Signaling Flow........................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.2 Reverse Signaling Flow .......................................................................................... 8-5

8.4 O&M Signal Flow ............................................................................................................... 8-5 8.5 Clock Signal Flow .............................................................................................................. 8-6

Chapter 9 BTS Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 Configuration Principle....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-1

9.2.1 Configuration of Baseband Boards ......................................................................... 9-1 9.2.2 Configuration of RF Modules .................................................................................. 9-4 9.2.3 Configuration of PSUs............................................................................................. 9-6

9.3 Configuration of Antennas ................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.1 RF Antennas ........................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 GPS/GLONASS Synchronization Antennas ........................................................... 9-7

9.4 Networking Configuration .................................................................................................. 9-7 9.4.1 Star Networking....................................................................................................... 9-7 9.4.2 Chain Networking.................................................................................................... 9-8 9.4.3 Tree Networking...................................................................................................... 9-9 9.4.4 Fractional ATM Networking................................................................................... 9-10 9.4.5 Cascading with ODU3601Cs ................................................................................ 9-11

9.5 Configuration of Auxiliary Equipment............................................................................... 9-12 9.5.1 Environment Monitoring Instrument ...................................................................... 9-12 9.5.2 DDF ....................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.6 Typical Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-12 9.6.1 O(1) Configuration................................................................................................. 9-13 9.6.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration ........................................................................................... 9-13

Appendix A Performance of Receiver and Transmitter.............................................................A-1 A.1 Introduction to Band Class ................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1 800 MHz Band ........................................................................................................A-1 A.1.2 1900 MHz Band ......................................................................................................A-3 A.1.3 450 MHz Band ........................................................................................................A-4 A.1.4 2 GHz Band ............................................................................................................A-6

A.2 Performance of Receiver...................................................................................................A-6


viii

A.2.1 Frequency Coverage ..............................................................................................A-6 A.2.2 Access Probe Acquisition .......................................................................................A-7 A.2.3 R-TCH Demodulation Performance........................................................................A-7 A.2.4 Receiving Performance ........................................................................................A-16 A.2.5 Limitations on Emissions ......................................................................................A-18 A.2.6 Received Signal Quality Indicator (RSQI) ............................................................A-18

A.3 Performance of Transmitter.............................................................................................A-19 A.3.1 Frequency Requirements .....................................................................................A-19 A.3.2 Modulation Requirements.....................................................................................A-19 A.3.3 RF Output Power ..................................................................................................A-20 A.3.4 Limitations on Emissions ......................................................................................A-20

Appendix B EMC Performance ....................................................................................................B-1 B.1 EMI Performance...............................................................................................................B-1 B.2 EMS Performance .............................................................................................................B-2

Appendix C Environment Requirements ....................................................................................C-1 C.1 Storage Environment ........................................................................................................C-1 C.2 Transportation Environment..............................................................................................C-3 C.3 Operation Environment .....................................................................................................C-5

Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................D-1 D.1 Component........................................................................................................................D-1 D.2 Terminology.......................................................................................................................D-2

Interface Protocols and Service Flows

Chapter 1 Interface Protocols ...................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Introduction to BTS3606 External Interfaces..................................................................... 1-1 1.2 CDMA2000 1X Um Interface ............................................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 Physical Layer ......................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.2 Data Link Layer ....................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um Interface .................................................................................. 1-7 1.3.1 Physical Layer ......................................................................................................... 1-9 1.3.2 MAC Layer .............................................................................................................. 1-9

1.4 Abis Interface................................................................................................................... 1-12 1.4.1 Physical Layer ....................................................................................................... 1-14 1.4.2 Data Link Layer ..................................................................................................... 1-14 1.4.3 Layer 3 .................................................................................................................. 1-15

Chapter 2 Call Processing............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 MS Call Processing ........................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 MS Initialization State.............................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.2 MS Idle State........................................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.3 System Access State .............................................................................................. 2-7


ix

2.1.4 MS Control on the Traffic Channel State ................................................................ 2-9 2.1.5 Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.1.6 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 2-11

2.2 BTS Call Processing........................................................................................................ 2-13 2.2.1 Pilot and Sync Channel Processing...................................................................... 2-13 2.2.2 Paging Channel and Quick Paging Channel Processing...................................... 2-14 2.2.3 Access Channel Processing ................................................................................. 2-15 2.2.4 Traffic Channel Processing ................................................................................... 2-16 2.2.5 Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.6 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 2-19

Chapter 3 Service Flows............................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 CDMA2000 1X Service Flows ........................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Voice Service .......................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 Handoff.................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.1.3 SMS Delivery......................................................................................................... 3-13 3.1.4 Packet Data Service.............................................................................................. 3-16

3.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Service Flows............................................................................... 3-19 3.2.1 Service Flows........................................................................................................ 3-20 3.2.2 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 3-25

Appendix A Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................A-1

Technical Manual Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station List of Figures

i

List of Figures

System Description

Figure 1-1 Structure of the Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO hybrid network .................... 1-3

Figure 3-1 BTS3606 cabinet .................................................................................................. 3-1

Figure 3-2 A fully equipped BTS3606 cabinet........................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3-3 BTS3606 functional structure ............................................................................... 3-4

Figure 4-1 Closed-loop power control.................................................................................... 4-2

Figure 6-1 BSS/AN's local O&M system................................................................................ 6-1

Figure 6-2 Networking of M2000 system ............................................................................... 6-3

System Pinciple

Figure 1-1 BTS3606 cabinet in full configuration................................................................... 1-1

Figure 1-2 BTS3606 logical structure .................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 2-1 Functional structure of baseband subsystem....................................................... 2-1

Figure 2-2 Structure of the BCKM.......................................................................................... 2-3

Figure 2-3 Structure of BCIM ................................................................................................. 2-6

Figure 2-4 Structure of CCPM................................................................................................ 2-8

Figure 2-5 Structure of the CECM........................................................................................ 2-12

Figure 2-6 HPCM functional structure.................................................................................. 2-16

Figure 2-7 Slot distribution of BBKM.................................................................................... 2-18

Figure 2-8 Structure of BESP............................................................................................... 2-20

Figure 2-9 Principle of E1/T1 lightning protection................................................................ 2-21

Figure 2-10 CSLM functional structure ................................................................................ 2-22

Figure 2-11 CFMM functional structure................................................................................ 2-24

Figure 2-12 Structure of the CFIB........................................................................................ 2-26

Figure 3-1 Structure of RF subsystem ................................................................................... 3-1


ii

Figure 3-2 CTRM functional structure.................................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3-3 CHPA functional structure..................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-4 CDDU functional structure.................................................................................... 3-8

Figure 3-5 CTBM slot distribution ........................................................................................ 3-10

Figure 3-6 CMCB location in the CHPA............................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3-7 CMCB functional structure.................................................................................. 3-12

Figure 3-8 BBFL functional structure ................................................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-9 CPCM location in the system ............................................................................. 3-16

Figure 4-1 Structure of RF antenna ....................................................................................... 4-1

Figure 4-2 Structure of satellite synchronization antenna...................................................... 4-5

Figure 5-1 BTS power supply subsystem .............................................................................. 5-1

Figure 5-2 Structure of power supply subsystem................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-3 Structure of the PSUDC/DC ..................................................................................... 5-4

Figure 6-1 EAC ...................................................................................................................... 6-2

Figure 6-2 Power inspection module ..................................................................................... 6-3

Figure 7-1 IEC 61312 division of lightning protection zone ................................................... 7-2

Figure 7-2 Illustration of lightning protection for BTS power supply ...................................... 7-3

Figure 7-3 Level-5 lightning protection for BTS power supply............................................... 7-3

Figure 7-4 Connection of trunk cables to BTS....................................................................... 7-5

Figure 7-5 Structure of the BESP........................................................................................... 7-6

Figure 7-6 E1/T1 lightning protection unit .............................................................................. 7-7

Figure 8-1 BTS signal flows ................................................................................................... 8-3

Figure 9-1 Fully-equipped baseband subrack ....................................................................... 9-2

Figure 9-2 Fully-equipped RF modules.................................................................................. 9-5

Figure 9-3 PSUDC/DC subrack in full configuration .............................................................. 9-6

Figure 9-4 BTS star networking ............................................................................................. 9-7

Figure 9-5 BTS chain networking........................................................................................... 9-8

Figure 9-6 BTS tree networking ........................................................................................... 9-10


iii

Figure 9-7 O(1) RF module configuration ............................................................................ 9-13

Figure 9-8 S(2/2/2) RF module configuration ...................................................................... 9-14


Figure 1-1 BTS external interfaces ........................................................................................ 1-2

Figure 1-2 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface .............................................. 1-3

Figure 1-3 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um interface.................................... 1-7

Figure 1-4 Composition of the Abis interface....................................................................... 1-13

Figure 1-5 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis signaling and OML signaling) ........... 1-13

Figure 1-6 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis traffic) ................................................ 1-14

Figure 2-1 MS call processing states..................................................................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2 MS initialization state............................................................................................ 2-3

Figure 3-2 Mobile originated call............................................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3-3 Mobile terminated call........................................................................................... 3-4

Figure 3-4 Mobile initiated release......................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-5 BTS initiated release ............................................................................................ 3-7

Figure 3-6 Release initiated by BSC/MSC............................................................................. 3-8

Figure 3-7 Intra-BTS soft/softer handoff add ......................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3-8 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff add ....................................................................... 3-10

Figure 3-9 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff drop ...................................................................... 3-11

Figure 3-10 Inter-BTS hard handoff ..................................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3-11 SMS-MO delivery on the access channel......................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-12 SMS-MT delivery on the paging channel ......................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-13 SMS-MO delivery on the traffic channel........................................................... 3-15

Figure 3-14 SMS-MT delivery on the traffic channel............................................................ 3-15

Figure 3-15 Mobile originated packet data service .............................................................. 3-17

Figure 3-16 Reverse SCH setup procedure ........................................................................ 3-19

Figure 3-17 AT initiated connection setup procedure........................................................... 3-20


iv

Figure 3-18 AN initiated connection re-activation procedure............................................... 3-22

Figure 3-19 AT initiated connection release procedure ....................................................... 3-23

Figure 3-20 AN initiated connection release procedure....................................................... 3-25

Figure 3-21 Handoff add procedure..................................................................................... 3-26

Figure 3-22 Handoff drop procedure.................................................................................... 3-27

Technical Manual Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station List of Tables

i

List of Tables

System Description

Table 1-1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO ............................................. 1-1

Table 2-1 Applications of Huawei BTS products .................................................................... 2-6

Table 3-1 Boards and modules of the BTS3606 ....................................................................3-3

Table 3-2 Physical interfaces on the BTS3606 ......................................................................3-6

Table 7-1 Engineering specifications of the BTS3606 ........................................................... 7-1

Table 7-2 Specifications of BTS3606 transmitters operating in 450 MHz band..................... 7-2

Table 7-3 Specifications of BTS3606 receivers operating in 450 MHz band ......................... 7-2



Table 7-6 Specifications of BTS3606 transmitters operating in 1900 MHz band................... 7-4

Table 7-7 Specifications of BTS3606 receivers operating in 1900 MHz band ....................... 7-4

Table 7-8 Specifications of BTS3606 with respect to ODU3601Cs cascading ...................... 7-5

System Pinciple

Table 2-1 Functions of BCKM ................................................................................................ 2-2

Table 2-2 BCKM external interfaces....................................................................................... 2-4

Table 2-3 BCIM external interfaces ........................................................................................ 2-7

Table 2-4 CCPM functions...................................................................................................... 2-8

Table 2-5 CCPM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-11

Table 2-6 CECM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-15

Table 2-7 HPCM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-17

Table 2-8 BBKM external interface....................................................................................... 2-19

Table 2-9 BESP external interfaces ..................................................................................... 2-21

Table 2-10 CSLM external interfaces ................................................................................... 2-22


ii

Table 2-11 CFMM external interfaces .................................................................................. 2-25

Table 2-12 CFIB external interfaces..................................................................................... 2-27

Table 3-1 CTRM external interfaces....................................................................................... 3-5

Table 3-2 CHPA external interfaces ....................................................................................... 3-7

Table 3-3 CDDU external interfaces....................................................................................... 3-9

Table 3-4 CTBM external interfaces..................................................................................... 3-10

Table 3-5 CMCB external interfaces .................................................................................... 3-13

Table 3-6 BBFL panel indicators .......................................................................................... 3-15

Table 3-7 CPCM external interfaces .................................................................................... 3-16

Table 4-1 Loss index (dB/100 m(328.08 ft)) of feeder (at normal temperature)..................... 4-3

Table 5-1 PSUDC/DC external interfaces .................................................................................. 5-4

Table 6-1 EAC external interfaces.......................................................................................... 6-2

Table 6-2 PIB external interfaces ........................................................................................... 6-4

Table 9-1 Typical configuration of CCPM............................................................................... 9-3

Table 9-2 BTS3606 typical configurations............................................................................ 9-12

Table A-1 CDMA channel number to CDMA frequency assignment correspondence for band class 0 .............................................................................................................................A-1

Table A-2 CDMA channel numbers and corresponding frequencies for band class 0 and spreading rate 1 ..............................................................................................................A-2

Table A-3 CDMA preferred set of frequency assignments for band class 0 ..........................A-2








iii


Table A-11 CDMA channel numbers and corresponding frequencies for band class 6 and spreading rate 1...............................................................................................................A-6

Table A-12 CDMA preferred set of frequency assignments for band class 6 ........................A-6

Table A-13 Access probe failure ratio.....................................................................................A-7

Table A-14 Maximum FER of F-FCH or R-DCCH receiver in demodulation performance test under RC1 .......................................................................................................................A-7



Table A-17 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3.........................................................................................................................................A-8

Table A-18 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3 .......................................................................................................................A-8


Table A-20 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4.........................................................................................................................................A-9

Table A-21 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4 ................................................................................................................A-9

Table A-22 Standard channel simulator configuration..........................................................A-10

Table A-23 Channel models for the R-TCH receiving performance test..............................A-10

Table A-24 Eb/N0 limits of R-TCH without closed-loop power control.................................A-11

Table A-25 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-FCH or R-DCCH receiver under RC1 .....................................................................................................................A-11



Table A-28 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-FCH receiver under RC1.......................................................................................................................................A-13


iv



Table A-31 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-SCH (turbo code) receiver under RC3 .....................................................................................................................A-14



Table A-34 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-SCH(turbo code) receiver under RC4 .....................................................................................................................A-15


Table A-36 RSQI range ........................................................................................................A-18

Table A-37 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (450 MHz band and 800 MHz band).......................................................................................................................................A-21

Table A-38 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (1900 MHz band) ......................A-21

Table B-1 CE indices at -48V port..........................................................................................B-1

Table B-2 RE indices..............................................................................................................B-1

Table B-3 RF EM field immunity indices ................................................................................B-2

Table B-4 Voltage dips and short interruptions indices ..........................................................B-2

Table B-5 ESD immunity indices............................................................................................B-3

Table B-6 Induced currents indices........................................................................................B-3

Table B-7 Surge immunity indices..........................................................................................B-4

Table B-8 Common-mode fast transient pulse immunity indices...........................................B-4

Table C-1 Requirements for climate environment ................................................................. C-1

Table C-2 Requirements for the density of physically active substances ............................. C-2

Table C-3 Requirements for the density of chemically active substances ............................ C-2

Table C-4 Requirements for mechanical stress .................................................................... C-2



v




Table C-9 Temperature and humidity requirements .............................................................. C-5

Table C-10 Other climate environment requirements............................................................ C-5

Table C-11 Requirements for the density of physically active substances............................ C-6

Table C-12 Requirements for the density of chemically active substances .......................... C-6

Table C-13 Requirements for mechanical stress .................................................................. C-7


Table 1-1 Major serving bands ............................................................................................... 1-4

Table 1-2 Length and quantity of the packet carried by each channel................................... 1-9

Table 3-1 Service flows .......................................................................................................... 3-1

HUAWEI


System Description

Technical Manual Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station

System DescriptionTable of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview of BTS3606 .................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO ........................................................ 1-1 1.2 Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO Network Solution ....................................................... 1-2

1.2.1 Introduction to BSS/AN ........................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.2 Introduction to CN ................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 Role and Application of the BTS3606................................................................................ 1-6 1.3.1 Role in the Network................................................................................................. 1-6 1.3.2 Application of the BTS3606..................................................................................... 1-6

Chapter 2 Product Features ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Technical Features ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Large Coverage ................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2.1 Receiver Sensitivity................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2.2 Transmit Power (Measured at RF Port) .................................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Cascading with the ODU3601C .............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Flexible Networking ........................................................................................................... 2-3 2.3.1 Networking Interfaces ............................................................................................. 2-3 2.3.2 Networking Modes .................................................................................................. 2-3 2.3.3 Clock Sources ......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.4 Convenient Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................... 2-4 2.4.1 System Status Monitoring ....................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.2 Data Configuration .................................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.3 Alarm Processing .................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.4 Security Management ............................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.5 Test Function........................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.6 Site Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 2-5 2.4.7 Upgrade................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.4.8 Operation on the Equipment ................................................................................... 2-5 2.4.9 Auto Restart ............................................................................................................ 2-5 2.4.10 Reverse Maintenance ........................................................................................... 2-5

2.5 Easy Upgrade and Expansion ........................................................................................... 2-5 2.5.1 High Compatibility ................................................................................................... 2-5 2.5.2 Flexible Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-6 2.5.3 Smooth Expansion .................................................................................................. 2-6

2.6 Serial Products for Seamless Coverage............................................................................ 2-6

Chapter 3 Product Structure ........................................................................................................ 3-1 3.1 Cabinet Physical Features................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-2



ii

3.3 Functional Structure of the BTS3606 ................................................................................ 3-3 3.3.1 Baseband Subsystem ............................................................................................. 3-4 3.3.2 RF Subsystem......................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.3 Antenna Subsystem ................................................................................................ 3-5 3.3.4 Power Supply Subsystem ....................................................................................... 3-5

3.4 Physical Interfaces............................................................................................................. 3-6

Chapter 4 Major Functions ........................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Power Control and Rate Control........................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1 Forward Power Control ........................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Reverse Power Control ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 Rate Control ............................................................................................................ 4-3

4.2 Handoff .............................................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2.1 Soft Handoff ............................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2.2 Softer Handoff ......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.3 Virtual Soft Handoff ................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2.4 Hard Handoff ........................................................................................................... 4-4

4.3 Radio Configuration ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.4 Channel Configuration ....................................................................................................... 4-4

4.4.1 CDMA2000 1X Channels ........................................................................................ 4-5 4.4.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Channels ............................................................................. 4-6

4.5 Multi-Channel Function...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.6 Receiving Diversity ............................................................................................................ 4-8 4.7 Cell Breathing .................................................................................................................... 4-8

Chapter 5 Product Reliability ....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 System Reliability............................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 De-rating Design ..................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Quality Control of Components ............................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Thermal Design....................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.4 EMC Design ............................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.5 Redundancy Design................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.6 Reliability Measures for Input Power....................................................................... 5-2 5.1.7 Maintainability Design ............................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.8 Fault Monitoring and Handling ................................................................................ 5-2

5.2 Hardware Reliability........................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 Protection against Wrong Insertion of Boards ........................................................ 5-3 5.2.2 BCKM Active-Standby Switchover .......................................................................... 5-3 5.2.3 BCIM Backup Slots ................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.4 BCIM/BCKM Power Backup.................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.5 N+1 Redundancy for Baseband Fans..................................................................... 5-3 5.2.6 Abis Interface Link Backup...................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.7 CE Pool Design for CCPMs .................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.8 Status Monitoring and Alarm Report ....................................................................... 5-4



iii

5.2.9 Distributed Power Supply........................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Software Reliability ............................................................................................................ 5-4

5.3.1 Periodic Check on Key Resources.......................................................................... 5-4 5.3.2 Process Monitoring ................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3.3 Data Check.............................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.4 Fault Isolation.......................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.5 Reversible Upgrade ................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.6 Log Function............................................................................................................ 5-5

Chapter 6 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................ 6-1 6.1 Structure of the O&M System............................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.1 Structure of Local O&M System.............................................................................. 6-1 6.1.2 Structure of M2000 System..................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 O&M Functions .................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2.1 Security Management ............................................................................................. 6-3 6.2.2 Alarm Management................................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.3 Loading Management ............................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.4 Configuration Management..................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.5 Equipment Management ......................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.6 Test Management ................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.7 Tracing Management .............................................................................................. 6-5

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 Engineering Specifications ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.2 Capacity Specifications...................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2.1 CDMA2000 1X Capacity ......................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Capacity .............................................................................. 7-2

7.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications ........................................................................... 7-2 7.3.1 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 450 MHz Band.................................... 7-2 7.3.2 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 800 MHz Band.................................... 7-3 7.3.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 1900 MHz Band.................................. 7-4

7.4 ODU3601C Cascading Specifications............................................................................... 7-4

Appendix A Technical Standards ................................................................................................A-1 A.1 General Technical Standards............................................................................................A-1 A.2 Um Interface Standards ....................................................................................................A-1

A.2.1 Physical Layer.........................................................................................................A-1 A.2.2 MAC Layer ..............................................................................................................A-1 A.2.3 Service Capability ...................................................................................................A-1

A.3 Abis Interface Standards ...................................................................................................A-2 A.3.1 Physical Layer.........................................................................................................A-2 A.3.2 ATM Layer ..............................................................................................................A-2 A.3.3 ATM Adaptation Layer ............................................................................................A-2 A.3.4 TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................A-3 A.3.5 Abis Interface High-Layer Protocol .........................................................................A-3



iv

A.3.6 Self-Defined Standard ............................................................................................A-3 A.4 Lightning Protection Standards .........................................................................................A-3 A.5 Safety Standards...............................................................................................................A-3 A.6 EMC Standards .................................................................................................................A-4 A.7 Environment Standards.....................................................................................................A-5

Appendix B Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................B-1


System DescriptionList of Figures

v

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 Structure of the Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO hybrid network .................... 1-3

Figure 3-1 BTS3606 cabinet .................................................................................................. 3-1

Figure 3-2 A fully equipped BTS3606 cabinet........................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3-3 BTS3606 functional structure ............................................................................... 3-4

Figure 4-1 Closed-loop power control.................................................................................... 4-2

Figure 6-1 BSS/AN's local O&M system................................................................................ 6-1

Figure 6-2 Networking of M2000 system ............................................................................... 6-3


System DescriptionList of Tables

vi

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO ............................................. 1-1

Table 2-1 Applications of Huawei BTS products .................................................................... 2-6

Table 3-1 Boards and modules of the BTS3606 ....................................................................3-3

Table 3-2 Physical interfaces on the BTS3606 ......................................................................3-6

Table 7-1 Engineering specifications of the BTS3606 ........................................................... 7-1





Table 7-6 Specifications of BTS3606 transmitters operating in 1900 MHz band................... 7-4

Table 7-7 Specifications of BTS3606 receivers operating in 1900 MHz band ....................... 7-4

Table 7-8 Specifications of BTS3606 with respect to ODU3601Cs cascading ...................... 7-5


System DescriptionChapter 1 Overview of BTS3606

1-1

Chapter 1 Overview of BTS3606

The last two decades witness the boom of two generations of mobile communication systems: the analog system (1G) and the digital system (2G).

As a main stream of the 2G system, the code division multiple access 1 carrier (CDMA2000 1X) technology, advocated by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2), is now widely used for commercial purposes.

The CDMA2000 1X is compatible with IS-95A and IS-95B standards. The capacity of the CDMA2000 1X system increases substantially thanks to the new techniques such as reverse pilot, fast power control, and transmit diversity.

CDMA2000 1xEV-DO, a data optimized evolution of CDMA2000 1X, provides a peak data rate of 2.4 Mbps in forward links and 153.6 kbps in reverse links. It delivers diversified data services such as multimedia gaming, multimedia news, real-time video traffic updates, video phone, video conference, real-time security information, and location-base services.

This chapter first compares the CDMA2000 1X and the 1xEV-DO, and then introduces the Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO network solution and the role of the BTS3606 in this solution.

1.1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

The Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station supports both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO. Table 1-1 lists the differences between them.

Table 1-1 Comparison between CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

Item CDMA2000 1X 1xEV-DO

Peak data rate

Forward (RC3): 153.6 kbps

Reverse (RC3): 153.6 kbps

Forward: 2.4 Mbps

Reverse: 153.6 kbps

Code Convolutional code and Turbo code Turbo code

Modulation

Reverse: Hybrid phase shift keying (HPSK)

Forward: Quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK)

Reverse: HPSK

Forward: QPSK, 8-phase shift keying (8-PSK) and 16-quadrature amplitude modulation (16-QAM)



1-2

Item CDMA2000 1X 1xEV-DO

Handoff

Forward: Soft handoff and hard handoff

Reverse: Soft handoff and hard handoff

Forward: Virtual soft handoff

Reverse: Soft handoff

Rate/power control

Forward: Power control

Reverse: Power control

Forward: Rate control

Reverse: power control

Channel multiplex mode

Forward: Code division multiplex (CDM)

Reverse: Code division multiplex

Forward: Time division multiplex (TDM) and CDM

Reverse: CDM

1.2 Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO Network Solution

The Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO network solution comprises:

Base station subsystem/access network (BSS/AN) Core network (CN)

The operation and maintenance of the network is implemented through an integrated mobile network management system.

Figure 1-1 shows the structure of the Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO network solution.

As this manual focuses on the BTS3606 in the BSS/AN, the following figure details the structure of the BSS/AN.



1-3

Internet

PSTN/ISDN

PLMN

A3/A7

A1/A2

A10/A11Abis

A1/A2

BSC/PCF

BSC/PCF

MS/AT

A10/A

11

Abis

Abis

BSS/AN CN

BTS

Abis

BTSBTS

BTSBTS

BTSBTS

BTSBTS

BTSBTS

ODUODU

ODUODU

ODUODU

ODUODU

MS/AT

BTS3601C/ODU3601C BTS3606 cBTS3612BTS3612A/BTS3606A

Optical fiber

MS/AT

Mobile NetworkManagement System

Packet DomainNetwork Equipment

Circuit DomainNetwork Equipment

A13

A12

AN AAA

MS: Mobile station BTS: Base transceiver station ODU: Outdoor unit BSC: Base station controller PCF: Packet control function BSS: Base station subsystem CN: Core network PLMN: Public land mobile network AN: Access network ISDN: Integrated services digital network AT: Access terminal PSTN: Public service telephone network

Figure 1-1 Structure of the Huawei CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO hybrid network

Note:

The design of the BTS3601C cabinet is the same as that of the ODU3601C cabinet.

1.2.1 Introduction to BSS/AN

BSS is a concept used in the CDMA2000 1X network. It consists of:

Base transceiver station (BTS) Base station controller (BSC) Packet control function (PCF)

The PCF usually integrates with the BSC.

The ODU3601C, a soft BTS, is also a product in the Huawei BSS family.

AN is a concept used in the 1xEV-DO network. It consists of the 1xEV-DO BTS and BSC (integrated with PCF).



1-4

I. BTS

The BTS transmits and receives radio signals to enable the communication between the radio network system and the mobile station/access terminal (MS/AT).

Huawei provides a series of BTS products for radio coverage in different situations, including:

BTS3606

The indoor BTS3606 supports both CDMA2000 1X and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO standards. The maximum capacity of a single BTS3606 cabinet is six carriers. By using multi-channel modules, the BTS3606 can provide a maximum of 18 carriers.

BTS3606A

The outdoor BTS3606A supports both CDMA2000 1X and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO standards. The maximum capacity of a single BTS3606A cabinet is six carriers. By using multi-channel modules, the BTS3606A can provide a maximum of 18 carriers.

cBTS3612

The indoor cBTS3612 supports both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO standards. The maximum capacity of a single cabinet is 12 carriers.

BTS3612A

The outdoor BTS3612A supports both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO standards. The maximum capacity of a single cabinet is six carriers.

BTS3601C

The BTS3601C is an outdoor one-carrier BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X standard.

ODU3601C

The ODU3601C is an outdoor one-carrier soft BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X standard. It shares baseband processing resources with its master BTS to realize the transmission and receiving of radio signals.

II. BSC/PCF

The BSC performs the following functions:

BTS control and management Call connection and disconnection Mobility management Power control Radio resources management



1-5

Provision of stable and reliable radio connections for upper-layer services through soft/hard handoffs

The PCF manages radio-packet (R-P) connections. As radio resources are limited, they are released when subscribers are not sending or receiving any data. The peer-peer protocol (PPP) connections, however, is maintained.

The PCF shields radio mobility from upper-layer services through handoff functions.

III. MS/AT

MS is a mobile subscriber device used to originate and receive calls. It communicates with the BSS.

AT integrates a radio modem and a data interface to enable the access to a packet data network through the AN.

The AT is similar to a mobile station in a CDMA2000 1X system. It can be a computer (for example, a laptop) or a data device such as personal digital assistant (PDA).

1.2.2 Introduction to CN

The CN comprises the packet domain network and the circuit domain network.

I. Packet Domain Network

The packet domain network includes the following elements:

Packet data serving node (PDSN) Mobile internet protocol home agent (MIP HA) Authorization, authentication and accounting (AAA) Access network AAA (AN AAA)

They connect to and communicate with the Internet.

II. Circuit Domain Network

The circuit domain network includes the following elements:

Mobile switching center (MSC) Home location register (HLR) Gateway mobile switching center (GMSC)

These network elements connect to and communicate with the public land mobile network (PLMN), public switched telephone network (PSTN), or integrated services digital network (ISDN).



1-6

1.3 Role and Application of the BTS3606

The following describes the role of the BTS3606 in the CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO network and its application.

1.3.1 Role in the Network

The BTS3606 locates between the BSC and the MS/AT in the network. Under the control of the BSC, it serves one cell or several logical sectors.

Connecting with the BSC through the Abis interface, the BTS3606 helps the BSC manage radio resources, radio parameters and interfaces. It also implements radio transmission over the Um interface, as well as associated control functions.

1.3.2 Application of the BTS3606

The BTS3606 is an indoor BTS supporting multi-cell configuration.

The BTS3606 features medium capacity, compact size, easy installation, and flexible coverage. It is ideal for the areas with medium or high traffic density.

Compatible with CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO, the BTS3606 can operation in CDAM2000 1X mode, 1xEV-DO mode, or CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO hybrid mode.


System DescriptionChapter 2 Product Features

2-1

Chapter 2 Product Features

The BTS3606 is designed to satisfy customers' requirements for services, capacity, coverage, transmission, power supply, installation, maintenance, and so on.

This chapter introduces the features of the BTS3606 in terms of its technical performance, coverage, networking, operation and maintenance (O&M), and capacity expansion.

2.1 Technical Features

The BTS3606 boasts the following technical features:

Support both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO standards. Support smooth upgrade to 1xEV-DV (evolution – data and voice) based on

advanced system architecture. Support CDMA2000 1X / 1xEV-DO hybrid networking. The ratio of CDMA2000

1X and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO carriers is flexible. Allow mixed configuration of single-channel and multi-channel transceiver

modules. Support high-power coverage and large-capacity coverage using carriers of

different frequencies for a single sector. Adopt resource pool design to improve hardware resources utilization and

system's error tolerance capability. Adopt digital intermediate frequency (IF) technology to improve system

availability. Adopt intelligent fan control to increase the service life of fans and reduce the

noise. Support anti-interference through in-band adaptive wave filtering (applicable to

single-channel modules) Support 450 MHz, 800 MHz, and 1900 MHz bands. Support cascading with the ODU3601C to flexibly extend the coverage of radio

network. Support forward and reverse load control and access channel load control to

ensure the system capacity and the service quality. Support various service negotiations, including active negotiations, passive

negotiations, and non-negotiations. Support push to talk (PTT) functions. Support the combination of cabinets using optical fibers and mixed insertion of

different-band carriers in the same cabinet.



2-2

Note:

The BTS3606 supports the CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO by using different types of channel processing boards.

The channel element (CE) pool is employed in the CDMA2000 1X, but not in the 1xEV-DO. The BTS3606 supports single-channel and multi-channel module configurations by using different

types of transceiver modules.

2.2 Large Coverage

The BTS3606 can cover a wide area thanks to its excellent receiver and transmitter performance. Its coverage area can be further extended by cascading the Huawei ODU3601Cs.

2.2.1 Receiver Sensitivity

The main/diversity receiving technique is employed to optimize the receiving performance. In RC3, the receiver sensitivity of the BTS3606 is better than:

–127 dBm when equipped with single-channel modules –126 dBm when equipped with multi-channel modules

2.2.2 Transmit Power (Measured at RF Port)

The following lists the transmit power measured at the radio frequency (RF) port of the cabinet. For details, see section 7.3 “Transmitter and Receiver Specifications".

I. Single-Channel Module Configuration

When the BTS operates at the 450 MHz or 800 MHz band, the maximum average transmit power per carrier is 25 W.

When the BTS operates at the 1900 MHz band, the maximum average transmit power per carrier is 20 W.

By using high-power combiners, two powers can be combined to output an average transmit power up to 50 W when the BTS operates at the 450 MHz or 800 MHz band, and 40 W when the BTS operates at 1900 MHz band.

II. Multi-Channel Module Configuration

The maximum average transmit power of the BTS3606 operating in different bands is as follows:



2-3

450 MHz band and 800 MHz band: 50 W 1900 MHz band: 40 W

2.2.3 Cascading with the ODU3601C

The BTS3606 can cascade one or more ODU3601Cs using optical fibers.

The BTS3606 can provide a maximum of 12 optical interfaces. In a CDMA2000 1X or CDMA2000 1xEV-DO network, each optical interface can connect three ODU3601Cs in serial to extend the radio coverage.

2.3 Flexible Networking

The BTS3606 enables flexible networking and supports various networking modes by providing various interfaces and clock resources.

2.3.1 Networking Interfaces

The BTS3606 supports the networking by using E1 or T1 links. It supports inverse multiplexing on ATM (IMA), user network interface (UNI), and timeslot interface.

The Abis interface supports link backup function, which significantly enhances system availability.

2.3.2 Networking Modes

The BTS3606 supports chain, star, tree, fractional ATM, and cascading ODU networking modes.

The BTS3606 can share the transmission network with GSM BTSs. In addition, it can provide the GSM BTSs with transmission channels on the Abis interface in fractional ATM mode.

2.3.3 Clock Sources

The BTS3606 supports the following clock sources to adapt to various networking conditions:

Global positioning system (GPS) clock Global navigation satellite system (GLONASS) clock Other external clock sources

With the high precision clock module (HPCM) equipped, the BTS3606 can keep clock synchronization for 24 hours after the external clock source signal is lost.



2-4

2.4 Convenient Operation and Maintenance

Operation and maintenance of the BTS3606 is implemented through the local maintenance terminal (LMT) and the iManager M2000 mobile network management system.

The following describes the maintenance functions.

2.4.1 System Status Monitoring

This function can show to users the system operation and resource status, the configuration and status of the local cell and logical cell.

2.4.2 Data Configuration

The BTS3606 supports dynamic data configuration. The configured data takes effect without the necessity to reset the BTS.

It also supports batch processing of data. You can configure the common data for multiple network elements at a time.

Data backup function is also available.

2.4.3 Alarm Processing

The alarm processing function includes:

Alarm collection Alarm clearing Alarm querying Alarm shielding Alarm filtering

2.4.4 Security Management

The security management function includes:

User login authentication Command authority restriction Confirmation of important operations User group management Timeout locking

2.4.5 Test Function

The BTS3606 supports both offline and online tests. The tests include:



2-5

Board loopback test Self-test Trunk loopback test

2.4.6 Site Monitoring

A data transmission channel is available for the monitoring device in the equipment room to enable attendance-free operation and centralized monitoring of the BTS3606.

2.4.7 Upgrade

Users can upgrade the system remotely. The system can back off to the original version if the upgrade fails.

2.4.8 Operation on the Equipment

The BTS3606 supports front operation, and online insertion and removal of baseband boards. This facilitates the maintenance, upgrade, and expansion of the system.

2.4.9 Auto Restart

When the BTS3606 is out of service owing to power failure or transmission failure, it can restart automatically right after the faults are cleared.

2.4.10 Reverse Maintenance

With the reverse maintenance function, users can log in to the back administration module (BAM) from the LMT through the network port on the BCKM to perform operation, maintenance, and management over the whole BSS.

2.5 Easy Upgrade and Expansion

Thanks to its high compatibility, flexible configuration and modular structure, the BTS3606 can be easily upgraded and expanded to meet different requirements.

2.5.1 High Compatibility

The BTS3606 supports CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO and smooth evolution to 1xEV-DV.

By replacing the CCPMs with CECMs and upgrading the software, the BTS3606 in a CDMA2000 1X network can be upgraded to support CDMA2000 1X EV-DO. This protects the operator's investment.



2-6

2.5.2 Flexible Configuration

The BTS3606 supports multi-cell configuration. The ODU3601C cascaded with the BTS3606 can be defined as an independent cell to realize flexible coverage.

The BTS3606 supports omni cells and 3-sector cells.

2.5.3 Smooth Expansion

Modular structure allows the BTS3606 to be expanded by simply adding modules.

By using multi-channel modules, the capacity of a single-channel BTS3606 cabinet can be expanded from 6 carriers to 18 carriers.

2.6 Serial Products for Seamless Coverage

Huawei provides a full range of BTS products to enable a seamless coverage for urban, suburb, and rural areas, highway, and hot spots.

Table 2-1 describes the applications of the Huawei BTS products.

Table 2-1 Applications of Huawei BTS products

Model Max carriers per cabinet Capacity Application Type

Single- channel 6 Medium

Medium and small cities, towns.

Low requirement for equipment room.

Indoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

BTS3606

Multi- channel 18 Large Densely populated areas and

cities Indoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

Single- channel 6 Medium

Densely populated areas and cities, medium and small cities and towns.

Outdoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

BTS3606A Multi- channel 18 Large

High-traffic areas where room space is unavalble, densely populated areas and cities

Outdoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

cBTS3612 12 Large Densely populated areas and cities

Indoor BTS supporting both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO

BTS3612A 6 Medium High-traffic areas where room space is unavalble

Outdoor BTS supporting both CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO



2-7

Model Max carriers per cabinet Capacity Application Type

BTS3601C 1 Small Indoor, underground, highway, and railroad

Outdoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X (also applicable to indoor conditions)

ODU3601C 1 Small Indoor, underground, highway, and railroad

Outdoor BTS supporting CDMA2000 1X (also applicable to indoor conditions)


System DescriptionChapter 3 Product Structure

3-1

Chapter 3 Product Structure

This chapter introduces the physical features and configuration of the BTS3606 cabinet, and the functional subsystems and physical interfaces of the BTS3606.

3.1 Cabinet Physical Features

The BTS3606 cabinet complies with IEC297 specifications.

The dimensions of the cabinet are (excluding the components on the top of the cabinet):

Height x Width x Depth = 1,400 mm (55.12 in.) x 600 mm (23.62 in.) x 650 mm (25.59 in.)

Figure 3-1 shows the BTS3606 cabinet.

Figure 3-1 BTS3606 cabinet

The BTS3606 cabinet features:

Light weight thanks to its aluminum alloy materials Excellent electrical conductivity and shielding effect



3-2

Good ventilation thanks to reasonable engineering of air ducts Easy installation and maintenance Nice and attractive outlook

3.2 Cabinet Configuration

The BTS3606 cabinet is composed of:

Baseband subrack Fan box Carrier subrack, CCDU subrack Switch box Cabling trough Power supply subrack

Figure 3-2 shows a fully equipped (with six carriers) BTS3606 cabinet.

CDDU Switch box

Fan box

CCPM

CCPM

CCPM

BCIM

BCKM

CCPM

CCPM

CCPM

BCKM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

Cabling trough

Cabling trough

PSU

PSU

PSU

PSU

Tool box

Figure 3-2 A fully equipped BTS3606 cabinet

Table 3-1 lists the boards and modules of the BTS3606.



3-3

Table 3-1 Boards and modules of the BTS3606

Acronyms Full name

BCIM BTS control interface module

BCKM BTS control & clock module

CCPM Compact-BTS channel process module

CECM Compact-BTS EV-DO channel module

CDDU Compact-BTS dual duplexer unit

CHPA Compact-BTS high power amplifier

CPCM Compact-BTS power combination module

CTRM Compact-BTS transceiver module

CMTR Compact-BTS multi-channel transceiver module

CMPA Compact-BTS multi-channel power amplifier

HPCM High precision clock module

PSU Power supply unit

Note:

The BTS3606 uses the CCPM to support CDMA2000 1X and the CECM to support 1xEV-DO. The same BTS3606 cabinet can be equipped with CCPMs and CECMs to support both CDMA2000

1X and 1xEV-DO. The CPCM provides power combination when the BTS3606 operates in 1900 MHz band. The CTRM and CHPA are multi-channel modules.

3.3 Functional Structure of the BTS3606

The BTS3606 system consists of the following functional subsystems:

Baseband subsystem RF subsystem Power supply subsystem Antenna subsystem

Figure 3-3 shows the functional structure of the BTS3606.



3-4

BSC

Baseband subsystem

Power supply subsystem

RF subsystem

Abisinterface

Um interface

MS/ATAntenna subsystem

-48V /+24 V

BTS3606

Figure 3-3 BTS3606 functional structure

3.3.1 Baseband Subsystem

The baseband subsystem comprises the BCKM, BCIM, CCPM, CECM, and HPCM. It has the following functions:

Provides Abis interface and processes the Abis interface protocol. Provides a fiber interface to the RF subsystem and processes the Um physical

layer and common channel (CCH) media access control (MAC) layer protocols. Implements modulation/demodulation of CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO baseband

signals and coding/decoding of CDMA channels. Provides synchronization clock signals to the BTS. Performs system resource management, O&M, and environment monitoring.

3.3.2 RF Subsystem

The RF subsystem consists of the CTRM, CHPA, CDDU, and CPCM.

On forward links, the RF subsystem processes signals as follows:

1) Performs power-adjustable up conversion and linear power amplification on modulated transmit signals.

2) Completes power combination (optional). 3) Filters transmit signals. 4) Sends the signals to the antenna subsystem.

On reverse links, the RF subsystem processes signals as follows:

1) Filters the signals received by the antenna to suppress out-band interferences. 2) Performs low-noise amplification. 3) Performs noise factor-adjustable down conversion and channel-selective

filtering. 4) Sends the signals to the baseband subsystem.



3-5

3.3.3 Antenna Subsystem

The antenna subsystem includes the RF antenna and the satellite synchronization antenna.

I. RF Antenna

This part includes the following components:

Transmit and receive antennas Feeders Antenna lightning arrester (optional) Tower mounted amplifier (optional)

The RF antenna transmits and receives signals over the Um interface.

II. Satellite Synchronization Antenna

This part includes the following components:

Satellite signal receiving antenna Feeder Lightning arrester

The satellite synchronization antenna receives synchronization signals from GPS or GLONASS satellites to provide a precise clock source for the BTS.

3.3.4 Power Supply Subsystem

When the BTS3606 uses –48V DC input, the power supply subsystem comprises:

Power supply unit (PSU) Power distribution unit Lightning protection unit Monitoring unit

The PSU is a DC/DC power supply unit with –48V DC input and +27V DC output.

The power supply subsystem boasts the following features:

Current equalizing Hot backup Centralized management Distributed power supply

These features improve the reliability of power supply.

When the BTS3606 uses +24V DC input, the PSU is not equipped.



3-6

3.4 Physical Interfaces

The BTS3606 provides the following physical interfaces listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Physical interfaces on the BTS3606

Interface Type Quantity Function

E1 8 Abis interface

T1 8

These interfaces connect to the transmission system that connects to the BSC. They support IMA/UNI, cascading, and ATM over fractional ATM function.

When E1 is used, 75Ω and 120Ω load interfaces are available.

When T1 is used, 100Ω load interface is available.

ODU3601C cascading interface

Optical fiber 8 One CCPM provides two optical interfaces to connect ODU3601Cs. A maximum of three ODU3601Cs can be cascaded in serial.

GPS/GLONASS 2 Provides long-term stable clock signals.

Clock interface External synchronization clock input

1 Provides high-precision clock when GPS/GLONASS clock signals are unavailable.

Maintenance interface

Ethernet interface 1 Provides local maintenance path.

Power supply 1 Provides –48V/+24V DC power input. Power supply and protection ground (PGND) PGND 1 Provides lightning protection for the BTS3606.

Monitoring interface

Environment monitoring interface

1 Connects to the EAC.

Antenna interface RF signal 6

These interfaces serve three sectors. Each sector corresponds to two DIN connectors that can be used for both transmitting and receiving.


System DescriptionChapter 4 Major Functions

4-1

Chapter 4 Major Functions

The BTS3606 complies with the following CDMA2000 1X specifications:

The Um interface supports TIA/EIA IS-2000 Rel.A and is compatible with TIA/EIA-95-A/B.

The minimum performance of the BTS3606 satisfies TIA/EIA-97-D requirements.

The BTS3606 complies with the following 1xEV-DO specifications:

The Um interface supports the C.S0024-0 standard. The minimum performance of the BTS3606 satisfies C.S0032-0 requirements.

This chapter introduces the major CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO functions supported by the BTS3606.

4.1 Power Control and Rate Control

The CDMA system is a self-interference system. Each subscriber is an interference source to other subscribers. If every MS transmits at the minimum power needed, the system capacity will reach the maximum. Therefore, power control directly determines system capacity and quality of service (QoS).

Operating in the CDMA2000 1X system, the BTS3606 adopts power control mechanism.

Power control is classified into:

Forward power control, used to control the transmit power of the BTS Reverse power control, used to control the transmit power of the MS

Operating in the 1xEV-DO system, the BTS3606 adopts:

Rate control in the forward direction Power control in the reverse direction

4.1.1 Forward Power Control

There are several methods to realize forward power control, depending on the MS's protocol version and system parameters.

I. Power Control Based on PMRM

In the power control based on power measurement report message (PMRM), the MS determines the method and frequency of reporting PMRM according to the received control message contained in the system parameter message.



4-2

II. Power Control Based on EIB

In the power control based on erasure indicator bit (EIB), the MS detects forward frame quality and sends this information to the BTS in an EIB. The BTS adjusts the transmit power according to the EIB information.

III. Forward Fast Power Control

The MS uses power control bits to adjust the transmit power of the BTS. The power control bit can be transmitted at a maximum speed of 800 bps.

The CDMA2000 1X system supports high-speed data services, which put high requirements on forward power control. The forward fast power control can accurately control the transmit power of forward channels. As a result, the interference is minimized and capacity increased.

4.1.2 Reverse Power Control

Reverse power control includes open-loop power control and closed-loop power control. The former is further classified into inner-loop power control and outer-loop power control.

I. Open-Loop Power Control

The MS determines its transmit power to access the network according to the strength of the received pilot signal.

II. Closed-Loop Power Control

The BTS sends a power control command to the MS, and adjusts its transmit power according to the feedback from the MS.

Figure 4-1 shows the principle of closed-loop power control.

MS BTS BSCEb/Nt FER

Power Control Bit

Eb/Nt changingquantity

Inner loop Outer loop

Figure 4-1 Closed-loop power control



4-3

In the inner-loop power control, the BTS sends the power control bit to the MS according to the received Eb/Nt value.

In the outer-loop power control, the BSC adjusts the Eb/Nt value according to the frame error rate (FER) of the received reverse signal for CDMA 1x, and according to the packet error rate (PER) of the received reverse signal for 1xEV-DO.. Then the BTS sends power control bits to the MS based on the new Eb/Nt value. In this way, the transmit power of the MS can be controlled accordingly.

4.1.3 Rate Control

Rate control applies to 1xEV-DO forward links only. The AT controls the rate of the forward traffic channel through data rate control (DRC) channel assignment.

4.2 Handoff

When the MS/AT moves out of the serving cell/sector or the signal quality deteriorates to an unacceptable level, the MS/AT will be handed off to another cell/sector to maintain the ongoing traffic.

If the system determines that a handoff will help to improve the call quality and network performance, it will also trigger a handoff procedure.

Different from the CDMA2000 1X, the 1xEV-DO also introduces virtual soft handoff function in forward links.

4.2.1 Soft Handoff

The soft handoff occurs between neighbor cells that operate on the same frequency and belong to different BTSs. The two BTSs can belong to the same BSC, or two different BSCs connected to each other with A3/A7 interface.

In the soft handoff procedure, the MS maintains the connection with the previous cell till it establishes the communication with the new cell. The MS can establish radio links with multiple cells, select and combine the data received from these links to improve conversation quality and reduce call drops.

4.2.2 Softer Handoff

The softer handoff occurs between neighbor sectors that operate on the same frequency and belong to the same BTS. It is a special case of soft handoff.

As the MS establishes radio links with multiple sectors under the same BTS, the BTS can combine the diversity signals received by these sectors. Therefore, the conversation quality during softer handoff is better than that of soft handoff.



4-4

4.2.3 Virtual Soft Handoff

Virtual soft handoff is applicable to 1xEV-DO forward links only.

The AT monitors all pilot signals in the active set and selects the best as its serving sector. Then, it receives signaling messages and data from the selected sector. This process is called virtual software handoff.

A cell knows whether it is selected according to the DRC cover.

4.2.4 Hard Handoff

In the hard handoff procedure, the MS first terminates the connection with the previous cell, and then sets up the connection with the new cell. Therefore, call drops may occur.

Hard handoff includes:

Intra-frequency hard handoff: Handoff between the BSCs without A3/A7 interface in-between.

Inter-frequency hard handoff: Handoff between cells operating on different frequencies.

4.3 Radio Configuration

The CDMA2000 1X physical layer supports multiple radio configurations (RCs). Different RCs support the frames of the different rate sets, and feature different channel configurations and spread spectrum structures.

The transmission combinations supported by the BTS3606 include:

Forward RC1 and reverse RC1 Forward RC2 and reverse RC2 Forward RC3 or RC4, and reverse RC3 Forward RC5 and reverse RC4

Each RC supports traffic channels of different data rates. The capability of the CDMA2000 1X system varies with RCs. For example, the CDMA2000 1X system with RC1 and RC2 is compatible with IS-95A/B.

4.4 Channel Configuration

A series of physical channels are defined on the Um interface. These physical channels are classified by channel features. To support higher-rate data transmission, the 1xEV-DO uses a channel design different from that of the CDMA2000 1X.



4-5

4.4.1 CDMA2000 1X Channels

The following lists CDMA2000 1X channels.

I. Forward Channels

CDMA2000 1X forward channels include forward common channels and forward dedicated channels.

Forward common channels are further divided into:

Forward pilot channel (F-PICH)

F-PICH provides synchronization signals to the MSs operating in the BTS coverage. Different from other channels, the F-PICH is an unmodulated spread spectrum signal that is always in transmit state.

Forward synchronization channel (F-SYNCH)

F-SYNCH provides initial time synchronization information to MSs operating in the BTS coverage.

Forward paging channel (F-PCH)

F-PCH sends overhead messages and MS-specific messages to the MSs operating in the BTS coverage. Each CDMA channel in a sector supports seven paging channels at most.

Forward quick paging channel (F-QPCH)

The BTS uses the F-QPCH to send the paging order and system configuration change order to slotted-mode MSs, instructing them to receive the paging messages. As a result, the MS battery energy is saved.

Forward common control channel (F-CCCH)

The BTS uses the CCCH to send overhead messages and MS-specific messages to the MS.

Forward dedicated channels are further divided into:

Forward dedicated control channel (F-DCCH)

F-DCCH carries traffic information and signaling messages between the MS and the BTS.

Forward fundamental channel (F-FCH)

F-FCH carries traffic information between the MS and the BTS.

Forward Supplemental Channel (F-SCH)

F-SCH carries traffic information between the MS and the BTS. It is applicable to RC3, RC4, and RC5 only.



4-6

II. Reverse Channels

CDMA2000 1X reverse channels include reverse common channels and reverse dedicated channels.

Reverse common channels are further divided into:

Reverse access channel (R-ACH)

The MS communicates with the BTS and responds to paging channel messages through the R-ACH.

The MS uses random access protocol to initiate an access procedure. With respect to each supported paging channel, 32 access channels can be supported at most.

Reverse enhanced access channel (R-EACH)

The MS initiates the communication with the BTS or responds to dedicated paging channel messages through the R-EACH.

Reverse dedicated channels are further divided into:

Reverse fundamental channel (R-FCH)

R-FCH carries traffic information between the MS and the BTS.

Reverse dedicated control channel (R-DCCH)

R-DCCH carries traffic information and signaling messages between the MS and the BTS.

Reverse supplemental channel (R-SCH)

R-SCH carries traffic information between the MS and the BTS. It is applicable to RC3 and RC4 only.

4.4.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Channels

The following lists CDMA2000 1xEV-DO channels.

I. Forward Channels

The 1xEV-DO forward channels adopt TDM mode. It includes four types of channels:

Pilot channel

Different from the continuous pilot of IS-95/1X system, the pilot channel is only transmitted on the activated forward channels in a 1xEV-DO system.

Pilot channel is an unmodulated signal used for AT synchronization and other associated functions.

Media access control (MAC) channel



4-7

There are three code sub-channels in the MAC channel:

–Reverse activity (RA) sub-channel, used for reverse overload control on the Um interface.

–Reverse power control (RPC) sub-channel, used for reverse power control.

–Data rate control lock (DRCLock) sub-channel, used by the AN to inform the AT whether the DRC channel of the AT can be properly demodulated. It plays an important role in helping the AT with the forward virtual handoff.

Control channel

The control channel is similar to the paging channel in a CDMA2000 1X system. It broadcasts various overhead messages and transmits other uni-cast messages such as paging messages.

Traffic channel

The traffic channel carries traffic data. It is a TDM channel serving multiple subscribers.

II. Reverse Channels

The 1xEV-DO reverse channels include reverse access channels and reverse traffic channels.

Reverse access channel

The AT originates calls or responds to network paging messages through the reverse access channel. The reverse access channel covers pilot sub-channel (transmitted on I channel) and data sub-channel (transmitted on Q channel).

Reverse traffic channel

The reverse traffic channel covers pilot channel, MAC channel, acknowledgement (ACK) channel, and data channel.

Pilot channel helps the coherence demodulation and phase estimation of the BTS3606.

MAC channel consists of reverse rate indicator (RRI) sub-channel and DRC sub-channel.

The AT uses the DRC sub-channel to report the quality of the forward channel to the AN. The AN can adjust the rate and the sector for transmitting data to the AT according to DRC channel messages. In this way, the air resources can be best utilized.

The RRI sub-channel indicates to the data channel the rate for transmitting data.



4-8

ACK channel helps the AT notify the AN whether the data packets from forward traffic channel are correctly received. This function helps AT adjust its forward rate estimation to improve the performance of the system.

The data channel carries reverse data. In a 1xEV-DO system, it can transmit data at five rates: 9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 76.8 kbps, and 153.6 kbps.

4.5 Multi-Channel Function

The BTS3606 supports multi-channel module configuration. The single-channel cabinet can hold both the single-channel and multi-channel modules.

A single-channel transceiver module (consisting of one CTRM and one CHPA) can process one carrier signal. A multi-channel transceiver module (consisting of one CMTR and one CMPA) can process three carrier signals. A single-channel cabinet equipped with multi-channel transceiver modules can realize the maximum configuration of S(6/6/6), that is, 18 sector carriers.

The multi-channel transceiver module supports 1900 MHz and 800 MHz bands. The BTS3606 of later version will support more bands.

4.6 Receiving Diversity

The BTS3606 supports receiving diversity function. This function is implemented through two sets of independent receiving equipment, each of which comprises the antenna, feeder, CDDU, and main/diversity receiving channels.

The two sets of receiving equipment demodulate the received signals at the same time. Then the baseband processing unit decodes the signals with diversity combining algorithm so as to provide certain diversity gain.

Receiving diversity enhances the anti-attenuation capability of the BTS receiver, and ensures the receiving effect of the BTS under complicated radio environment.

4.7 Cell Breathing

Under the control of the BSC, the BTS3606 adjusts its transmit power to control the coverage area and thus balance the system load as required.

The controllable range of the transmit power for cell breathing function is from 0 dB to 24 dB, with a control step of 0.5dB.


System DescriptionChapter 5 Product Reliability

5-1

Chapter 5 Product Reliability

This chapter introduces the system reliability, hardware reliability, and software reliability measures of the BTS3606.

5.1 System Reliability

This section introduces the measures employed by the BTS3606 to improve system reliability.

5.1.1 De-rating Design

De-rating design aims to lower the electrical stress and temperature stress on the high-power or heat-generating components to a value less than the rated one. It delays performance degradation and prolongs the service life of components.

5.1.2 Quality Control of Components

The category, specifications and manufacturers of the components are carefully selected based on the requirements for high reliability and maintainability.

The replaceability is also considered in selecting components.

All components feature high quality that is proved by burn-in test and strict inspection. Strict quality control is implemented during assembling process to ensure high reliability and stability in the long run.

5.1.3 Thermal Design

Thermal design focuses on the following aspects to minimize the impact of temperature changes on product performance:

Component selection Circuit design Mechanical design Heat dissipation

The thermal design of the BTS3606 ensures that it can operate reliably in a wide range of temperatures.



5-2

5.1.4 EMC Design

The EMC design ensures that the electromagnetic interference (EMI) from other equipment does not cause an unacceptable impact to BTS3606 performance. It also ensures that the EMI generated by the BTS3606 does not cause an unacceptable impact to other equipment's performance.

5.1.5 Redundancy Design

For the purpose of reliability, the system is designed with several sets of units performing the same function. The system will not fail unless certain amounts of units become faulty at the same time.

5.1.6 Reliability Measures for Input Power

The BTS3606 provides the following measures to ensure the reliability of its input power:

Protection against reverse connection of power supply Testing on the input voltage, and generating alarms when the voltage is too low

or too high Protection against sharp voltage drop and lightning strikes Protection of program and data in case of power failure

5.1.7 Maintainability Design

Reasonable internal wiring of the BTS3606 enables easy board replacement. To replace a faulty board, you only need to remove the cables of this board.

The board can be removed and inserted directly from the front of the cabinet.

In addition, board indicators are provided to help identify board status.

5.1.8 Fault Monitoring and Handling

The BTS3606 system can detect and diagnose software and hardware faults. It can record, output and print fault information. In addition, it collects environment information and generates alarms if there is any exception.

When faults occur to the hardware, the system first locates the fault, then isolates the faulty component and automatically activates the standby components to ensure normal operation.

The system confirms a hardware fault through repeated detection, thus avoiding the reconfiguration of the system or the degradation of QoS due to contingent faults.



5-3

For software faults, the system provides automatic error-correction and recovery functions, including restarting and reloading.

The BTS3606 also records, outputs, and notifies the users of critical faults through the network management system, so that users can easily operate and maintain the system through a maintenance console.

5.2 Hardware Reliability

This section introduces the measures employed by the BTS3606 to improve hardware reliability.

5.2.1 Protection against Wrong Insertion of Boards

When a board is inserted into a wrong slot, the special guide pins will prevent the board from touching the backplane. This avoids possible damage to the backplane owing to wrong insertion.

5.2.2 BCKM Active-Standby Switchover

The active BCKM backs up the files to the standby BCKM periodically. Once a critical fault occurs to the active BCKM, the standby BCKM will become active to ensure the normal operation.

5.2.3 BCIM Backup Slots

The BTS3606 provides backup slots for the BCIM. Normally the BCIMs reside in the upper slots. When the upper slots are faulty, the lower slots can be used.

5.2.4 BCIM/BCKM Power Backup

The power modules of the BCIM and BCKM are mutually backed up. When the power module of one board fails, the power module of another board is used instead.

5.2.5 N+1 Redundancy for Baseband Fans

The baseband fans operation in the N+1 redundancy mode, with one standby fan equipped. When one fan fails, this standby fan starts working to ensure cooling effect.



5-4

5.2.6 Abis Interface Link Backup

The BTS3606 supports Abis interface link backup function to improve the reliability of links. If the active link is faulty, the system automatically carries out active-standby link switchover.

5.2.7 CE Pool Design for CCPMs

The CCPMs operate in CE pool mode. They are connected into a daisy chain to maximize the utilization of channel resources and enable flexible channel capacity configuration for each sector carrier.

5.2.8 Status Monitoring and Alarm Report

The BCKM monitors the status of other boards or modules, and reports alarms when fault occurs.

5.2.9 Distributed Power Supply

The BTS3606 adopts a distributed power supply. The DC/DC power modules operate in N+1 redundancy mode.

When an error occurs to a power module, an alarm is generated and sent to the BAM. You can replace the faulty module during the live operation of the system.

5.3 Software Reliability

This section introduces the measures employed by the BTS3606 to improve software reliability.

5.3.1 Periodic Check on Key Resources

The BTS3606 checks the software resources that are occupied for a long time. If it finds that certain resource becomes unavailable owing to software error, it will release the resource and outputs logs and alarms.

5.3.2 Process Monitoring

Process monitoring provides a channel for outputting various software and hardware faults while the software is running. This function monitors the running status of a specific task or system, and reports the information to associated devices.



5-5

5.3.3 Data Check

Data check consists of the following contents:

Checking the consistency of data on different processing boards, restoring the data, and outputting logs and alarms.

Checking the consistency of the data entered by the user to ensure correct reference relation among data.

Rollback function to restore the data to the initial state when the modification of some data fails.

5.3.4 Fault Isolation

In the BTS3606, if a fault occurs to a software module, other software modules will not be affected.

The BTS3606 software also features powerful fault tolerance and correction capability. A minor operation exception will not cause system restart.

5.3.5 Reversible Upgrade

The BTS3606 allows program and data restoration. When an upgrade fails, you can restore the original program and data configuration.

5.3.6 Log Function

The O&M software can automatically record user's operations and save them into a log file.

When an unknown error occurs to the system, you can refer to the log files to find out the normal status for the purpose of fault location or data restoration.


System DescriptionChapter 6 Operation and Maintenance

6-1

Chapter 6 Operation and Maintenance

The operation and maintenance (O&M) over the BTS3606 can be performed through the local O&M system and the Huawei iManager M2000 Mobile Integrated Network Management System (hereinafter referred to as M2000 system).

This chapter introduces the structure and functions of the local O&M system and the M2000 system. Detailed information of the M2000 system is available in related M2000 manuals.

6.1 Structure of the O&M System

This section introduces the structure of the local O&M system and M2000 system.

6.1.1 Structure of Local O&M System

Figure 6-1 shows the structure of the local O&M system used for BSS/AN.

Internet

IPoEIPoA

IPoA

Router

IPoE

IPoE

Router

IPoEBSC

BTS

BTS

IPoA : IP over ATM IPoE: IP over Ethernet BTS: Base transceiver station BSC: Base station controller

Figure 6-1 BSS/AN's local O&M system

I. Far-End Maintenance

To realize the far-end maintenance on BTS, a local maintenance terminal (LMT) is connected to the BSC BAM.

The local O&M system of the BSS is designed in client/server (C/S) structure, where LMT is a client and BAM a server.



6-2

The far-end maintenance process is as follows:

1) The user enters commands through the LMT. 2) The BAM processes commands from the LMT. 3) The BAM sends these commands to the host (BSC or BTS) and waits for

responses. 4) The BAM records the operation results (such as success, failure, timeout, or

abnormality) and sends the results to the LMT in a specified format.

In this way, users can manage the BTSs under the control of the BSC and carry out network planning in a centralized way.

II. Near-End Maintenance

To realize the near-end maintenance, the LMT is directly connected to the BTS through a network cable.

Users can log in to the BTS through Telnet client and execute MML commands to maintain the BTS.

Users can also employ the reverse maintenance function to log in to the BSC BAM from the BTS to realize the maintenance over the whole BSS.

6.1.2 Structure of M2000 System

The M2000 system provides centralized maintenance functions. In this system, the M2000 server is the core. Various network elements (such as BSC, MSC, and HLR) connect to the M2000 system through local area networks (LANs) or wide area networks (WANs).

The BSC connects to the M2000 system through the BAM.

Figure 6-2 shows the typical networking of the M2000 system.



6-3

M2000 ServerWS

Dialup ServerNE

PSTN

E1,DDN,X.25,frame relay

NE

NE

WS

Router

Router

Figure 6-2 Networking of M2000 system

Through the M2000 system, users can complete the following functions:

Configuration management: Collect, store, query, and modify the data of network elements (NEs) in the network.

Performance management: Register the traffic measurement tasks of NEs on the client, and view the execution results of the tasks registered on the whole network.

Fault management: Obtain required alarm data of the NEs from the alarm client by setting combined conditions, view query results, and perform associated management operations.

6.2 O&M Functions

The O&M system provides full range of functions for users to operate and maintain the equipment, such as security management, alarm management, and loading management.

6.2.1 Security Management

To prevent illegal operations, the O&M system provides strict security measures to manage and control users and operation terminals.

A user has to pass the authentication before he can log in to the system and operate the BTS3606. The system provides a multi-level authority mechanism so that only authorized users can use specified command sets.



6-4

The timeout locking function is provided. When the user does not operate the system within a specific period, the system will automatically lock the screen. The user needs to enter the password again before he can continue with the operation.

Before the execution of important commands, the system provides warnings and asks for confirmation.

6.2.2 Alarm Management

The O&M system performs centralized management over the alarms of the BSC and the BTS. The BSS maintenance console in the system provides real-time alarm management functions, including:

Alarm collection Alarm clearing Alarm query Alarm processing Alarm storage Alarm interpretation Alerting Alarm shielding Alarm filtering Alarm acknowledgement Alarm analyzing

In addition, the alarm management system provides rich online help and multi-level filtering for alarms to help uses locate and remove faults.

While reporting alarms, the BTS3606 drives status indicators and alarm box to give out audible and visible alarms.

6.2.3 Loading Management

The loading management function allows the loading of the software and the configuration data.

Software loading involves the downloading and activation of the central processing unit (CPU) software and the field programmable gate array (FPGA) logic.

Configuration data loading involves the downloading and uploading of configuration data.



6-5

6.2.4 Configuration Management

Configuration management involves the configuration of the BTS3606 equipment and radio resources. This function also allows users to query configuration data and check data consistency.

This function supports both online and offline data configuration, as well as batch processing of data.

6.2.5 Equipment Management

Equipment management allows users to monitor and query the status of boards and the system. It also provides user operation logs and system running logs to facilitate fault location and removal.

The equipment management function includes:

Version query Status query Electronic label query Log management Equipment reset Resource block/unblock Power supply management

6.2.6 Test Management

Test management functions help users locate faults and optimize system performance. Supported tests include:

Board loopback test Self-detection test Abis link test

6.2.7 Tracing Management

Tracing management functions help users locate faults and analyze system performance. The objects can be traced include various interfaces and indices.

The traced results of some indices (such as CPU load, board temperature, CTRM transmit power, and receive signal strength indicator) can be displayed in graphics on real-time basis.


System DescriptionChapter 7 Technical Specifications

7-1

Chapter 7 Technical Specifications

This chapter provides the technical specifications of the BTS3606, including engineering, capacity, transmitter/receiver performance, and ODU cascading specifications.

7.1 Engineering Specifications

Table 7-1 lists the engineering specifications of the BTS3606.

Table 7-1 Engineering specifications of the BTS3606

Item Specifications

Cabinet dimensions 1,400 mm (55.12 in.) x 600 mm (23.62 in.) x 650 mm (25.59 in.) (height x width x depth)

Cabinet weight A fully equipped cabinet: < 250 kg (551.25 lb)

An empty cabinet: <150 kg (330.75 lb)

Power supply –48 V DC (ranging from –40 V DC to –60 V DC)

+24 V DC (ranging from +21V DC to +29V DC)

Power consumption ≤ 3600 W

Ambient temperature –5 ÿC to +50 ÿC(23ÿF to 122ÿF)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%

Equipment room noise ≤ 65 dBA (Varies with the ambient temperature)

Reliability

Availability ≥ 99.999%

MTBF ≥ 100,000 hours

MTTR ≤ 1 hour

7.2 Capacity Specifications

The maximum capacity of one BTS3606 cabinet is 6 sector carriers. Equipped with multi-channel modules, the BTS3606 can provide 18 sector carriers.

The BTS3606 supports two types of channel processing boards: CCPM and CECM. The former supports CDMA2000 1X protocols, and the later supports CDMA2000 1xEV-DO protocols.



7-2

7.2.1 CDMA2000 1X Capacity

The BTS3606 capacity depends on the number of sector carriers configured. One sector carrier serves about 20 IS95 subscribers or 40 CDMA2000 1X subscribers.

The maximum reverse channel capacity of one carrier (three sectors configuration) is 128 channels.

7.2.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Capacity

The BTS capacity in 1xEV-DO network depends on the number of sector carriers configured. One sector carrier can serve up to 48 subscribers.

The maximum reverse channel capacity of one carrier (three sectors configuration) is 96 channels.

7.3 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications

This section provides the specifications of the BTS3606 transmitters and receivers operating in different bands.

7.3.1 Transmitter and Receiver Specifications in 450 MHz Band

Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 lists the specifications of BTS3606 transmitters and receivers operating in 450 MHz band.

Table 7-2 Specifications of BTS3606 transmitters operating in 450 MHz band

Item Specifications

Operating band 460 MHz to 470 MHz

Channel bandwidth 1.23 MHz

Channel precision 25 kHz, 20 kHz

Frequency tolerance ≤ ! 0.05 ppm

Transmit power

25 W (the maximum value measured at the RF port of the cabinet when the BTS works in the single-channel mode)

50W (the maximum value measured at the RF port of the cabinet when the BTS works at the altitude less than 3500 m in the multi-channel mode)

Table 7-3 Specifications of BTS3606 receivers operating in 450 MHz band

Item Specifications




7-3

Item Specifications


Channel precision 25 kHz, 20 kHz

Signal receiver sensitivity Better than –127 dBm (RC3, main and diversity receiving)




Item Specifications



Channel precision 30 kHz


Transmit power


50W (the maximum value measured at the RF port of the cabinet when the BTS works at the altitude less than 3500 m in the multi-channel mode)


Item Specifications




Signal receiver sensitivity

Single-channel module: Better than –127 dBm (RC3, main and diversity receiving)

Multi-channel module: Better than –126 dBm (RC3, main and diversity receiving)



7-4




Item Specifications





Transmit power


40 W (the maximum value measured at the RF port of the cabinet when the BTS works at the altitude less than 3500 m in the multi-channel mode)


Item Specifications




Signal receiver sensitivity

Single-channel module: Better than –127 dBm (RC3, main and diversity receiving)

Multi-channel module: Better than –126 dBm (RC3, main and diversity receiving)

7.4 ODU3601C Cascading Specifications

Table 7-8 lists the specifications of the BTS3606 with respect to ODU3601Cs cascading in CDMA2000 1X and 1xEV-DO networks.



7-5

Table 7-8 Specifications of BTS3606 with respect to ODU3601Cs cascading

Maximum distance of single cascading 10 km (32,808 ft), 70 km (229,656 ft) (respectively corresponding to the two types of CCPM)

Maximum number of cascading levels 3 CDMA2000 1X

Maximum total distance after cascading 90 km (295,272 ft)

Maximum distance of single cascading 10 km (32,808 ft)

Maximum number of cascading levels 3 1xEV-DO

Maximum total distance after cascading 10 km (32,808 ft)


System DescriptionAppendix A Technical Standards

A-1

Appendix A Technical Standards

The BTS3606 complies with various international standards. This chapter lists the major technical, lightning protection, safety, EMC, and environment standards observed by the BTS3606.

A.1 General Technical Standards

The BTS3606 complies with the following general technical standards:

TIA/EIA-97-D: Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for Base Stations Supporting Dual-mode Spread Spectrum Mobile Stations.

Federal IMT-MC (CDMA 2000) Cellular Mobile System Operating in Band 450 MHZ.

C.S0032-0V1.0 Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Network

C.S0039-0V1.0 Enhanced Subscriber Privacy for CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data

C.S0038-0V1.0 Signaling Conformance Specification for High Rate Packet Data Air Interface

A.2 Um Interface Standards

This section lists the Um interface standards that the BTS3606 complies on physical layer, MAC layer and service capability.

A.2.1 Physical Layer

TIA/EIA IS-2000-2-A: Physical Layer Standard for CDMA 1X Standards for Spread Spectrum Systems.

C.S0024-0V4.0 CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specifications

A.2.2 MAC Layer

TIA/EIA IS-2000-3-A: Medium Access Control (MAC) Standard for CDMA 1X Standards for Spread Spectrum Systems.

A.2.3 Service Capability

TSB2000: Capabilities Requirements Mapping for CDMA 1X Standards.



A-2

A.3 Abis Interface Standards

This section lists the Abis interface standards that the BTS3606 complies on physical layer, ATM layer, and so on.

A.3.1 Physical Layer

I. E1 Interface

E1 Physical Interface Specification, September 1996

II. SDH STM-1

ANSI T1.101: Synchronization Interface Standard.

ITU-T G.707: (3/96) Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).

ITU-T G.703: (10/98) Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.

ITU-T G.957: Optical interface for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy.

ITU-T G.958: Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables.

III. ATM

AF-PHY-0086.001: Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version 1.1.

ATM Forum af-phy-0064.000.

STR-PHY-FN64-01.00: ATM on Fractional E1/T1.

A.3.2 ATM Layer

ANSI T1.627-1993: Telecommunications broadband ISDN-ATM Layer Functionality and specification.

A.3.3 ATM Adaptation Layer

ITU-T recommendation I.366.2: B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2 Specification.

ITU-T I.363.5: B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer 5 Specification: Type 5 AAL.



A-3

A.3.4 TCP/IP

RFC791: Internet Protocol.

RFC793: Transport Control Protocol.

A.3.5 Abis Interface High-Layer Protocol

3GPP2 A.R0003: Abis interface technical report for CDMA 1X Spread Spectrum System.

A.3.6 Self-Defined Standard

CDMA 1X Abis interface high-layer specification

A.4 Lightning Protection Standards

The BTS3606 complies with the following lightning protection standards:

IEC 61312–1 (1995) Protection against Lightning Electromagnetic Impulse Part I: General Principles.

IEC 61643–1 (1998) Surge Protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems.

ITU-T K.11 (1993) Principles of Protection against Overvoltage and Overcurrent. ITU-T K.27 (1996) Bonding Configurations and Earthing Inside a

Telecommunication Building. ETS 300 253(1995) Equipment Engineering; Earthing and bonding of

telecommunication equipment in telecommunication centers.

A.5 Safety Standards

The BTS3606 complies with the following safety standards:

GB4943–2000: Safety of information technology equipment. IEC60950 Safety of information technology equipment including Electrical

Business Equipment. IEC60215 Safety requirement for radio transmitting equipment. CAN/CSA–C22.2 No 1-M94 Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Equipment. CAN/CSA–C22.2 No 950-95 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

Including Electrical Business Equipment. UL 1419 Standard for Professional Video and Audio Equipment 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive. UL 1950 Safety of information technology equipment Including Electrical

Business Equipment.



A-4

IEC60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code).

GOST 30631–99. General Requirements to machines, instruments and other industrial articles on stability to external mechanical impacts while operating.

GOST R 50829–95. Safety of radio stations, radio electronic equipment using transceivers and their components. The general requirements and test methods.

GOST 12.2.007.0–75. Electrotechnical devices. The general safety requirements.

A.6 EMC Standards

The BTS3606 complies with the following EMC standards:

TS 25.105; 3rd Generation Partnership Project; TSG RAN WG4; UTRA (BS) TDD: Radio transmission and reception89/336/EEC EMC directive Council directive of 3 May 1989 on approximation of laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility.

CISPR 22 (1997): Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment.

IEC 61000-6-1: 1997: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6: Generic standards – Section 1: Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments.

IEC 61000-6-3: 1996: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6: Generic standards – Section 3: mission standard for residential, commercial and light industrial environments.

IEC 61000–3–2 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3: Limits – Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current = 16 A).

IEC 61000–3–3 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3: Limits – Section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current = 16 A.

IEC 61000–4–2 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test.

IEC 61000–4–3 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency electromagnetic field immunity test.

IEC 61000–4–4 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test.

IEC 61000-4-5 (1995): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 5: Surge immunity test.



A-5

IEC 61000–4–6 (1996): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 6: Immunity to contacted disturbances, induced by radio frequency fields.

IEC 61000–4–11 (1994): Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques – Section 11: Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations. Immunity tests.

ITU-T Recommendation K.20: Resistibility of Telecommunication Switching Equipment to Overvoltages and Overcurrents.

CFR 47, FCC Part 15: Radio Frequency Device. TS 25.113v3.1.0: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification

Group Radio Access Networks; Base station EMC. ITU-R Rec. SM.329–7: Spurious emissions. GOST R 51318.22–99: Electromagnetic compatibility of technical equipment.

Man-made noise from informational equipment. Limits and test methods. GOST 30429–96: Electromagnetic compatibility of technical equipment.

Man-made noise from equipment and apparatus used together with service receiver systems of civil application. Limits and test methods.

A.7 Environment Standards

The BTS3606 complies with the following environment standards:

GB4208 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP code). GB4798 Environmental conditions for electrician and electronic products

application. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP code). IEC 60721-3-1: Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3:

Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 1: Storage.

IEC 60721-3-2: Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities-Section 2: Transportation.

IEC 60721–3–3 (1994): Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weather protected locations.

IEC 60721–3–4 (1995): Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 4: Stationary use at non-weather protected locations.

ETS 300 019-2-1: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-1, Specification of environmental tests Storage.



A-6

ETS 300 019-2-2: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-2, Specification of environmental tests Transportation.

ETS 300 019-2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-3, Specification of environmental tests Transportation Stationary use at weather-protected locations.

ETS 300 019-2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment; Part 2-3, Specification of environmental tests Transportation Stationary use at non-weather-protected locations.

IEC 60068–2–1 (1990): Environmental testing – Part 2: Tests. Tests A: Cold. IEC 60068–2–2 (1974): Environmental testing – Part 2: Tests. Tests B: Dry heat. IEC 60068–2–6 (1995): Environmental testing – Part 2: Tests – Test Fc: Vibration

(sinusoidal). GOST 15150–69: Machines, instruments and other industrial articles.

Applications for different climatic regions. Categories, operating, storage and transportation conditions in compliance with the environmental factors.

GOST 23088–80: Electronic equipment. Requirements to packing and transportation and test methods.


System Description Appendix B Abbreviations and Acronyms

B-1

Appendix B Abbreviations and Acronyms

#

1xEV-DO Single 1.25MHz carrier Evolution – Data Optimized

1xEV-DV Single 1.25MHz carrier Evolution – Data and Voice

3GPP2 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2

A

AAA Authorization, Authentication and Accounting

AC Alternating Current

ACK Acknowledgement

AN Access Network

AT Access Terminal

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BAM Back Administration Module

BCIM BTS Control Interface Module

BCKM BTS Clock Module

BTS Base Transceiver Station

BSC Base Station Controller

BSS Base Station Subsystem

C

CC Control Channel

CCH Common Channel

CCPM Compact-BTS Channel Process Module

CDM Code Division Multiplex

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CDDU Compact-BTS Dual Duplexer Unit

CE Channel Element

CECM Compact-BTS EV-DO Channel Module

CFMM Compact-BTS Fan Monitor Module

CHPA Compact-BTS High power Amplifier

CIFM Compact-BTS Intermediate Frequency Module



B-2

CMTR Compact-BTS Multi-channel Transceiver module

CMPA Compact-BTS Multi-channel Power Amplifier

CN Core Network

CPBM Compact-BTS Power Backplane Module

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRCM Compact-BTS Radio Up-Down Convert Module

CSLM Compact-BTS Serial port Lightning proof Module

CTBM Compact-BTS Transceiver Backplane Module

CTRM Compact-BTS Transceiver Module

D

DC Direct Current

DRC Data Rate Control

E

EIA Electronics Industry Association

EIB Erasure Indicator Bit

F

F-CCCH Forward Common Control Channel

F-DCCH Forward Dedicated Control Channel

FER Frame Error Rate

F-FCH Forward Fundamental Channel

F-PCH Forward Paging Channel

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

F-PICH Forward Pilot Channel

F-QPCH Forward Quick Paging Channel

F-SCH Forward Supplemental Channel

F-SYNCH Forward Synchronization Channel

G

GLONASS Global Navigation Satellite System

GMSC Gateway Mobile Switching Center

GPS Global Positioning System

GSM Global System for Mobile Communications

H

HA Home Agent

HLR Home Location Register



B-3

HPCM High Precision Clock Module

HPSK Hybrid Phase Shift Keying

I

IMA Inverse Multiplexing on ATM

IPoA IP over ATM

IS Interim Standard

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

L

LAN Local Area Network

LMT Local Maintenance Terminal

LNA Low Noise Amplifier

M

MAC Media Access Control

MIP Mobile Internet Protocol

MML Man-Machine Language

MS Mobile Station

MSC Mobile Switching Center

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time To Repair

N

NE Network Element

O

ODU OutDoor Unit

OMC Operation and Maintenance Center

OML Operation and Maintenance Link

P

PCF Packet Control Function

PDA Personal Digital Assistant

PDSN Packet Data Service Node

PGND Protection Ground

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network

PMRM Power Measurement Report Message

PMU Power Management Unit

PP2S Pulses Per 2 Seconds



B-4

ppm Parts Per Million

PPP Peer-Peer Protocol

PSK Phase Shift Keying

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTT Push To Talk

Q

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RA Reverse Activity

RAB Reverse Activity Bit

R-ACH Reverse Access Channel

RC Radio Configuration

R-DCCH Reverse Dedicated Control Channel

R-EACH Reverse Enhanced Access Channel

RF Radio Frequency

R-FCH Reverse Fundamental Channel

RLDU Receive LNA Distribution Unit

R-P Radio-Packet

RPC Reverse Power Control

RRI Reverse Rate Indicator

R-SCH Reverse Supplemental Channel

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

T

TDM Time Division Multiplex

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

U

UNI User Network Interface

W

WAN Wide Area Network

HUAWEI


System Pinciple


System PincipleTable of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overall Structure.......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Physical Structure.............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Logical Structure................................................................................................................ 1-3

Chapter 2 Baseband Subsystem ................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Overview of Baseband Subsystem.................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Functional Structure ................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Introduction to Baseband Boards............................................................................ 2-2

2.2 BCKM................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.2.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-3 2.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 2-5

2.3 BCIM .................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-6 2.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 2-7 2.3.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 2-7

2.4 CCPM ................................................................................................................................ 2-7 2.4.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 2-8 2.4.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-11 2.4.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-11

2.5 CECM .............................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.5.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-12 2.5.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-15 2.5.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-15

2.6 HPCM .............................................................................................................................. 2-16 2.6.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-16 2.6.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-17 2.6.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-17

2.7 BBKM............................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.7.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-18 2.7.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-19 2.7.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-19

2.8 BESP ............................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.8.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-19 2.8.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-21 2.8.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-21

2.9 CSLM............................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.9.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 2-22



ii

2.9.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-22 2.9.3 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-23

2.10 CFAN ............................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.10.1 CFMM.................................................................................................................. 2-23 2.10.2 CFIB .................................................................................................................... 2-26

Chapter 3 Radio Frequency Subsystem ..................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Overview of the RF Subsystem ......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Functional Structure of the Radio Frequency Subsystem ...................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Introduction to RF Modules ..................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 CTRM................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-3 3.2.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-5

3.3 CHPA................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-6 3.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-7

3.4 CDDU................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-8 3.4.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.3 Specifications .......................................................................................................... 3-9

3.5 CTBM................................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.5.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 3-9 3.5.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 3-10 3.5.3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 3-10

3.6 CRFM............................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.1 CMCB.................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.2 BBFL ..................................................................................................................... 3-14

3.7 CPCM .............................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.7.1 Structure and Principle.......................................................................................... 3-15 3.7.2 External Interfaces ................................................................................................ 3-16 3.7.3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 3-16

Chapter 4 Antenna Subsystem .................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 RF Antenna........................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1 Antenna ................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Feeder and Jumper................................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.3 Lightning Arrester.................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.4 Tower-Mounted Amplifier ........................................................................................ 4-4

4.2 Satellite Synchronization Antenna..................................................................................... 4-4 4.2.1 Introduction to GPS and GLONASS ....................................................................... 4-5 4.2.2 Antenna ................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.3 Feeder and Jumper................................................................................................. 4-6



iii

4.2.4 Lightning Arrester of Antennas................................................................................ 4-7 4.2.5 Receiver .................................................................................................................. 4-7

Chapter 5 Power Supply Subsystem........................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Overview of Power Supply Subsystem.............................................................................. 5-1 5.2 Power Distribution Plans.................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.1 The +24 VDC Power Input Mode ............................................................................ 5-2 5.2.2 The –48 VDC Power Input Mode ............................................................................ 5-2

5.3 PSUDC/DC ............................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.1 Structure and Principle............................................................................................ 5-3 5.3.2 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3.3 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 5-4

Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Subsystem......................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Overview of Environment Monitoring Subsystem.............................................................. 6-1 6.2 EAC.................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2.1 Structure.................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.2.3 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 PIB ..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3.1 Outlook .................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3.2 Functions................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.3 External Interfaces .................................................................................................. 6-4

Chapter 7 Lightning Protection and Grounding......................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Overview of Lightning Protection and Grounding .............................................................. 7-1

7.1.1 Lightning Protection ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.2 Equipment Grounding ............................................................................................. 7-1

7.2 BTS Lightning Protection Principle .................................................................................... 7-1 7.2.1 Lightning Protection Principle.................................................................................. 7-1 7.2.2 Lightning Protection for Power supply .................................................................... 7-3 7.2.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables..................................................................... 7-5 7.2.4 Lightning Protection for Antenna System................................................................ 7-7 7.2.5 Lighting Protection for Serial Port ........................................................................... 7-8

7.3 Grounding of BTS Equipment............................................................................................ 7-8 7.3.1 Internal Grounding of Cabinet ................................................................................. 7-8 7.3.2 External Grounding of Cabinet................................................................................ 7-8 7.3.3 Grounding of AC Lightning Arrester ........................................................................ 7-9 7.3.4 Grounding of Trunk Cables ..................................................................................... 7-9

Chapter 8 BTS Signal Flows......................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Overview of BTS Signal Flows .......................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Abis Signal .............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.2 Clock Signal ............................................................................................................ 8-1 8.1.3 Local MMI Signal..................................................................................................... 8-2



iv

8.2 Abis Traffic Signal Flow ..................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.1 Forward Traffic Signal Flow .................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Reverse Traffic Signal Flow .................................................................................... 8-4

8.3 Abis Signaling Flow ........................................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.1 Forward Signaling Flow........................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.2 Reverse Signaling Flow .......................................................................................... 8-5

8.4 O&M Signal Flow ............................................................................................................... 8-5 8.5 Clock Signal Flow .............................................................................................................. 8-6

Chapter 9 BTS Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 Configuration Principle....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Cabinet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-1

9.2.1 Configuration of Baseband Boards ......................................................................... 9-1 9.2.2 Configuration of RF Modules .................................................................................. 9-4 9.2.3 Configuration of PSUs............................................................................................. 9-6

9.3 Configuration of Antennas ................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.1 RF Antennas ........................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 GPS/GLONASS Synchronization Antennas ........................................................... 9-7

9.4 Networking Configuration .................................................................................................. 9-7 9.4.1 Star Networking....................................................................................................... 9-7 9.4.2 Chain Networking.................................................................................................... 9-8 9.4.3 Tree Networking...................................................................................................... 9-9 9.4.4 Fractional ATM Networking................................................................................... 9-10 9.4.5 Cascading with ODU3601Cs ................................................................................ 9-11

9.5 Configuration of Auxiliary Equipment............................................................................... 9-12 9.5.1 Environment Monitoring Instrument ...................................................................... 9-12 9.5.2 DDF ....................................................................................................................... 9-12

9.6 Typical Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-12 9.6.1 O(1) Configuration................................................................................................. 9-13 9.6.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration ........................................................................................... 9-13

Appendix A Performance of Receiver and Transmitter.............................................................A-1 A.1 Introduction to Band Class ................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1 800 MHz Band ........................................................................................................A-1 A.1.2 1900 MHz Band ......................................................................................................A-3 A.1.3 450 MHz Band ........................................................................................................A-4 A.1.4 2 GHz Band ............................................................................................................A-6

A.2 Performance of Receiver...................................................................................................A-6 A.2.1 Frequency Coverage ..............................................................................................A-6 A.2.2 Access Probe Acquisition .......................................................................................A-7 A.2.3 R-TCH Demodulation Performance........................................................................A-7 A.2.4 Receiving Performance ........................................................................................A-16 A.2.5 Limitations on Emissions ......................................................................................A-18 A.2.6 Received Signal Quality Indicator (RSQI) ............................................................A-18



v

A.3 Performance of Transmitter.............................................................................................A-19 A.3.1 Frequency Requirements .....................................................................................A-19 A.3.2 Modulation Requirements.....................................................................................A-19 A.3.3 RF Output Power ..................................................................................................A-20 A.3.4 Limitations on Emissions ......................................................................................A-20

Appendix B EMC Performance ....................................................................................................B-1 B.1 EMI Performance...............................................................................................................B-1 B.2 EMS Performance .............................................................................................................B-2

Appendix C Environment Requirements ....................................................................................C-1 C.1 Storage Environment ........................................................................................................C-1 C.2 Transportation Environment..............................................................................................C-3 C.3 Operation Environment .....................................................................................................C-5

Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................D-1 D.1 Component........................................................................................................................D-1 D.2 Terminology.......................................................................................................................D-2


System PincipleList of Figures

vi

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 BTS3606 cabinet in full configuration................................................................... 1-1

Figure 1-2 BTS3606 logical structure .................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 2-1 Functional structure of baseband subsystem....................................................... 2-1

Figure 2-2 Structure of the BCKM.......................................................................................... 2-3

Figure 2-3 Structure of BCIM ................................................................................................. 2-6

Figure 2-4 Structure of CCPM................................................................................................ 2-8

Figure 2-5 Structure of the CECM........................................................................................ 2-12

Figure 2-6 HPCM functional structure.................................................................................. 2-16

Figure 2-7 Slot distribution of BBKM.................................................................................... 2-18

Figure 2-8 Structure of BESP............................................................................................... 2-20

Figure 2-9 Principle of E1/T1 lightning protection................................................................ 2-21

Figure 2-10 CSLM functional structure ................................................................................ 2-22

Figure 2-11 CFMM functional structure................................................................................ 2-24

Figure 2-12 Structure of the CFIB........................................................................................ 2-26

Figure 3-1 Structure of RF subsystem ................................................................................... 3-1

Figure 3-2 CTRM functional structure.................................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3-3 CHPA functional structure..................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-4 CDDU functional structure.................................................................................... 3-8

Figure 3-5 CTBM slot distribution ........................................................................................ 3-10

Figure 3-6 CMCB location in the CHPA............................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3-7 CMCB functional structure.................................................................................. 3-12

Figure 3-8 BBFL functional structure ................................................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-9 CPCM location in the system ............................................................................. 3-16

Figure 4-1 Structure of RF antenna ....................................................................................... 4-1

Figure 4-2 Structure of satellite synchronization antenna...................................................... 4-5

Figure 5-1 BTS power supply subsystem .............................................................................. 5-1

Figure 5-2 Structure of power supply subsystem................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-3 Structure of the PSUDC/DC ..................................................................................... 5-4

Figure 6-1 EAC ...................................................................................................................... 6-2

Figure 6-2 Power inspection module ..................................................................................... 6-3


System PincipleList of Figures

vii

Figure 7-1 IEC 61312 division of lightning protection zone ................................................... 7-2

Figure 7-2 Illustration of lightning protection for BTS power supply ...................................... 7-3

Figure 7-3 Level-5 lightning protection for BTS power supply............................................... 7-3

Figure 7-4 Connection of trunk cables to BTS....................................................................... 7-5

Figure 7-5 Structure of the BESP........................................................................................... 7-6

Figure 7-6 E1/T1 lightning protection unit .............................................................................. 7-7

Figure 8-1 BTS signal flows ................................................................................................... 8-3

Figure 9-1 Fully-equipped baseband subrack ....................................................................... 9-2

Figure 9-2 Fully-equipped RF modules.................................................................................. 9-5

Figure 9-3 PSUDC/DC subrack in full configuration .............................................................. 9-6

Figure 9-4 BTS star networking ............................................................................................. 9-7

Figure 9-5 BTS chain networking........................................................................................... 9-8

Figure 9-6 BTS tree networking ........................................................................................... 9-10

Figure 9-7 O(1) RF module configuration ............................................................................ 9-13

Figure 9-8 S(2/2/2) RF module configuration ...................................................................... 9-14


System PincipleList of Tables

viii

List of Tables

Table 2-1 Functions of BCKM ................................................................................................ 2-2

Table 2-2 BCKM external interfaces....................................................................................... 2-4

Table 2-3 BCIM external interfaces ........................................................................................ 2-7

Table 2-4 CCPM functions...................................................................................................... 2-8

Table 2-5 CCPM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-11

Table 2-6 CECM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-15

Table 2-7 HPCM external interfaces .................................................................................... 2-17

Table 2-8 BBKM external interface....................................................................................... 2-19

Table 2-9 BESP external interfaces ..................................................................................... 2-21

Table 2-10 CSLM external interfaces ................................................................................... 2-22

Table 2-11 CFMM external interfaces .................................................................................. 2-25

Table 2-12 CFIB external interfaces..................................................................................... 2-27

Table 3-1 CTRM external interfaces....................................................................................... 3-5

Table 3-2 CHPA external interfaces ....................................................................................... 3-7

Table 3-3 CDDU external interfaces....................................................................................... 3-9

Table 3-4 CTBM external interfaces..................................................................................... 3-10

Table 3-5 CMCB external interfaces .................................................................................... 3-13

Table 3-6 BBFL panel indicators .......................................................................................... 3-15

Table 3-7 CPCM external interfaces .................................................................................... 3-16

Table 4-1 Loss index (dB/100 m(328.08 ft)) of feeder (at normal temperature)..................... 4-3

Table 5-1 PSUDC/DC external interfaces .................................................................................. 5-4

Table 6-1 EAC external interfaces.......................................................................................... 6-2

Table 6-2 PIB external interfaces ........................................................................................... 6-4

Table 9-1 Typical configuration of CCPM............................................................................... 9-3

Table 9-2 BTS3606 typical configurations............................................................................ 9-12






ix








Table A-11 CDMA channel numbers and corresponding frequencies for band class 6 and spreading rate 1...............................................................................................................A-6

Table A-12 CDMA preferred set of frequency assignments for band class 6 ........................A-6

Table A-13 Access probe failure ratio.....................................................................................A-7




Table A-17 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3.........................................................................................................................................A-8

Table A-18 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3 .......................................................................................................................A-8


Table A-20 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4.........................................................................................................................................A-9

Table A-21 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4 ................................................................................................................A-9

Table A-22 Standard channel simulator configuration..........................................................A-10


Table A-24 Eb/N0 limits of R-TCH without closed-loop power control.................................A-11




x









Table A-34 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-SCH(turbo code) receiver under RC4 .....................................................................................................................A-15


Table A-36 RSQI range ........................................................................................................A-18

Table A-37 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (450 MHz band and 800 MHz band).......................................................................................................................................A-21

Table A-38 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (1900 MHz band) ......................A-21

Table B-1 CE indices at -48V port..........................................................................................B-1

Table B-2 RE indices..............................................................................................................B-1

Table B-3 RF EM field immunity indices ................................................................................B-2

Table B-4 Voltage dips and short interruptions indices ..........................................................B-2

Table B-5 ESD immunity indices............................................................................................B-3

Table B-6 Induced currents indices........................................................................................B-3

Table B-7 Surge immunity indices..........................................................................................B-4

Table B-8 Common-mode fast transient pulse immunity indices...........................................B-4








xi




Table C-9 Temperature and humidity requirements .............................................................. C-5

Table C-10 Other climate environment requirements............................................................ C-5

Table C-11 Requirements for the density of physically active substances............................ C-6

Table C-12 Requirements for the density of chemically active substances .......................... C-6

Table C-13 Requirements for mechanical stress .................................................................. C-7


System PincipleChapter 1 Overall Structure

1-1

Chapter 1 Overall Structure

This chapter provides a brief introduction to the physical and functional structures of the BTS3606.

1.1 Physical Structure

Figure 1-1 shows a fully-equipped BTS3606 cabinet.

(1) CDDU subrack (2) Switch box (3) Fan (4) Combined subrack (5) Cabling trough (6) Power supply subrack (7) Toolbox

Figure 1-1 BTS3606 cabinet in full configuration

A BTS3606 cabinet consists of compact-BTS dual duplexer unit (CDDU) subrack, combined subrack, power supply subrack, fan, switch box, tool box, and cable trough.

I. CDDU Subrack

The CDDU subrack is located at the upper part of the cabinet. It holds CDDUs and completes the following tasks:



1-2

Provide separate transmission channels for two receiving and transmitting signals.

Filter the signals. Perform duplex isolation of the signals. Divide one receiving signal into two.

II. Combined Subrack

The combined subrack consists of carrier subrack and the baseband subrack.

Carrier subrack

The carrier subrack is configured with various RF modules.

Single-channel RF modules include:

--Compact-BTS transceiver module (CTRM)

--Compact-BTS high power amplifier (CHPA)

Multi-channel RF modules include:

--Compact-BTS multi-channel transceiver module (CMTR)

--Compact-BTS multi-channel power amplifier (CMPA)

Baseband subrack

The baseband subrack holds various baseband processing boards, including:

--BTS control interface module (BCIM)

--BTS control & clock module (BCKM)

--Compact-BTS channel process module (CCPM)

--Compact-BTS EVDO channel module (CECM)

--BTS high precision clock module (HPCM) (optional)

III. Power Supply Subrack

The power supply subrack is configured with PSUDC/DC modules. The PSUDC/DC converts the –48 V DC input into the +27 V DC for different parts in the BTS3606 cabinet.

IV. Others

Other devices in the cabinet include:

Cable trough: Used to run RF cables. Switch box: Controls the power-up and power-down of a cabinet. Fans: Dissipate the heat generated by the baseband boards. Tool box: Stores some special tools and instruments necessary for equipment

maintenance.



1-3

1.2 Logical Structure

Figure 1-2 shows the logical structure of the BTS3606 system.

BSC

Basebandsubsystem

Power supply subsystem

RF subsystem,Abis

UmMS/AT

Antenna andfeeder subsystem

-48 V DCpowerinput

BTS3606

Enviroment monitoringsubsystem

Figure 1-2 BTS3606 logical structure

The following chapters detail the working principle and structure of each subsystem.


System PincipleChapter 2 Baseband Subsystem

2-1

Chapter 2 Baseband Subsystem

This chapter introduces the functional structure of the BTS3606 baseband subsystem and describes each baseband board in detail.

2.1 Overview of Baseband Subsystem The baseband subsystem consists of:

BTS control & clock module (BCKM) BTS control interface module (BCIM) Compact-BTS channel process module (CCPM) Compact-BTS EVDO channel module (CECM) BTS high precision clock module (HPCM) Baseband backplane module (BBKM))

2.1.1 Functional Structure

Figure 2-1 shows the functional structure of the baseband subsystem.

BCIM

BCKM

E1/T1BSC

BCPM

...

Cloc

k bus

Back

plane

bus

Other funcitonalunits of the system

Optical inerface

Electric interface

ODU3601C

CTRMSatellite signal

receiving antenna

BCKM

BCIM

...10 MHz clock cable

CCPM/

CECM

HPCM(Optional)

Test equipment 10MHz

1PPS

BCIM: BTS control interface module CCPM: Compact-BTS channel process module BCKM: BTS control & clock module CECM: Compact-BTS EVDO channel module HPCM: BTS high precision clock module CTRM: Compact-BTS transceiver module BSC: Base station controller

Figure 2-1 Functional structure of baseband subsystem

The baseband subsystem accesses the transmission system through the E1/T1 interface provided by the BCIM so as to connect to BSC equipment. It connects to CTRM through the electrical interface provided by the CCPM/CECM and to the micro-bts transceiver module (MTRM) of the ODU3601C through the optical interface provided by the CCPM/CECM.



2-2

2.1.2 Introduction to Baseband Boards

The baseband subrack supports the following boards:

Board Function

BCKM Provides the BTS system clock and control the BTS system resource.

BCIM Connects the BTS with the transmission system, which connects to the BSC. It supports E1/T1 transmission.

CCPM Processes the data on the CDMA2000 1X forward and reverse channels.

CECM Processes the data on the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO forward and reverse channels.

HPCM Provides stable clock signals to the BCKM and maintain the stability of the clock for 24 hours when the satellites cannot be traced.

In addition to the above boards, this chapter also introduces the backplane of the baseband subrack, compact-BTS serial port lightningproof module (CSLM), and fan module.

Note:

The CCPM and CECM process different services. The CCPM processes CDMA2000 1X services, and the CECM processes EV-DO services. The CCPM and CECM can share the same slot In the BTS3606.

2.2 BCKM The BCKM controls and manages the entire BTS system.

Table 2-1 lists its major functions.

Table 2-1 Functions of BCKM

Function Explanation

Main control functions

Includes: Call procedure control Signaling processing Resource management Channel management Cell configuration



2-3

Function Explanation

O&M functions

Includes: Software download Status management Data configuration Test management Interface tracing Fault management Log management Maintenance console interface Active-standby BCKM switchover

Clock function BCKM provides high-precision oscillation clock and realizes synchronization with an external clock such as GPS/GLONASS clock. It provides the entire BTS system with a reference clock signal.

2.2.1 Structure and Principle

Figure 2-2 shows the structure of the BCKM.

Power supplymodule

Externalcommunication

module

Clockmodule

Backplane busmodule

Otherfunctionalmodule CPU module

BCKM

BBKM...

Satellite signalreceiver

BBKM...

10 MHz clockcable

Figure 2-2 Structure of the BCKM

The BCKM comprises the following parts:

I. Clock Module

The clock module is the clock source of BTS. It provides the working clock for various BTS boards.

The clock module supports two work modes:

External synchronization mode (locked mode) Free-run mode (holdover mode)

In the external synchronization mode, the clock module receives GPS/GLONASS clock signals through its satellite signal receiver or obtains the clock reference information from other external synchronization devices.



2-4

In the free-run mode, the clock module provides the clock reference through the high precision oscillator (oven control & voltage control oscillator).

For the introduction to the satellite signal receiver, see section 4.3.5, “Receiver”.

II. CPU Module

The CPU module controls logical circuits to initialize relevant components. It implements the management and control of the BTS system through its system software, including main control software and O&M software.

III. Backplane Bus Module

The fast communication port of the CPU module connects with other BTS boards through the backplane bus module. The backplane bus module processes or transmits O&M signaling from other BTS boards, such as CCPM and BCIM.

IV. External Communication Module

The external communication module uses the multiple communication control ports on the CPU to provide interfaces such as maintenance console interface, environment monitoring interface, test interface, and external synchronization interface.

V. Power Supply Module

The power supply module converts the +27 V input power into the +5 V, +3.3 V, and +2.5 V power for various modules of the BCKM.

2.2.2 External Interfaces

Table 2-2 lists the external interfaces of the BCKM.

Table 2-2 BCKM external interfaces

Interface Description

Local maintenance console interface

A 10/100 MHz compatible Ethernet interface, used to connect with local maintenance console.

Environment alarm interface

An RS485 serial port, used to connect with an external monitoring device so that the BCKM can collect and process the equipment room environment information (such as fire, water, temperature, and humidity alarms).

GPS/GLONASS antenna interface

Receives satellite signals from the GPS/GLONASS and provide GPS/GLONASS antenna with +5 V feed.

External synchronization interface

Synchronize the system clock with the external clock system when the GPS/GLONASS is not available

Test interface Used for BTS test, providing 10 MHz and 2 s signals.



2-5


Backplane interfaces

Includes: Backplane bus interface, through which the BCKM manages other boards.Clock bus interface, through which clock signals are provided to other boards. Emergency serial port, through which the communications with other board can go on when this board is faulty.

Fan module interface An RS485 serial port, used to monitor the fan module and power supply module of baseband subrack.

Power supply interface A power connector on the backplane, used to connect with +27 V power, +27 V GND, and PGND.

2.2.3 Technical Specifications

The following are technical specifications of the BCKM:

Power voltage: +27 V Power consumption: <20 W

Dimensions: 460 (18.11 in.) mm x 233.35 mm (9.19 in.) (Length x Width)

2.3 BCIM The BCIM is a functional entity that connects the BTS with BSC. Its major functions are as follows:

In uplink direction, backplane bus receives the O&M command from BCKM and traffic data from CCPM, and transmits asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells on the multiple E1 links to BSC with inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology in compliance with G.804 standard.

In downlink direction, it receives ATM cells distributed on the multiple E1/T1 links from BSC, multiplexes them into a single ATM cell flow with IMA technology and finally sends them to corresponding processing boards through the backplane bus.

Each BCIM provides eight E1/T1 links, which can support at the most seven IMA link sets, seven UNI links, seven IMAFRAC link set, or seven FRAC links.

The BCIM communicates with BSC through IMA state machine program on the BCIM and monitors the working status of E1/T1 link to ensure the implementation of IMA protocol.

The BCIM transmits the O&M command through backplane bus, reports the BCIM status information to BCKM, and provides interfaces for board maintenance and network management.



2-6


There are two types of BCIM:

QC51BCIM: BCIM with E1 interface. QC52BCIM: BCIM with E1/T1 interface. This type of BCIM works either in E1

mode or T1 mode according to the setting of the DIP switches.

Figure 2-3 illustrates the structure of the BCIM with E1/T1 interface.

Backplane busmodule

CPUmodule

Control bus

Data bus

E1/T1

RS232

BBKM

BCKM

BESPIMA

module

...

Power supplymodule

Clockmodule

Figure 2-3 Structure of BCIM

The BCIM comprises the following parts:

I. IMA Module

The IMA module inversely multiplexes an ATM cell flow based on cells into multiple physical links for transmission, and remotely multiplexes the cell flows transmitted on different physical connections into a single ATM cell flow.

In uplink direction, IMA module receives AAL2 traffic cells from CCPM and AAL5 signaling cells from BCKM through the backplane bus. It splits the ATM cell flow into cells, transmits them on multiple E1/T1 link according to G.804 standard before sending them to BSC.

In downlink direction, it receives ATM cells from BSC that are distributed on multiple E1/T1 trunk lines, inversely multiplexes them into a single ATM cell flow. Then it sends AAL2 traffic cells to CCPM and AAL5 signaling cells to BCKM through the backplane bus.

II. CPU Module

The CPU module implements such functions as IMA protocol processing, executing OAM function of IMA, as well as E1/T1 link management and communication with BCKM.



2-7

III. Backplane Bus Module

The BCIM communicates with other boards in the baseband part through the backplane bus module, including control information communication with BCKM and traffic data communication with CCPM.

IV. Clock Module

The clock module provides working clock for the BCIM.

V. Power Supply Module

The power supply module converts the +27 V input power into the +3.3 V power for various modules of BCIM.


Table 2-3 lists the external interfaces of BCIM.

Table 2-3 BCIM external interfaces


E1/T1 interface Connects the BCIM with the transmission system (or the built-in transmission equipment if any), through which the BTS can connect to the BSC.

Backplane bus interface Connects with the other boards in the baseband part.

Power supply interface

A power connector on the backplane. Connects with +27 V power, +27 V GND, and PGND.


The following are technical specifications of the BCIM:

Power voltage: +27 V Power consumption <15 W

Dimensions: 460 mm (18.11 in.) x 233.35 mm (9.19 in.) (Length x Width)

2.4 CCPM The CCPM processes baseband signals, and the forward and reverse traffic.

Table 2-4 lists the functions of the CCPM.



2-8

Table 2-4 CCPM functions

Direction Functions

Forward

Encoding (including convolutional code and turbo code) Interleaving Spreading Modulating Data multiplexing

Reverse

Decoding De-interleaving De-spreading Demodulating Data demultiplexing

The CCPM supports intra-board and inter-board daisy chains, forming a resource-processing pool.

There are two types of CCPM. One has the two optical interfaces and the other does not have any optical interface. In the following description, the CCPM refers to the one with optical interfaces.


Figure 2-4 shows the structure of the CCPM.

CPU

Multiplexing/Demultiplexing

Transeivermodule

Opticalmodule

Opticalmodule

Data processing

DC/DC Clock module

Basebandprocessing60X

Local bus

IQ

+24 V DC 2 s 16 FC

Electricalinterface

Optical fiber

Optical fiber

CCPM

UTOPIA Backplane businterface

BBKM

Figure 2-4 Structure of CCPM

The CCPM comprises the following parts:



2-9

I. Baseband Processing Module

The baseband processing module is the core of the CCPM. It implements the following functions on the forward and reverse links:

Encoding/decoding Modulating/demodulating Spreading/de-spreading Sector mapping

This module connects to the CPU through the bus.

The CCPMs are cascaded through the inter-board and intra-board data daisy chains. This significantly increases the number of channels processed. The CCPM supports the three-sector configuration.

When two CCPMs are cascaded, they share the resources.

II. CPU

The CPU fulfils the following functions:

Debugging the CCPM

Resetting circuits Exchanging O&M information with the BCKM Exchanging O&M information with the CTRM or the ODU3601C

III. Data Processing Module

This module completes the following tasks:

Allocate and select the data sent from the ODU3601C and the compact-BTS transceiver module (CTRM), and send the data processed to the baseband processing module.

Allocate the data sent from the baseband processing module to the CTRM or the multiplexing/demultiplexing module.

Process the O&M information of the CTRM, that is, send the O&M information from the CPU to the corresponding electrical interface or optical interface through the bus, and vice versa.

Note:

The BCKM directly sends the O&M information processed by the CCPM data processing module to the CTRM.

IV. Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Module

This module processes the data sent from the optical interface, including



2-10

Selecting data links Multiplexing/demultiplexing data Checking clocks Processing the operation and maintenance information

The following describes the procedures of multiplexing and demultiplexing.

Multiplexing procedure

a) The multiplexing/demultiplexing module multiplexes the 16 FC data sent from the data processing module into the 100 FC data.

b) The CTRM converts it into 1.2288 GHz signals.

Demultiplexing procedure

a) The CTRM converts the 1.2288 GHz signals into 100 FC signals.

b) The multiplexing/demultiplexing module multiplexes the 100 FC signals into 16 FC data signals and sends them to the data processing module.

c) The data processing module processes them before sending them to the baseband processing module.

In addition, the multiplexing/demultiplexing module performs such functions as phase-locked loop (PLL) configuration, link selection, and intra-software global reset.

V. Transeiver Module

The transceiver module converts 1.2288 GHz signals into 122.88 MHz parallel signals, including 8B/10B encoding/decoding and framing.

VI. Optical Module

This module converts 1.2288 GHz optical signals into 1.2288 GHz electrical signals. One CCPM provided two pairs of optical fibers.

VII. Clock Module

The clock module implements the following functions:

Perform double-frequency phase-locking to the clock signals sent from the backplane

Provide clock for boards Drive and co-phase the clock signals generated on the CCPM to obtain the

satisfying clock signals.

VIII. Power Supply Module

The power supply module converts +27V input power into +3.3 V for various modules of the CCPM.



2-11


Table 2-5 lists the external interfaces of the CCPM.

Table 2-5 CCPM external interfaces


Optical interface Connects to the ODU3601C and transmits O&M information.

Electrical interface Connects to the CTRM.

Backplane bus interface Connects to other boards of baseband part and transmits the backplane bus signals and backplane clock signals to relay signals from the backplane to other modules of the CCPM.

Power supply interface A power connector on the backplane, used to connect with +27 V power, +27 V GND, and PGND.


The following are technical specifications of the CCPM:



2.5 CECM The CECM processes various types of service data on the forward and reverse channels. A BTS3606 can have six CECMs at most.

The CECM implements the following functions:

In the forward direction, the CECM receives the ATM cells that comes from the network side and is processed by the high-performance processor. Then the CECM performs coding (Turbo code), interleaving, spreading, modulation, and data multiplexing to the ATM cells and changes these ATM cells into high-speed signals. After processed by the dedicated processor, these high-speed signals are transmitted from the radio interface of the CECM.

In the reverse direction, the CECM performs demultiplexing, demodulation, de-interleaving, and decoding (Turbo code) on the received data. Under the control of the high-performance processor, the data is changed into ATM cells, which are sent to the BSC through the BCIM.

There are two types of CECM. One has the two optical interfaces and the other does not have any optical interface. In the following description, the CECM refers to the one with optical interfaces.



2-12


Figure 2-5 shows the structure of the CECM.

BBKM

UTOPIA bus

PC/DRC busDDI bus

Forward link IQ data

IDMA channel

Forwardmodulation

moduleReverse

demodulationmodule

Reversedemodulation

module

Reversedemodulation

module

Reversedemodulation

module

Reversedecodingmodule

Multiplexing/demultiplexing module

Reverse link IQ data

Clockmodule

Powersupplymodule

2S16FC +24V

Backplane bus interfacemodule

CPU module 1 CPU module 2

DPRAM

EPLD

Reverse linkForward link

Transceivermodule

Opticalmodule

Opticalmodule

Opticalinterface

Opticalinterface

Data processingmodule

Electricalinterface

Figure 2-5 Structure of the CECM

The following explains the data flow on the CECM.

On the forward data link

a) CPU module 1 of the CECM receives the forward service data from the backplane through the backplane bus interface module.

b) CPU module 1 sends the data received to the forward modulation module for generating the IQ data.

c) The multiplexing/demultiplexing module multiplexes the IQ data and sends the processed data to the CTRM.

On the reverse data link



2-13

a) The multiplexing/demultiplexing module receives the IQ data through the BBKM and demultiplexes the IQ data.

b) The multiplexing/demultiplexing module broadcasts the demultiplexed data to the four reverse demodulation modules.

c) Reverse demodulation modules send the demodulated data to the decoding module through the DDI bus for decoding and de-interleaving.

d) The decoding module sends the data to the CPU module 2 for processing through the IDMA channel.

e) CPU module 2 sends the data to the backplane bus interface module through the UTOPIA bus.

The CECM comprises the following modules:

I. Backplane Bus Interface Module

The CECM communicates with other boards in the BTS baseband part through the backplane bus interface module. The information exchanged includes the CECM-BCKM control information and the CECM-BCIM service data.

II. CPU Module 1 and CPU Module 2

The CPU module 1 and CPU module 2 completes the initialization of the system forward/reverse links, FPGA loading, DSP loading of the modulation/demodulation module, monitoring of operational status, and processing of service data and control data.

III. Forward Modulation Module

The forward modulation module consists of one CSM5500 chip working in the modulation mode. It supports 3 sectors and 64 forward channels. The total capacity is up to 64*3 forward channels.

This module processes the baseband data on the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO physical layer and then sends the processing result (forward IQ data) to the multiplex/demultiplex module.

This module can also obtain the power control and data rate control information from the reverse demodulation module through the PC/DRC bus.

IV. Reverse Decoding Module

The reverse decoding module primarily consists of a CSM5500 chip working in the decoding mode. It supports a maximum of four demodulation modules.

This module completes the decoding and de-interleaving of the data decoded at 1/2 and 1/4 rate.



2-14

The reverse decoding module receives the demodulated data and performs Turbo decoding and de-interleaving. Then it sends the data to the CPU module 2 through the IDMA channel.

V. Reverse Demodulation Module

The reverse demodulation module primarily consists of a CSM5500 chip working in the demodulation mode. It supports a maximum of 24 channels on the reverse link. The CECM has four reverse demodulation module, supporting up to 24*4 channels on the reverse link.

The reverse demodulation module supports reverse searching, service data demodulation, and DRC/RRI decoding. It receives the reverse IQ data that are sent by the CTRM and multiplexed by the multiplexing/demultiplexing module. Then it demodulates the IQ data and sends them to the reverse decoding module through the DDI bus. The PC/CDR bus is used to send the power control and data rate control information to the forward modulation module.

VI. Data Processing Module

The data processing module allocates and sorts out the data sent by the ODU3601C and the CTRM, and sends the processed data to the reverse demodulation module. Meanwhile, it allocates the data sent by the forward modulation module to the CTRM or the multiplexing/demultiplexing module.

The data processing module also process the O&M information of the CTRM. That is, it sends the O&M information coming from the CPU to the corresponding electrical interface or optical interface and the data coming from the electrical interface or optical interface to the CPU through the bus.

VII. Multiplexing/Demultiplexing Module

The multiplexing/demultiplexing module performs the following processing to the data sent from the optical interface: selection of data link, multiplexing and demultiplexing, clock test, processing of the O&M information.

In the forward link, the multiplexing/demultiplexing module multiplexes the 16FC IQ data sent by the forward modulation module into the 100FC data. Then it performs 8B/10B decoding and multiplexing to the data and sends the processed data to the transceiver module. The transceiver module converts the data into 1.2288 GHz signals.

In the reverse link, the transceiver module converts the 1.2288 GHz signals into 100Fc signals. The multiplexing/demultiplexing module demultiplexes and 8B/10B decodes the 100Fc signals. The signals are demultiplexed again into the reverse 16Fc IQ data. The data processing module processes the IQ data and broadcasts the data to the four demodulation modules.



2-15

VIII. EPLD Module

The EPLD module takes care of the control logics required by the CECM, including the clock frequency division, watchdog timer, control logic of the forward/reverse module, drive switch of the forward/reverse CPU, and the read/write signal drive of the forward/reverse modules.

IX. Transceiver Module

The transceiver module converts the 1.2288 GHz signals into 122.88 MHz parallel signals. The conversion involves the 8B/10B coding/decoding and framing.

X. Optical Module

The optical module converts the 122.88 MHz parallel signals into 1.2288 GHz signals. Once CECM can provide two optical interfaces.

XI. Clock Module

The clock module performs double-frequency phase-locking to the clock signals from the backplane, provides clock for boards, and drives and co-phases the clock signals generated on the local board, to get satisfactory clock signals.

XII. Power Supply Module

The power module converts the +27 V DC input by BBKM into the +3.3 V DC, +2.5 V DC, or +1.8 V DC power supply for various modules of the CECM.


Table 2-6 lists the external interfaces of the CECM.

Table 2-6 CECM external interfaces


Optical interface Connects to the ODU3601C and transmits O&M information.

Electrical interface Connects to the CTRM.

Backplane bus interface Connects to other boards of baseband part and transmits the backplane bus signals and backplane clock signals to relay signals from the backplane to other modules of the CCPM.

Power supply interface A power connector on the backplane. Connect with +27 V power, +27 V GND, and PGND.

Clock interface Leads in clock signals for the CECM from the clock bus on the backplane.


The following are technical specifications of the CECM:



2-16



2.6 HPCM The HPCM features excellent capability of synchronization clock holdover. It enhances the clock synchronization performance of the BTS in areas where satellite signals are unsteady.

When the GPS/GLONASS reference clock source is lost or the BTS fails to seize enough satellites, the HPCM can provide steady clock signals for the BCKM by right of the high stability and retentivity of its rubidium clock. The signals are synchronous with the GPS/GLONASS system clock and capable of keeping steady for up to 24 hours.


The HPCM comprises CPU, rubidium clock module, satellite signal receiver, and PSU. Figure 2-6 shows the functional structure of the HPCM.

Satel

lite si

gnal

rece

iver

Rubidiumclock module

CPU BCKM

RS232

RS232

1 pps

1 pps

10 MHz

PSU

BCKM

Test device

RS232

Figure 2-6 HPCM functional structure

The following introduces each module of the HPCM in details.

I. Satellite Signal Receiver

The satellite signal receiver completes the following tasks:

Receive satellite signals and provide the rubidium clock module with 1 PPS pulse signals as the clock reference source of the rubidium clock module.

Output the received information to the BCKM such as satellite timing, locating and tracing information through the RS232 serial port.



2-17

II. Rubidium Clock Module

The rubidium clock module features high stability. It locks the 1 pps pulse signals received and outputs a precise and stable 1 PPS signal as the synchronization clock of the BCKM.

III. CPU

The CPU completes the following tasks:

Receive the information reported by the satellite signal receiver, and set and monitor the receiver and the rubidium clock module.

Transmit the information of the satellite signal receiver and the rubidium clock module to the BCKM.

Receive the configuration and query information of the BCKM.

IV. PSU

The PSU converts the input +27 V DC into +3.3 V DC power for various module of the HPCM.


Table 2-7 lists the external interfaces of the HPCM.

Table 2-7 HPCM external interfaces


GPS/GLONASS antenna interface

Receives satellite signals from the GPS/GLONASS and provides the GPS/GLONASS antenna with +5 V feed.

1 pps signal output interface Provides 1 PPS signals for the BCKM through the backplane.

10 MHz signal output interface Outputs 10 MHz signals to the HPCM panel. It is reserved for test purpose.

Communication interface with the BCKM Communicates with the BCKM using an RS232 interface.

Power supply interface Leads out of the power connector on the backplane, and connected with +27 V DC, +27 V DC power ground, and the PGND.


The following are technical specifications of the HPCM:

Power supply: +27 V DC Power consumption: <20 W Dimensions: 460 mm (18.11 in.) x 233.35 mm (9.19 in.) (Length x Width)



2-18

2.7 BBKM The BBKM transmits the signals between the baseband boards. Its functions include

Realizing interconnection of various inter-board signals Supporting the online insertion and removal of all boards Supporting active/standby switchover of the BCKM Distributing power to the boards by leading in the system power supply Leading monitoring signal lines into the fan box and the power subrack Providing the protection against wrong insertion


The connector at the front of the BBKM connects to the baseband board. There are one backplane 27 V power/ground input connector and two DB37 D-connectors. The two D-connectors respectively connect to the alarm interface on the top of the cabinet and the input port of fan and power alarm signals. The signals between the baseband backplane and radio backplane are exchange through the C-connector and soft board.

Figure 2-7 shows the slot distribution.

4 2 0 0 0

5 3 1 1

(2)(1)

BCIM

BCKM

C

M

C

M

BCKM

C

M

C

M

(3)

C

M

CEM

EE

E E E

(1) Connecting part between the upper and lower halves of the subrack (2) Baseband boards (3) Slot No.

Figure 2-7 Slot distribution of BBKM

Note:

Channel processing boards in the above figure are marked “CEM”. The CCPM and CECM boards can be configured in the CEM slots.



2-19


Table 2-8 lists the external interfaces of the BBKM.

Table 2-8 BBKM external interface


System power interface Receives the +27V DC from the power supply subrack.

Environment alarm interface Connects with the environment monitoring instrument to receive/transmit environment alarm information.

External synchronization clock input interface

Receives such external clock sources as GPS clock source and GLONASS clock source.

Eight E1/T1 interfaces Receives/transmits E1/T1 signals from/to the BSC.

Clock signal output interface Outputs the internal clock (that is, HPCM clock) to other subracks.


Dimensions: 595.2 mm (23.43 in.) x 136.66 mm (5.38 in.) (Length x Width)

2.8 BESP The BTS E1 surge protector (BESP) is located on the top of the cabinet. It is a functional entity for the BTS to implement lightning protection with E1/T1 trunk line.

The eight pairs of lightning protection units of the BESP are used to discharge transient high voltage on the sheath and core of E1/T1 trunk lines to the PGND.


This section introduces the structure and working principle of the BESP.

I. Structure

Figure 2-8 shows the structure of the BESP.



2-20

8 E1s/T1s

4 E1s/T1s

4 E1s/T1s

InterfaceDB37

BSCInterfaceDB25

InterfaceDB25

BESP

...

BSC

BCIM ...

...

Level-1 protection

Level-2 protection

PGND

Level-1 protection

Level-2 protection

PGND

Level-1 protection

Level-2 protection

PGND

...

Figure 2-8 Structure of BESP

The board consists of three parts: DB25 connector, lightning protection unit, and DB37 connector.

Lightning protection unit

E1/T1 lightning protection unit has two inbound lines connected with DB25, two outbound lines connected with DB37, and one PGND. Here PGNDs of all lightning protection units can be interconnected.

DB37 connector

The DB37 is a male connector, connected with eight E1/T1 cables.

DB25 connector

The DB25 is a female connector. There are two DB25 connectors, respectively connected with four E1/T1 cables.

II. Principle of Lightning Protection

Figure 2-9 illustrates the principle of lightning protection.



2-21

Core

Sheath

PGND

Lead inDB25

Lead outDB37

Figure 2-9 Principle of E1/T1 lightning protection

If a BTS E1 trunk line is struck by lightning, high voltage will arise first on the DB25 and then spread to the lightning protection units.

The lightning protection units have two protection levels: air discharge tube and voltage limit mesh.

The air discharge tube discharges the high voltage to the ground and lowers it to 600 V below. Then the voltage limit mesh further lowers the voltage to 30 V below.


Table 2-9 lists the external interfaces of the BESP.

Table 2-9 BESP external interfaces


E1/T1 interface Includes:

DB25 connector, acting as an interface to the BSC DB37 connector, connecting with the BCIM


The following are technical specifications of the BESP:

Bearable surge current: >10 kA (common mode), > 5 kA (differential mode) Output residual voltage: <30 V. Dimensions: 140 mm (5.51 in.) x 120 mm (4.72 in.) (Length x Width)

2.9 CSLM The CSLM resides on the top of the cabinet. It provides surge protection for the environment alarm chest (EAC) and external clock interfaces.



2-22


The CSLM consists of two functional modules:

EAC interface protection module

The EAC interface protection module provides surge protection for the external alarm serial port.

External clock interface protection module

The external clock interface protection module provides surge protection for the external clock serial port.

Figure 2-10 shows the functional structure of the CSLM.

Alarm serial portprotection module

Clock interfaceprotection module

EAC

Externalclock

BBKM

CSLM

Figure 2-10 CSLM functional structure

The following describes the functional modules of the CSLM.

I. Alarm Serial Port Protection Module

This module connects with the BBKM and EAC through two DB9 interfaces. It can discharge surge current on the alarm interface.

II. External Clock Interface Protection Module

This module connects with the BBKM and EAC through two DB9 interfaces. It can discharge surge current on the external clock interface.


Table 2-10 lists the external interfaces of the CSLM.

Table 2-10 CSLM external interfaces


Alarm serial port DB9 interface with the level of RS-485

Clock serial port DB9 with the level of RS-232



2-23


Dimensions: 96 mm (3.78 in.) x 68 mm (2.68 in.) (Length x Width)

2.10 CFAN The compact-BTS fan module (CFAN) that resides under the switch box functions as a baseband downdraught cooling system.

The CFAN consists of one fan box and one compact-BTS fan block interface board (CFIB).

The fan box comprises the following parts:

Three +27 V DC brushless fan units One fan indication board One compact-BTS fan monitor module (CFMM)

This section describes the CFMM and CFIB in detail.

2.10.1 CFMM

The built-in compact-BTS fan monitor module (CFMM) resides in the fan box.

The CFMM communicates with the BCKM and receives the commands from the BCKM to perform the pulse-width modulation (PWM) speed setting control on the fan units. Meanwhile, the CFMM reports its status to the BCKM when queried by the BCKM.

The CFMM can guarantee a safe and proper cooling system and lower the system noise. The CFMM can:

Provide an RS485 serial port, support BCKM issuing fan speed control commands, and report fan unit fault alarms and fan speed.

Control the rotating speed of fans by collecting the temperature information outside the fan box and outputting PWM duty ratio signal.

Support online insertion and removal. Check and report whether the fan units are in position. Drive fan status indicators.

I. Structure and Principle

The CFMM consists of the following two parts:

Fan monitoring unit

The fan monitoring unit includes fan status detection circuit and communication circuit. It adjusts fan speed and reports fault alarms.

Fan driving unit

The fan driving unit generates power voltage for fans. It is controlled by driving voltage control signal output from the fan monitoring unit.



2-24

Figure 2-11 shows the functional structure of the CFMM.

CPU

Status indication

Lightningprotection alarm

Commnucationinterface circuit

EMC circuit

Temperaturedetection

Board address andversion configuration

circuit

Fan speeddetection circuit

Fan driving

PSUDC/DC

FAN FAN FAN

＋24VGND1

Fan speed signal

PWM signal

GND1GND

GND＋5V

RXDA1

TXDA1

＋24V ＋24V

CFMM

Figure 2-11 CFMM functional structure

The CFMM consists of the following modules:

PSU

The PSU converts the input ++27 V DC into the voltage necessary for the modules of the CFMM.

CPU

The CPU controls the fans and communicates with the BCKM. The CPU can:

--Generate fan control PWM signals according to the commands from the BCKM to control the speed of fans.

--Detect fan alarm signals and in-board logic alarm signals, and report them to the BCKM.

--Generate panel indicator signals.

Fan fault detection circuit

The fan fault detection circuit leads the fault alarm signals of fans to the CPU after optical coupling isolation. The CPU detects these signals using I/O interface.

Communication interface module



2-25

This module converts transmit/receive signals at CPU serial port into RS485 signals and performs serial communication with the BCKM.

EMC circuit

The electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) circuit prevents the +27 V input harmonic voltage from flowing to board circuits. At the same time, it also prevents the harmonic voltage generated by boards from flowing to the +27 V power system and eliminates conduction interference on the +27 V power system.

Fan driving module

This module provides power voltage for fans and keep the voltage stable.

Temperature detection module

This module detects the ambient temperature of the CFMM through the external temperature sensor on the fan box panel. Then the temperature sensor converts the temperature into digital signals and transmits them to the CPU.

Board IP address and version configuration circuit

When the fan box needs to communicate with the BCKM, you must configure communication address of slave node and board version.

Lightning protection alarm module

This module extracts Boolean value alarm signals from power supply lightning arrester, sends them to the CPU, and reports alarm through RS485.

Status indication module

When a functional alarm (for example, communication interruption in the main control mode) occurs to the CFMM or a fan-blocked alarm occurs to the fan motor, this module provides a light emitting diode (LED) optical alarm interface in the fan box to drive the LED indicator on the front panel of the fan box.

The red and green indicators are used, and the indication mode is controlled by the CPU.

II. External Interfaces

Table 2-11 lists the external interfaces of the CFMM.

Table 2-11 CFMM external interfaces


Power supply interface Leads in working power for the CFMM.

Communication serial port

An RS485 serial port, used for the communication between the CFMM and the BCKM.

Alarm interface of power lightning arrester

Uses MOLEX connector to transmit Boolean value alarm signals of power lightning arrester.



2-26


Interface to indicator sensor

Provides a driving interface to drive the LED indicator on the front panel of the fan box and outputs digital signals of temperature and humidity sensor.

Fan unit driving interface A maximum of three such interfaces, also used for fan-in-position detection and fan-blocked detection.

III. Technical Specifications

The following are technical specifications of the CFMM:

Power voltage: +27 V Output power: <24 W


2.10.2 CFIB

The CFIB resides behind the fan box in the cabinet. It connects the CFMM with the power supply system. It provides the blind mating interface for the fan box and the power supply interface and communication serial port for the system.


The CFIB is a transfer board with only one signal transfer unit. The CFIB consists of the following components:

One MOLEX blind mating connector, used for the online insertion and removal connection with fan box components.

One 3-pin socket, connecting with the system electricity. One DB-15 straight socket, connecting with system serial port. One 2-pin socket, connecting with lightning arrester alarm signals.

Figure 2-12 shows the structure of the CFIB.

(1) 2-pin socket (2) MOLEX connector (3) 3-pin power socket (4) DB-15 straight socket

Figure 2-12 Structure of the CFIB


Table 2-12 lists the external interfaces of the CFIB.



2-27

Table 2-12 CFIB external interfaces


Fan box electricity interface

Connects with fan box components in online insertion and removal mode through MOLEX connector.

System power interface Leads in power through a 3-pin power socket.

Communication serial port

Provides external communication serial port through the DB-15 straight socket.

Lightning arrester alarm interface Connects with lightning arrester alarm signals through the 2-pin socket.

III. Technical Specifications



System PincipleChapter 3 Radio Frequency Subsystem

3-1

Chapter 3 Radio Frequency Subsystem

This chapter introduces the functional structure of the BTS3606 radio frequency (RF) subsystem and describes the RF modules in detail.

3.1 Overview of the RF Subsystem

The RF subsystem consists of the following modules:

Compact-BTS transceiver module (CTRM)/Compact-BTS multi-channel transceiver module (CMTR)

Compact-BTS high power amplifier unit (CHPA)/Compact-BTS multi-channel power amplifier (CMPA)

Compact-BTS dual duplexer unit (CDDU) Compact-BTS transceiver backplane module (CTBM)

This chapter focuses on single-channel modules. For multi-channel modules, see the subsequent version.

3.1.1 Functional Structure of the Radio Frequency Subsystem

Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the RF subsystem.

TX1

RX1

TX2

RX2

CHPA

CTRM

CDDU

CTRM

CHPA

CCPM

CCPM

Electrical interface

Electrical interface

CDDU: Compact-BTS dual duplexer unit

CTRM: Compact-BTS transceiver module

CHPA: Compact-BTS high power amplifier unit

Figure 3-1 Structure of RF subsystem



3-2

The RF subsystem connects with the baseband subsystem through the RF cables and flexible boards of the backplane, and connects with the antenna subsystem through the feeder interface of the CDDU.

It performs the following functions.

In the forward link, it performs power adjustable up-conversion and power amplification on the modulated transmission signals, filtering the transmission signals to meet the corresponding air interface criteria.

In the reverse link, it filters the signals received by the BTS antenna to suppress out-band interference, and then performs low-noise amplification, division, noise factor adjustable frequency down-conversion, and channel selective filtering.

3.1.2 Introduction to RF Modules

The RF subsystem is composed of RF modules.

The RF modules include:

CTRM: Performs the modulation/demodulation and up/down-conversion of baseband signals.

CHPA: Performs the high-power amplification of transmitting carrier signals. CDDU: Performs the filtering and duplex isolation of two receiving/transmitting

signals. It is one of the RF front-end modules.

In addition to the above modules, this chapter also introduces the compact-BTS RF fan module (CRFM), the backplanes of RF modules, and the compact-BTS power combiner module (CPCM).

3.2 CTRM

In the forward link, the CTRM does the following:

1) Receive baseband signals from the baseband subsystem. 2) Change the baseband signals into RF signals by de-multiplexing, wave filtering,

and up conversion. 3) Send the RF signals to the RF subsystem through the CDDU.

In the reverse link, the CTRM does the following:

1) Receive main and diversity RF signals from the antenna subsystem. 2) Change the signals into baseband signals by down conversion, wave filtering and

multiplexing. 3) Send the baseband signals to the baseband subsystem.

In addition, the CTRM receives the management and configuration information from the BCKM of the baseband subsystem, and reports the status and alarms of itself to the BCKM.



3-3


The CTRM consists of compact-BTS radio up-down converter module (CRCM) and compact-BTS intermediate frequency module (CIFM).

Figure 3-2 shows its functional structure.

FIRand

DAGC

FIR Upconverter

DAC FilterDem

ultipl

exer

/mult

iplex

er

Downconverter

ADC Filter

PSU

CPUClock

Downconverter ADC Filter

CHPA

Local oscillator

CRCMCIFM

+24 V DC

Main receiver

Diversity receiver

Transmitter

CHPA

PSU

CDDU

CDDU

Figure 3-2 CTRM functional structure

I. CIFM

The CIFM consists of up converter, down converter, demultiplexer/multiplexer, electrical interface unit, clock unit, central processing unit (CPU), and power supply unit (PSU).

It processes the conversion between analog intermediate frequency (IF) signals and digital baseband signals and controls the CTRM.

Its units have the following functions:

Up converter

The up converter performs wave filtering, digital up-conversion and digital-analog conversion of signals in transmitting channels. That is, it does the following:

1) De-multiplex baseband signals. 2) Filter the signals. 3) Perform digital up-conversion to change the signals into digital IF signals. 4) Perform digital-analog conversion and filtering to generate analog IF signals. 5) Send the signals to the transmitter of the CRCM for RF up-conversion

through the RF interface. Down converter



3-4

The down converter performs analog-digital conversion, digital down-conversion and baseband filtering of signals in receiving channels. That is, it does the following:

1) Perform analog-digital conversion to convert the analog intermediate frequency signals from the RF interface into digital IF signals.

2) Perform digital down conversion and baseband filtering to convert the signals into baseband I/Q signals.

3) Transmit the I/Q signals to the demultiplexer/multiplexer. Demultiplexer/multiplexer

Under the control of the CPU, the demultiplexer/multiplexer fulfils the following functions:

− Demultiplex forward I/Q signals. − Multiplex reverse I/Q signals. − Multiplex/de-multiplex operation and maintenance (O&M) signals of the

operation and maintenance link (OML). Clock unit

This unit generates all clocks needed by the CIFM, including:

− Clocks for up/down conversion − Clocks for analog digit converter (ADC) − Clocks for digit analog converter (DAC) − Other working clocks

Moreover, it provides the reference clock for the CRCM.

CPU

The CPU controls the CTRM, including:

− Initialing upon power-up. − Collecting and reporting alarms. − Processing O&M-related information.

PSU

With the input voltage of +27 V DC, the PSU supplies power to the CIFM and CRCM.

II. CRCM

The CRCM consists of transmitter, main/diversity receiver, and local oscillator.

To the IF signals output by the CIFM, it performs up conversion, amplification, and spuriously-suppressive wave filtering.

To the BTS main/diversity receiving signals input by the CDDU, it performs analog down-conversion, amplification, and channel-selective wave filtering.

The following details the functions of the CRCM units:



3-5

Transmitter

The transmitter performs up conversion twice to convert the modulated analog IF signals output by the CIFM into the specified RF band. Before and after the up conversion, it performs wave filtering, signal amplification, and power control.

In this way, it ensures that output RF signals meet the protocol requirements on power level, adjacent channel power radio (ACPR), and spurious emission.

Main/diversity receiver

The receiver converts RF signals output by the CDDU into specified IF signals through down conversion. It performs wave filtering, signal amplification, and power control before and after the down conversion so as to ensure that the CIFM receives required output IF signals.

Local oscillator

The local oscillator consists of three parts:

− Intermediate frequency source: Generates local oscillator signals for IF up-conversion in transmitting channels.

− Transmit RF synthesizer: Generates local oscillator signals for RF up-conversion in transmitting channels.

− Receive RF synthesizer: Generates RF local oscillator signals for down conversion in main/diversity receiving channels.


Table 3-1 lists interfaces between the CTRM and the CHPA/CDDU/PSU.

Table 3-1 CTRM external interfaces


RF interface with the CHPA Outputs RF transmitting signals to the CHPA, which then amplifies and outputs the signals.

RS485 interface with the CHPA Transmits alarm and control signals and power detection signals.

RF interface with the CDDU Receives main/diversity RF receiving signals.

Power supply interface Supplies +27 V DC to the CTRM.

3.2.3 Specifications

The CTRM specifications are as follows:

Supported bands: 450 MHz, 800 MHz, and 1900 MHz Power voltage: +27 V DC



3-6

Power consumption: 51 W Dimensions: 460 mm (18.11 in.) x 233.5 mm (9.19 in.) x 64 mm (2.52 in.) (Length x

Width x Depth)

Note:

Different models of CTRMs are used to respectively support the different bands 450 MHz, 800 MHz, and 1900 MHz. Models of other RF modules also vary with the bands supported.

3.3 CHPA

Located to the left side of the CTRM, the CHPA amplifies RF modulation signals output by the CTRM. Its functions include:

RF power amplification: The CHPA performs power amplification for RF modulation signals from the CTRM.

Over-temperature alarm: When the CHPA temperature exceeds a specified threshold, the compact-BTS monitor control board (CMCB) processes the over-temperature alarm signals generated by the CHPA and reports to the CTRM.

Over-excited alarm: When the power level of CHPA input RF signal exceeds a specified threshold, the CMCB processes the over-excited alarm signals generated by the CHPA and reports to the CTRM.

Gain decrease alarm: When the CHPA gain drops over 6 dB, the CMCB processes the gain decrease alarm signals generated by the CHPA and reports to the CTRM.

Fan monitoring: Installed in the CHPA, the CMCB processes and reports fan alarm and CHPA alarm signals, and adjusts fan speed.


Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the CHPA.

RF input

CouplerPower amplifier

RF output

CTBM

CDDU

CTRM

BDCS

Sampling port

+24 V DC

CHPAAlarm signal

Alarm circuitCTRM

Circulator

HPAU

Figure 3-3 CHPA functional structure



3-7

The high power amplifier unit (HPAU) consists of power amplifier and alarm circuit.

The power amplifier amplifies RF signals from the CTRM. The amplified RF output signals are then sent to the CDDU through the CTBM.

The alarm circuit monitors the power amplifier and generates over-temperature alarms, over-excited alarms, or gain decrease alarm signals when necessary. The CTBM reports alarm signals.

The coupler is used to couple RF output signals to the sampling port for tests.

The output power of HPAU can be adjusted by controlling RF output signals from the CTRM.


Table 3-2 lists the external interfaces of the CHPA.

Table 3-2 CHPA external interfaces


RF interface An interface having one input port and one output port. The input port connects with the RF output port of CHPA through the CTBM, whereas the output port connects with the RF input port of CDDU through coaxial cables.

Power supply interface An interface with the CTBM, supplying +27 V DC to the CHPA.

Alarm interface An interface with the CTRM. Fan alarm signals and CHPA alarm signals are sent through the CTBM to the CTRM, which reports the alarms.


The CHPA specifications are as follows:

Supported bands: 450 MHz, 800 MHz, and 1900 MHz Power voltage: +27 V DC Power consumption: <380 W Dimensions: 460 mm (18.11 in.) x 233.5 mm (9.19 in.) x 64 mm (2.52 in.) (Length x

Width x Depth)

3.4 CDDU

The key components in the CDDU include low-pass filter and duplexer. The CDDU provides the following functions:

Duplex isolator and low-pass s filter for two receiving and transmitting signals Coupling tests for transmitting and receiving signals



3-8


The CDDU consists of two duplex filters with a common test interface for two receiving and transmitting signals.

Figure 3-4 shows the CDDU functional structure.

ND-SUB SD N-Type SMA-Type

LPF Duplexer

N

S

SD

D

TX2-TEST

TX/RXD-ANT

RXD-TEST

TX2

RXD-OUTLPF

LPF

Duplexer

N

S

SD

D

TX1-TEST

TX/RXM-ANT

RXM-TEST

TX1

RXM-OUT

LPF

LPF: Low-pass filter

Figure 3-4 CDDU functional structure

I. Low-pass Filter

The filter suppresses higher harmonic waves. The one on the receiving channel can also suppress interference from the transmitting channel.

II. Duplexer

The duplexer isolates transmitting and receiving signals and suppresses spurious emission. In this way, it helps save antennas.

III. TMA DC Power Supply Unit

When the BTS3606 works at 1900 MHz band, a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) may be used. The TMA DC power supply unit of the CDDU implements the combination and division of RF signals and DC feeding to provide DC power for the TMA.


Table 3-3 lists the external interfaces of the CDDU.



3-9

Table 3-3 CDDU external interfaces


Transmitting input interface Sends signals between the transmitting input end and the CHPA interface.

Transmitting output interface Sends transmitting output signals to the feeder at the top of the cabinet.

Receiving input interface Receives signals from the feeder at the top of the cabinet. The signals then are filtered in the CDDU.

Test interface Transmits signals for coupling tests of transmitting and receiving signals.


The CHPA specifications are as follows:

Supported bands: 450 MHz, 800 MHz, and 1900 MHz Dimensions: 260 mm (10.24 in.) x 80 mm (3.15 in.) x 366 mm (14.41 in.) (Length x

Width x Depth) Maximum output power: 100 W

3.5 CTBM

The CTBM is the backplane of the BTS3606 carrier units. It provides channels for the following signals:

Monitoring signals between the CTRM and the CHPA Traffic and O&M signals between the CTRM and the baseband boards Monitoring signals between two carrier units


A fully-equipped BTS3606 has two carrier units with six carriers. That is, each unit has three carriers. Each carrier unit is equipped with three CHPA slots and three CTRM slots. One CHPA is paired with a CTRM to form a CRFM, that is, one carrier. The CTBM consists of six CRFMs.

Figure 3-5 shows the slot distribution of the CTBM.



3-10

1

CRFM

3

CRFM

5

CRFM

0

CRFM

2

CRFM

4

CRFM

Figure 3-5 CTBM slot distribution

The CTBM slots are numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 from bottom to top and from left to right.


Table 3-4 lists the external interfaces of the CTBM.

Table 3-4 CTBM external interfaces


CTRM slot interface

Includes:

One 2 mm HM A-connector used as digital signal connector

One SMB connector

One 2 mm HM N-connector used as a power connector

This interface connects with the CTRM.

CHPA slot interface

24W7 connector, in which the low frequency pinout is used for the signal transfer between the CHPA and the CTRM, and the blind jack as the power pinout.

This interface connects with the CHPA.

Interworking interface of the CTBM and the BBKM 2 mm HM A-connector

Interworking interface between CTBMs High-density DB connector, supporting power mutual aid.





3-11

3.6 CRFM

The CRFM consists of CMCB, BTS BTRM fan lamp module (BBFL), and fans. The following introduces the CMCB and BBFL.

3.6.1 CMCB

Ensuring that the system works in a safe thermal status, the CMCB collects and analyzes the temperature information of CHPA to adjust the fan speed in real time. In this way, it can lower the wind noise in the system, prolong the service life of fans and improve the external indices of the overall system.

The MCU of the CMCB can generate pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals to control the fan speed. The CMCB can also receive fan speed control information from the BCKM through the CIFM. In addition, the CMCB reports the following CHPA-specific alarms to the BCKM to ensure the reliability of the CHPA:

Gain decrease alarms Over-temperature alarms Over-excited alarms Fan failure alarms

The CMCB provides the following functions:

Controlling the fan speed, and monitoring and reporting fan alarms Monitoring and reporting CHPA alarms Detecting the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) of CDDU transmit power, which

is used for CDDU transmit load impedance matching alarm Driving the BBFL Collecting temperature information of the CHPA Communicating with the CIFM


Figure 3-6 shows the location of the CMCB in the CHPA.



3-12

Fan

CMCB

HPAU

CHPA

Figure 3-6 CMCB location in the CHPA

Figure 3-7 shows the CMCB functional structure.

MCU

HPAU interfacecircuit

Temperaturecollection

Power and standingwave detection

Panel indicator drivingand alarm signalisolation circuit

PWM modulationcircuit

RS485 serial port 1

RS485 serial port 2

Externaltemperature

collection

RF powercoupling input

Fan box interface

Power serial port

Fan speed detection

Fan box interface

Fan box interface

Power serial port

CTRM online signal

Selec

tor

Figure 3-7 CMCB functional structure

The following details the CMCB sub-units:

MCU

The MCU has the following functions:

− Detecting the HPAU and fan speed and reporting fan alarms − Generating PWM signals − Collecting and reporting temperature information − Activating and reading power detection ADC − Communicating with the CTRM

HPAU interface module

This module isolates and drives the interface with the HPAU.

Temperature collection module



3-13

This module collects the temperature information of CHPA in real time. It controls power amplification according to the temperature change.

--It protects the power amplification when the temperature is too high.

--It stops the power amplification when the temperature is too low.

In addition, this module communicates with the MCU through bus and connects with an E2PROM for the compatibility with different power amplifiers.

Power and standing wave detection module

This module detects whether the load impedance of RF transmitter is matching. Voltage signal is sent out after power detection on transmitted wave and reflected wave. The voltage signal then is sampled. The CPU computes the sampled signal to obtain the voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) and reports it to the CIFM through RS485 serial port.

Panel indicator driving and alarm signal isolation module

This module drives the panel indicators and isolates fan alarm signals.

PWM modulation circuit

Fan motor control driving circuit is controlled by pulse signals generated from the MCU. These signals are converted into PWM signals through monostable circuit to control the fan motor.

Serial port communication module

This module uses two sets of RS485 serial port communication circuits. It performs serial communication with the CTRM.

PSU

The input power of the BBFM is +27 V DC, which is rectified into +5 V power for boards.


Table 3-5 lists the external interfaces of the CMCB.

Table 3-5 CMCB external interfaces


CHPA interface A forward transmit interface with the CHPA, used to monitor the CHPA alarms.

Serial communication interface Reports the fan alarms and CHPA alarms.

BBFL interface Transmits signals between the CMCB and the BBFL.



3-14


CRFM backplane interface There are two connectors on the CMCB. One connects with the power supply, and the other with CRFM backplane signals and CHPA alarm signals and control signals.

Fan cover interface Transmits CMCB status signals, fan status signals, and HPAU status signals.

III. Specifications


3.6.2 BBFL

The BBFL has three status indicators to indicate the status of the CTRM, fans and the CHPA. It is an auxiliary board, connecting with the CMCB through the fan cover interface.


Figure 3-8 shows the BBFL functional structure.

Fan cover interface (connect to CMCB)

CHPA indicatorFAN indicatorCTRM indicator

LED1 LED2 LED3

Fan 2

inter

face

Fan 1

inter

face

Figure 3-8 BBFL functional structure

The BBFL consists of the following parts:

Fan 1 interface module



3-15

It is a 4-pin ordinary socket connected with fan 1, including the power supply input port and fan alarm output port of fan 1.

Fan 2 interface module

It is a 4-pin ordinary socket connected with fan 2, including the power supply input port and fan alarm output port of fan 2.

Fan cover port module

It connects with the fan cover of the BBFM.

II. Panel Indicators

Table 3-6 lists the indicators on the front panel of the BBFL.

Table 3-6 BBFL panel indicators

Indicator Description

LED1 CTRM operating signal

LED2 Fan operating signal

LED3 CHPA operating signal

III. Specifications


3.7 CPCM

The CPCM is configured only when power synthesis is needed. It combines two high-power RF signals from the two CHPAs into output higher power. Meanwhile, it performs backplane transfer of CHPA-in-position information and communication signals.


The CPCM comprises the following parts:

Combiner unit: Combines two high-power RF signals. Transfer unit: Performs backplane transfer of the CHPA alarm signals.

Figure 3-9 shows the location of the CPCM in the system.



3-16

CHPA

CDDU CTRMCHPA

CCPMElectricalinterface

CPCM

Figure 3-9 CPCM location in the system

The two CTRM output ports connect to the two CHPAs residing in the same row. The two CHPA output ports connect to the two input ports of the CPCM. The input power of the two CHPAs are synthesized and output to the CDDU as high power.


Table 3-7 lists the external interfaces of the CPCM.

Table 3-7 CPCM external interfaces


External signal interface Connects to the CHPA and serves as a test interface.

CDDU interface Connects to CDDU RF input port to output combined power.


The CPCM specifications are as follows:

Maximum output power: 100 W

Dimensions: 473.5 mm (18.64 in.) x 261 mm (10.28 in.) x 35 mm (1.38 in.) (Length x Width x Depth)


System PincipleChapter 4 Antenna Subsystem

4-1

Chapter 4 Antenna Subsystem

The BTS antenna subsystem consists of two parts:

Radio frequency (RF) antenna: Transmit the modulated RF signals and receive mobile station (MS) signals.

Dual-satellite synchronization antenna: Provide precise synchronization signals for the CDMA system.

4.1 RF Antenna

The RF antenna of the BTS comprises antennas, the jumpers from antenna to feeder, feeders, and the jumpers from feeder to the cabinet bottom, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Sectorα

Sectorβ

Antenna

Feeder

Jumper

Jumper

BTS cabinet

Sectorγ

Figure 4-1 Structure of RF antenna

4.1.1 Antenna

An antenna is the end point of transmitting and the start point of receiving. The type, gain, coverage pattern, and front-to-rear ratio of antenna may affect the system performance. The network designer must choose antennas properly based on the number of subscribers and system coverage.

I. Antenna Gain

The antenna gain denotes the capability of an antenna to radiate the input power in specific directions.



4-2

In the direction where the radiation intensity of the antenna is the strongest, the higher the gain is, the stronger the field intensity will be in a distant place and the larger area the antenna will cover. However, there may be blind areas in the vicinity.

II. Antenna Pattern

An antenna pattern describes the radiation intensity of the antenna in all directions. We often use the horizontal antenna pattern, and take it as a standard to classify antennas.

The BTS antenna is categorized into omni antenna and directional antenna. The latter covers such types as 120ÿ, 90ÿ, 65ÿ, and 33ÿ.

III. Polarization

Polarization describes the path of direction change of electrical field. The mobile communication system often uses uni-polarization antennas.

Recently the bi-polarization antenna becomes popular. This is an antenna with two cross-over antenna polarization directions. The isolation is over 30 dB for both the +45ÿ and -45ÿ polarization directions.

Using bi-polarization antennas can save antennas, since one bi-polarization antenna can replace two independent uni-polarization antennas.

In directional cells, bi-polarization directional antennas are used. Compared with uni-polarization directional antennas, they are cost-effective, space saving, and easy to install. However, only uni-polarization omni antennas are adopted in omni cells.

IV. Diversity Technology

Radio wave propagation in an urban area has the following features:

The medium value of field intensity varies slowly with places and time in the rule of logarithmic normal distribution, which is called slow fading.

The transient value of field intensity fades selectively along multiple transmission paths in the rule of the Rayleigh distribution, which is called fast fading.

The fast fading, slow fading, multipath effect, and shadow effect may affect the quality of communication or even interrupt the communication. Diversity technology is one of the most effective technologies to resolve the problem. Appropriate diversity receiving and combining technology can minimize the fading effects on signal transmission when there is little correlation between two fading signals.

The diversity technology includes polarization diversity and space diversity. The present mobile communication system can adopt either the horizontal space diversity or the polarization diversity. Space diversity can be effective when the distance between two antennas is over 10 wavelengths. And polarization diversity will become more and more popular since it can facilitate antenna installation and save space.



4-3

V. Antenna Isolation

The receiving/transmitting antenna must be installed with sufficient isolation to minimize the effect on the receiver. The isolation is subject to the spurious emission of the transmitter and the characteristics of the receiver.

4.1.2 Feeder and Jumper

Normally, standard 7/8 inch or 5/4 inch feeders are used to connect outdoor antennas and indoor cabinets. In the site installation, you must make 7/16 DIN connectors based on the actual length of the laid feeders.

Before leading feeders in the equipment room, you must install cable clips for lightning protection at the tower top (or building roof), middle sections of feeders, and the wall hole through which feeders are led indoor. For long feeders, you must add grounding cable clips evenly in the middle.

Because neither 7/8 inch nor 5/4 inch feeders must be bent, you must connect tower top (or building roof) antennas with feeders and indoor cabinets with feeders through jumpers. The jumper provided by Huawei is the 1/2 inch one. It is 3.5 m (11.48 ft) long and has 7/16DIN connectors.

Table 4-1 shows the loss indices of the feeders often used in the project.

Table 4-1 Loss index (dB/100 m(328.08 ft)) of feeder (at normal temperature)

Band 7/8 inch feeder 5/4 inch feeder

450 MHz 2.65 dB 1.87 dB

800 MHz 3.9 dB 2.8 dB

1900 MHz 5.9dB 4.51dB

4.1.3 Lightning Arrester

The lightning arrester is optional. It is required only when the BTS3606 works at the 1900 MHz band.

The lightning arrester is used to prevent damage of lightning current to the antenna system.

Usually, there are two types of lightning arresters.

The first type conducts the low frequency lightning current to the ground so as to sink the current according to the microwave principle.

The second one is a discharging tube. When the voltages at both ends of the discharging tube reach a certain value, the tube conducts to sink the large current.

The discharging tube is used in the BTS3606. Lightning arrester is usually installed close to the BTS cabinet.



4-4

4.1.4 Tower-Mounted Amplifier

The tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is optional. It is required only when the BTS3606 works at 1900 MHz band.

The TMA is a low-noise amplification module installed on the tower. It amplifies the reverse signals from MS before the transmission loss occurs when signals pass the feeder. This helps improve the receiving sensibility of the BTS system and the reverse coverage of the system while lowering the transmit power of the MS and improving the conversation quality.

Usually the triplex TMA is configured. It is installed close to the antenna. This type of TMA consists of triplex filter, low-noise amplifier, and feeder.

The triplex filter filters the signals received from the antenna to remove the external interference. Then the low-noise amplifier amplifies the weak signals received and sends them through the low-loss cable to the indoor equipment.

Features of the TMA include:

The noise factor of TMA is very low. The TMA has a wide dynamic range, which is fully adaptable to the signal

strength change caused by different distances between the MS and the BTS. The TMA has the alarm bypass function. The TMA is fed through the feeder, so it is equipped with the feeding detection

device. Water-proof sealing measure is taken for the TMA, which allows the TMA to work

under the temperature ranging from –40°C to +70°C. The TMA can sustain strong lightning strikes.

4.2 Satellite Synchronization Antenna

To improve the system security and reliability, the BTS receives the signals of GPS or GLONASS system through a satellite synchronization antenna to implement wireless synchronization.

A satellite synchronization antenna system consists of:

An antenna An jumper from the antenna to the feeder Feeders An jumper from the feeder to the cabinet bottom (feeders and jumpers can be

configured as needed) A lightning arrester

Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the satellite synchronization antenna system.



4-5

Antenna

Feeder

Jumper

Jumper

BTS cabinet

Lightning arrester

Antenna and feeder interface

Figure 4-2 Structure of satellite synchronization antenna

Note:

When the length of feeder is within 100 m (328.08 ft), you can choose the 1/2 inch feeders. The feeder can directly connect to an antenna or a lightning arrester without using any jumper. When the length of feeder exceeds 100 m (328.08 ft), you must choose the 7/8 inch feeder. In this case, it is necessary to use jumpers to connect the feeder to the antenna and the lightning arrester.

4.2.1 Introduction to GPS and GLONASS

Generally, one BTS is configured with one set of satellite synchronization antenna. However, if two BCKMs are configured to further enhance the reliability of the system, each of the two BCKMs must be configured with one set of independent satellite synchronization antenna.

Figure 4-2 illustrates two satellite synchronization antenna interfaces.

The following describes the application of GPS and GLONASS in the CDMA BTS.

I. GPS

The GPS is an all-weather satellite navigation system based on radio communications. It can provide global high-precision information about 3D-position, speed and time.

The accuracy of the 3D-position information can reach 10 yard (approximately 9.1 m) (29.86 ft) and that of the time signal can reach 100 ns or better.

The GPS signals can be received and used as a reference frequency after processing.

The GPS system consists of three parts.



4-6

Space part: A satellite constellation (comprising 24 satellites) of 20,183 kilometers (66,216,386.4 ft) high and with an orbital period of 12 hours.

Land control part: Cover a main control center and some widely distributed stations.

User part: Include GPS receivers and their supporting devices.

II. GLONASS

The GLONASS is a global satellite navigation system developed by the former Soviet Union and taken over by Russia. It has a similar structure to the GPS but a smaller coverage.

III. Application of GPS and GLONASS in CDMA BTS

The BTS supports GPS/GLONASS synchronization mode. Two synchronization solutions (GPS or GPS/GLONASS) can be provided as required by the user.

In the CDMA 1X system, the BTS uses the timing function of the GPS or GLONASS system. The BTS adopts the intelligent software phase-locking and holdover technologies to minimize the interference such as signal drift and jitter caused by ionosphere error and troposphere error of GPS or GLONASS satellite.

Timing signals of the GPS or GLONASS are provided with high reliability and long-term frequency stability. The BTS is equipped with a crystal clock of high stability. The short-term stability of this crystal clock and the long-term stability of the GPS or GLONASS combine to ensure the reliability and stability of the CDMA 1X system clock.

4.2.2 Antenna

The GPS antenna and the GPS/GLONASS satellite receiving antenna are usually used.

I. GPS Antenna

The GPS antenna is an active antenna, which can receive L1 band (1565 MHz to 1585 MHz) GPS signals. The signals are sent to a GPS receiver integrated in the BCKM after the processing in a narrow-band filter and a preamplifier.

II. GPS/GLONASS Satellite Receiving Antenna

The GPS/GLONASS satellite antenna is also an active antenna. It can receive the L1 band signals from the GPS and the GLONASS signals (1602 MHz to 1611 MHz).

4.2.3 Feeder and Jumper

Generally, you can use standard 1/2 inch or 7/8 inch feeders to connect outdoor antennas and indoor cabinets. In the site installation, you must make 7/16 DIN connectors based on the actual length of the laid feeders.



4-7

Before connecting feeders to the cabinet-top, you must install lightning protection grounding clips at the tower top (or building roof), middle sections of feeders, and the spot close to the cabinet bottom. For long feeders, you must add lightning protection grounding clip evenly in the middle.

Since 7/8 inch feeder must not be bent, you must connect the tower top (or building roof) antenna and the feeder, indoor cabinet and the feeder through jumpers. The jumper provided by Huawei is the 1/2 inch one. It is 3.5 m (11.48 ft) long and has 7/16 DIN connectors.

The feeder transmits GPS/GLONASS signals received by the GPS/GLONASS antenna to the GPS/GLONASS receiver on the BCKM. It also supplies power for the antenna to pre-amplify the signals received.

4.2.4 Lightning Arrester of Antennas

Like the lightning arrester of RF antenna, the satellite uses the lightning arrester of antenna to protect the equipment against inductive lightning current within the feeder. One feeder is configured with one lightning arrester, and the lightning arrester is installed at equipment side.

4.2.5 Receiver

The receiver is categorized into GPS receiver and GPS/GLONASS receiver.

I. GPS Receiver

There are many types of GPS receivers. The following introduces the one with eight parallel channels.

The GPS receiver with eight parallel channels can track eight satellites simultaneously and track the C/A code by receiving L1 band GPS signals.

Inside the receiver, the RF signal processor down-converts GPS signals received by the antenna to get intermediate frequency (IF) signals. The processor then converts the IF signals into digital signals and sends them to eight-channel code and carrier correlator, where signal detection, code correlation, carrier tracking and filtering are performed.

The processed signals are synchronized and sent to the micro processing unit (MPU). The MPU controls the operational mode of GPS receiver and decoding, processes satellite data, measures pseudo-distance and pseudo-distance increment so as to figure out the position, speed and time.

This receiver uses regulated 5 V DC. Its receiving sensitivity is –137 dBm.



4-8

II. GPS/GLONASS Receiver

The GPS/GLONASS receiver has 20 receiving channels. It operates in the identical principle with the GPS receiver. By using the cipher code, it can be upgraded from GPS L1 to GPS/GLONASS L1+L2 or other solutions.


System PincipleChapter 5 Power Supply Subsystem

5-1

Chapter 5 Power Supply Subsystem

This chapter introduces the structure, power distribution plans, and power supply unit (PSU) of the power supply subsystem.

5.1 Overview of Power Supply Subsystem

The BTS built-in PSU provides +27 VDC power for the BTS, forming the power supply subsystem together with the power distribution, lightning protection, and power monitoring devices. To address different requirements of power supply, –48 VDC and +24 VDC power inputs are supported.

The power supply subsystem uses a reliable and flexible power supply solution.

For example, the BTS adopts centralized lightning protection and distributed DC power supply solution. The power supply subsystem of each cabinet is an independent system and each PSU has its own built-in monitoring unit. These units are connected on the backplane. They report information to CTRM through the universal monitoring bus and then to the BCKM to implement power management and monitoring.

Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the whole power supply subsystem.

Lightn

ing pr

otecti

on

powe

r dist

ributi

on

DC/DCmodule

DC/DCmodule

DC/DCmodule

EMIfilter

-48V

+27VDC OUT

Load

.....Monitoring serial port

Figure 5-1 BTS power supply subsystem

5.2 Power Distribution Plans

The BTS power supply subsystem supports the –48 VDC and +24 VDC power input modes.



5-2

5.2.1 The +24 VDC Power Input Mode

In the +24 VDC power input mode, the EMI filter filters the +24 VDC input power and then sends it to the wiring terminal on the top of the cabinet.

5.2.2 The –48 VDC Power Input Mode

Compared with the +24 VDC input mode, DC/DC power supply units (PSUDC/DCs) are required to convert the –48 VDC power to the +27 VDC power in the –48 VDC power input mode.

When –48 VDC power input is adopted, the –48 VDC input power is processed as follows:

1) EMI filter filters the –48 VDC input power and sends it to the wiring terminal on the top of the cabinet top, and then to the power backplane input busbar in the secondary power subrack.

2) PSU converts the –48 VDC input power to the +27 VDC power and outputs it to the output busbar on the backplane of the power subrack and then led to the BTS direct current switch box (BDCS) on the top of the cabinet top through the power cables in the wiring cabling trough.

3) The distribution copper bar in the BDCS distributes +27 VDC power to the various power consumption units that connect to the output terminals of the terminal block.

To ensure the normal power supply to of other units of PSUDC/DCs when one PSUDC/DC fails due to over-current, over-current protection device is equipped in the BDCS for each power consumption unit. There are also lightning protection alarm indicator and the –48 VDC power status indicator on the BDCS.

When fully configured, the power supply subsystem has three PSUDC/DCs. The output power of these three PSUDC/DCs is the same. They support online insertion and removal.

Figure 5-2 shows the overall structure of the power supply subsystem when the –48 VDC power input is used.



5-3

Connection terminal

-48VIN

GNDDC/DC

DC/DC

DC/DC

Switch box

-48V DC indicatorLightning protection on the cabinet top

DU CTRM0

PGND

CTRM3CTRM1

Service elementCTRM2

Indicator

DC/DC

...

...

PSUDC/DC subrack

CTRM5

-48VIN

GNDDC/DC

DC/DC

DC/DC

-48V

DU CTRM0

PGND

CTRM3CTRM1 CTRM2

PCB

DC/DC

...

...

CTRM5

Connection terminal

-48VIN

GNDDC/DC

DC/DC

DC/DC

Switch box

-48V DC indicatorLightning protection on the cabinet top

DU CTRM0

PGND

CTRM3CTRM1

Service elementCTRM2

Indicator

DC/DC

...

...

PSUDC/DC subrack

CTRM5

-48VIN

GNDDC/DC

DC/DC

DC/DC

-48V

DU CTRM0

PGND

CTRM3CTRM1 CTRM2

PCB

DC/DC

...

...

CTRM5

Figure 5-2 Structure of power supply subsystem

5.3 PSUDC/DC

The PSUDC/DC is equipped with mature circuit and excellent protection functions. Its safety specifications are compliant with UL, TUV and CCEE standards. Its electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) performance is compliant with EN55022 and IEC61000-4 standards.


PSUDC/DC in the power supply subrack transfers power and signals through the compact-BSC power backplane module (CPBM) at the back of the power supply subrack.

PSUDC/DC consists of the DC/DC power conversion part and power monitoring part. The former converts the –48 VDC power to +27 VDC power, and the latter monitors the PSU status and reports alarms.

Figure 5-3 shows the structure of the PSUDC/DC.



5-4

Figure 5-3 Structure of the PSUDC/DC


Table 5-1 lists the external interfaces of the PSUDC/DC.

Table 5-1 PSUDC/DC external interfaces


RS485 serial port Implements communication with the baseband subsystem. The baud rate is 9600 bps.

DB9 interface Connects the upper level equipment and lower level equipment on the bus or serves as a test interface.


The following are technical specifications of the PSUDC/DC:

Input voltage: –40 VDC to –60 VDC Input under-voltage current-limiting protection point: –36!1 VDC Input under-voltage recovery point: –38!1 VDC Output voltage: +27!0.5 VDC Output voltage range: +25 VDC to +29 VDC Output over-voltage protection point: +30.5!0.5 VDC DC output rated current: 65 A Output current-limiting point: 68.5 A to 71.5 A Rated power: 1800 W Power efficiency: ú85% (in full load)



5-5

Dimensions: 400 mm (15.75 in.) x 121.9 mm (4.8 in.) x 177.8 mm (7 in.) (Length x Width x Depth)


System PincipleChapter 6 Environment Monitoring Subsystem

6-1

Chapter 6 Environment Monitoring Subsystem

This chapter introduces the environment monitoring subsystem of the BTS3606 and describes the environment alarm chest (EAC) and power inspecting board (PIB) in detail.

6.1 Overview of Environment Monitoring Subsystem

BTS equipment rooms are usually widely distributed and unattended by maintenance engineers. In comparison with switch equipment rooms, BTS equipment rooms have fewer and simpler facilities, and the system operates in poor environment. To ensure the normal operation of BTS, environment monitoring system is required to handle accidents.

The environment monitoring subsystem of the BTS consists of EAC, BTS alarm interface, and PIB.

The environment monitoring interface of BTS3606 is the EAC interface located at the top of the cabinet.

The following sections introduce alarm function of the EAC and the PIB.

6.2 EAC

The EAC collects external environment information. If alarm condition is met, an alarm will be generated and sent to BSC.

This section shows the structure of the EAC and introduces its functions.

6.2.1 Structure

Figure 6-1 shows the outlook of the EAC.



6-2

Figure 6-1 EAC

The EAC consists of the host, temperature and humidity sensor, smoke sensor, infrared tube, door status switch, and other sensors. Each sensor connects to the host through cables.

6.2.2 Functions

The EAC provides the following functions:

Use the external sensors to monitor in real time the environment parameters such as the temperature, humidity, smoke and illegal access in the equipment room.

Provide fire, smoke, temperature, humidity, water immersion alarms and other three types of anti-burglar alarms. When the alarm condition is met, the EAC sends alarm signals to the BTS through the alarm signal cable and drives related protection apparatus such as fire extinguisher, humidifier, dehumidifier or burglar proof device.

Allow users to issue commands to the EAC from the control center to modify parameters or to drive protection apparatus.


Table 6-1 lists the external interfaces of the EAC.

Table 6-1 EAC external interfaces


10-channel extended switching value input

Used for optical and electrical isolation

6-channel relay Maximum: 5 A/220 V. Used to drive external actuators

2-channel PWM output 8-bit resolution, with basic clock no greater than 500 kHz

Independent 7-channel collector OC gate Absorption current: 300 mA.



6-3


RS485 interface Used for the communication with the BCKM of the BTS.

6.3 PIB

As a supplement to the EAC, the PIB monitors the power supply to the BTS. If it cannot detect any mains power input, it will send alarms to the BSC through the BTS. This board can connect to BTS directly or report alarms to the BTS through the EAC.

6.3.1 Outlook

The PIB is installed in a white metal box. Together they form an entity called power inspection module.

The dimensions of the box are 224 mm (8.82 in.) x 140 mm (5.51 in.) x 54 mm (2.13 in.) (Length x Width x Depth), and the total weight of the box (including the PIB) is around 2 kg (4.41 lb).

Figure 6-2 shows the outlook of the power inspection module.

Figure 6-2 Power inspection module

There are three indicators (A, B and C) on the power inspection module. These indicators respectively indicate whether the supply of A-phase, B-phase, and C-phase is normal or not. If the green indicator is on, the power supply is normal. If the green indicator is off, the power supply is faulty.



6-4

6.3.2 Functions

The PIB provides the following functions:

Monitor the mains supply to the BTS. It can detect supply interruption and phase insufficiency of the three-phase power and form a two-channel switching value.

If the BTS is powered by the single-phase power, the PIB can detect the status of the single phase (any one of the three phases).


Table 6-2 lists the external interfaces of the PIB.

Table 6-2 PIB external interfaces


PIB-BTS interface Connects to the extended alarm input on the top of the BTS cabinet through a DB9-DB37 signal cable to provide the alarm function.

PIB-EAC interface Connects to the extended alarm input top of the EAC through the signal cable to report the PIB alarm signals as the EAC extended alarm signals.


System PincipleChapter 7 Lightning Protection and Grounding

7-1

Chapter 7 Lightning Protection and Grounding

This chapter introduces the principle and methods of lightning protection and grounding.

7.1 Overview of Lightning Protection and Grounding

Lightning protection and grounding are two importance measures to ensure the personnel safety and the equipment safety.

7.1.1 Lightning Protection

Lightning protection system for communication equipment includes the external lightning protection system and the internal lightning protection system.

The external lightning protection system protects the equipment against direct lightning strike, including lightning receivers, lightning down-leading cables and grounding devices.

The internal lightning protection system protects the equipment against indirect strike, such as thunder bolt induction, reverse lightning strike, lightning wave intrusion and other lightning strokes that might endanger human beings and the equipment.

7.1.2 Equipment Grounding

The purpose of equipment grounding is to provide the equipment with the capability of protecting against external electromagnetism interference and to ensure the safety of human beings and the equipment.

The key of lightning protection is grounding, because a fine grounding system can provide the equipment with a low-impedance lightning electricity discharging channel.

7.2 BTS Lightning Protection Principle

Effective lighting protection measures are taken for each part of the BTS3606 system.

7.2.1 Lightning Protection Principle

The lightning protection measures for telecommunication equipment should observe the following principles:



7-2

Systematic protection: Since communication devices are extensively connected and lightning surge is everywhere, protection only on equipment level or on board level is not enough. The system environment of the sites must be studied seriously to take systematic protection measures.

Probability protection: Lightning occurs randomly and lightning protection devices cannot prevent the generation of lightning stokes or suppress all over-voltage and over-current. Although there is small probability of destructive lightning, the cost of protection is considerable.

Multi-level protection: It means to protect different electromagnetic environments by level. IEC 61312 divides the equipment premises area into several lightning protection zones: LPZ0A, LPZ0B, LPZ1, and LPZ2, as shown in Figure 7-1.

LPZ2 EM field further attenuation

LPZ0A is likely to be attacked by direct lightning, with no attenuation in the electromagnetic field

Antenna

Metal (pipe)

Equipment

Communication cable

Power cable

Hole (such as window)

Pole or fenceLPZ0B is not likely to be attacked by direct lightning,with

no attenuation in the electromagnetic field

LPZ1 is not likely to be attacked by direct lightning, with no attenuation in

the electromagnetic field.

Figure 7-1 IEC 61312 division of lightning protection zone

The BTS equipment is usually in LPZ1, and communication cables, power cables and antennae are usually in LPZ0A. Different protection measures are taken in different zones.

The multi-level protection requires equipotential connection (equipotential connection means the connection of lightning apparatus, metal devices, foreign conductor, electrical appliances and telecommunication equipment located in the area with conductors or surge protectors) to minimize potential difference between metal parts and the systems.

To lower the probability of lightning attack to the BTS, the following three aspects must be considered:

Protection system of the room (site) where BTS is located BTS internal lightning protection system



7-3

Cooperation between the above two systems

7.2.2 Lightning Protection for Power supply

The lightning protection of the BTS3606 power supply is implemented through the lightning arrester installed on the top of the cabinet.

The BTS power supply subsystem is protected by five levels of measures, as shown in Figure 7-2.

.

..

3-phase AC

AC/DC

6 kV 4 kV 2.5 kV 1.5 kV

Great power-absorbing capability, slow

response, at cable inlet of the room, optional

Normal power-absorbing capability, quick

response, in front of rectifier module

Low power-absorbing capability, very quick response, in rectifier

module

Level-1 protection Level-2 protection Level-3 protection Level-4 protection

Considerable power-absorbing capability, normal

response, at the AC distribution point

Figure 7-2 Illustration of lightning protection for BTS power supply

Level-5 protection device is a built-in integrated lightning arrester on the top of the cabinet. Figure 7-3 is a diagram of the level-5 protection device.

Figure 7-3 Level-5 lightning protection for BTS power supply

The following is a detailed introduction to the DC lightning arrester.



7-4

I. Features

The DC lightning arrester offers the following features:

Temperature-controlled fusing technology and built-in over-current protection circuit to prevent fire

Multiple autonomous current equalization technology used to withstand successive lightning attack

Common mode and differential mode protection, and low residual voltage Dual-color working status indication, with remote alarm node Small size and easy installation

II. Input Specifications

The input specifications of the DC lightning arrester are as follows:

Input mode: –48 VDC Operating voltage range: –40 VDC to –60 VDC Maximum input current: 30 kA

III. Wiring Scheme

The positive and negative poles of the power cord are connected with the V+ and V- terminals of the lightning arrester.

The PE end is connected to the grounding copper bar for lightning protection.

IV. Lightning Protection Specifications

The lightning protection specifications are as follows:

Maximum through-flow: 30 kA, once, 8/20 3s surge current wave. Rated through-flow: 5 kA, 5 times for positive and negative each, 8/203s surge

current wave. Residual voltage: 250 V

V. Indicator and Alarm Node Indices

When the green indicator is on and the red is off, it means the power input is normal, and the lightning arrester is working normally.

If the green indicator is off and the red indicator is on, it means the power input is abnormal, components in the lightning arrester are damaged, protection effect is deteriorated and the device must be replaced immediately.

The alarm dry contact is a constantly-closed contact. It is closed when the lightning arrester is normal and it is open when arrester fails. Its regulated current is equal to or less than 1 A.



7-5

VI. Dimensions of the Lightning Arrester

41 mm (1.61 in.) x 95 mm (3.74 in.) x 59 mm (2.32 in.) (Length x Width x Height)

7.2.3 Lightning Protection for Trunk Cables

Three kinds of trunk cables are supported in BTS:

75 Ω coaxial cable (E1) 120 Ω twisted pair (E1) 100 Ω twisted pair (T1)

The BESP on top of the cabinet provides lightning protection for these trunk cables.

I. Connection of Trunk Cables to BTS

Figure 7-4 shows how to connect the trunk cables with the BTS.

BESP

BTS

Transmissionequipment

BCIM

75/120/100Ω

Grounding bar of the room

75/120/100Ω

Figure 7-4 Connection of trunk cables to BTS

II. Introduction to BESP

The E1/T1 interfaces of BTS are protected by a BESP on the top of the cabinet.

In consideration of the limited space and for the convenience of installation, two identical BESPs are used. Each has eight pairs (16 PCS) of E1/T1 lightning protection units, 1 DB37 connector and 2 DB25 connectors, as shown in Figure 7-5.



7-6

DB37

DB25

DB25

16 E1/T1 lightning protection units

128m

m

128mm

Fixing holeФ 3.5

PGNDФ 10

Out from the cabinet(4 pairs of E1/T1)

Into the cabinet(8 pairs of E1/T1)

10mm

6mm

6mm

5mm

Out from the cabinet(4 pairs of E1/T1)

Figure 7-5 Structure of the BESP

The E1/T1 lightning protection unit has two lead-in lines connected with DB25, two lead-out lines connected with DB37, and one PGND. The PGNDs of all lightning protection units can be interconnected.

DB37 are male connectors and DB25 are female connectors, connecting eight pairs of shielded E1/T1 cables. 75Ω, 100Ω and 120Ω impedance match is provided by the cables.

Figure 7-6 is the line diagram of the E1/T1 lightning protection unit.



7-7

Core

Sheath

PGND

Lead inDB25

Lead outDB37

Figure 7-6 E1/T1 lightning protection unit

7.2.4 Lightning Protection for Antenna System

The RF equipment of the BTS must be placed within the protection range of the lightning rod. It is the precondition of the lightning protection design.

I. Lightning Protection for RF Antenna System

The lightning protection for the RF antenna port is to protect against secondary lightning attack (the inductive lightning). Inductive lightning means that the feeder receives inductive current at the moment of lightning attack, which may cause damage to the equipment.

Inductive lightning can be prevented in three ways:

The feeder is grounded at least at three points. In practice, the number of grounding points depends on the length of the feeder.

For BTS working at 450 MHz band or 800 MHz band, the RF antenna and feeder part and CDDU are grounded through an internal path. The lightning current induced by the antenna and feeder can be directly discharged to the ground through the grounding point. Besides, the CDDU itself features strong protection capability against lightning current, and can meet the normal protection requirements without adding lightning protector.

For BTS working at 1900 MHz band, tower mounted amplifier (TMA) may be needed. In this case, the BTS needs to supply power to the TMA through the DDU, so lightning arresters are needed at BTS side.

II. Lighting Protection for GPS/GLONASS Synchronization Antenna

GPS/GLONASS synchronization antenna is protected against the lightning strike in the following ways:



7-8

Grounding of feeder at three points: In practice, the number of grounding points depends on the length of the feeder.

External lightning protector: In normal condition, a lightning arrester is connected at BTS side so as to avoid the possible damage to the BTS equipment caused by the lightning current induced by feeder.

7.2.5 Lighting Protection for Serial Port

The lighting protection for serial port is implemented through the CSLM on the top of the cabinet. When a surge occurs to the alarm box and the external clock interface, signals are sent to the CSLM through serial port cable for processing. Thus the surge current is discharged.

7.3 Grounding of BTS Equipment

Effective grounding measures are taken for each part of the BTS3606 system.

7.3.1 Internal Grounding of Cabinet

The following lists measures for internal grounding of cabinet.

Install grounding terminals at the cable outlet port, the bottom and the door of the cabinet.

Install busbars in the main cabinet, with common grounding cables. All equipment connects to the grounding system of the cabinet using the grounding cables.

Ensure that various metal components of the BTS3606 are of high electric conductivity and no insulation paint is applied to the connection points of metal components.

Connect metal shells of the subracks, power distribution unit, and PSU to the metal mechanical parts in the cabinet.

7.3.2 External Grounding of Cabinet

The following lists measures for external grounding of the cabinet.

Connect the protection grounding (PGND) cable from the PGND of BTS3606 to the nearest grounding copper bar of the equipment room.

If the cabling rack is used for installation, connect both ends of the cabling rack to the ground with separate grounding cables to discharge surplus electric charge caused by lightning strike or electric power induction.



7-9

7.3.3 Grounding of AC Lightning Arrester

The AC lightning arrester is grounded by connecting its PE end to the grounding protection copper bar.

7.3.4 Grounding of Trunk Cables

The trunk cables are grounded through BESP. The coaxial cables are grounded, while the twisted pairs are not.


System PincipleChapter 8 BTS Signal Flows

8-1

Chapter 8 BTS Signal Flows

This chapter introduces the composition of the BTS signal flows and describes each signal flow in detail when the BTS3606 operates in single-channel mode in a CDMA2000 1X network.

8.1 Overview of BTS Signal Flows BTS signals include:

Abis traffic signal Abis signaling Operation&maintenance (O&M) signal Clock signal Local man-machine interface (MMI) signal

These signals form various flows in the transmission from the Abis interface to the Um interface, as shown in Figure 8-1. The flows are identified by different colors.

Note:

The radio frequency (RF) signal flow varies with the BTS configurations. Figure 8-1 shows the signal flow in the configuration of S (2/2/2).

8.1.1 Abis Signal

The Abis traffic signals, Abis signaling, and O&M signals are adapted and carried through asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) protocols. At different interfaces, the physical links used as ATM links are different.

At the Abis interface, the physical link is E1/T1 link. Between the baseband processing boards, the physical links are cell buses.

The baseband signals (including the Abis traffic signals, Abis signaling, and O&M signals) are processed by the CTRM and converted into RF signals before the transmission. In the reverse direction, the CTRM receives RF signals and converts them into baseband signals.

8.1.2 Clock Signal

As a synchronization system, the CDMA2000 1X needs a precise clock reference for synchronization.



8-2

Figure 8-1 shows that satellite synchronization signals serve as the clock reference.

8.1.3 Local MMI Signal

The BTS provides an interface for local maintenance, through which you can operate and maintain the BTS by using MMI commands.

The local MMI signal is a kind of O&M signal from the local maintenance terminal (compared with the signal coming from a remote terminal through the BSC). Hence, it is not introduced separately.


System Pinciple Chapter 8 BTS Signal Flows

8-3

MMI

BCKMCellBus

CLK

MC

OMU

...

CellBus

CHPA CDDU

CHPA

... ... ...

Antenna&

Feeder

Satellite ReceiverAntenna & Feeder

CCPM

CCPM

CCPM

1PPS, UTC 2S10MHz

2S, 25MHz

BCIM

25MHz

Circuit Interface CTRM

BSC

BAM

E1/T1

Abis signaling

OAM

Abis traffic

16×1.228MHz

CCPM

Abis signaling signal

OAM Signal

Abis traffic signalRF singalClock Signal

DR1

MR0

MR1

CTRM

MR1

DR1

MR0

CHPA CDDU

CHPA

CTRM

DR1

MR0

MR1

CTRM

MR1

DR1

MR0

Antenna&

Feeder

Figure 8-1 BTS signal flows



8-4

8.2 Abis Traffic Signal Flow The Abis traffic signal is carried by

Fundamental channel (FCH) Supplemental channel (SCH) Dedicated control channel (DCCH).

The FCH/DCCH carries voice traffic and in-band signaling, while the SCH carries data traffic. The following introduces the signal flow in the forward and reverse directions respectively.

8.2.1 Forward Traffic Signal Flow

In the forward direction, the traffic signals are processed as follows:

1) The ATM cells from the BSC are carried by the E1/T1 links and sent to the BCIM. 2) The BCIM processes the ATM cells through the IMA, and then under the control of

the BCKM sends the signal to the CCPM through the cell bus. 3) The CCPM processes channels, covering coding, interleaving, spreading,

modulating, and multiplexing. After the processing, the baseband signals carrying the Abis traffic (received over the FCH, SCH, and DCCH) from the BCIM are sent to the related CTRM.

4) The CTRM performs demultiplexing, up-conversion and filtering on the received baseband signals, and sends them to the CHPA.

5) The CHPA amplifies the signals and forwards them to the CDDU, which transmits the signals through the antenna and feeder system.

8.2.2 Reverse Traffic Signal Flow

In the reverse direction, the signals are processed as follows:

1) Through the main and diversity antennas, the CDDU receives two CDMA signals transmitted from the MS. Then it sends the signals to the CTRM.

2) The CTRM performs filtering, down-conversion and multiplexing on the main and diversity signals, and sends them to the CCPM.

3) The CCPM processes channels, covering demultiplexing, demodulating, de-interleaving, and decoding. Then, under the control of the BCKM, the baseband signals carrying the Abis traffic (received over the FCH, SCH and DCCH), are sent to the BCIM through the cell bus in the form of ATM cells.

4) The BCIM processes the ATM cells through the IMA, and then sends them to the BSC over the E1/T1 link.



8-5

8.3 Abis Signaling Flow The Abis signaling is carried by the access channel (ACH) and the paging channel (PCH). These messages are called out-of-band signaling (relative to the in-band signaling in the Abis traffic). The following introduces the flow in the forward and the reverse directions respectively.

8.3.1 Forward Signaling Flow

In the forward direction, the signaling is processed as follows:

1) The ATM cells from the BSC are carried by the E1/T1 links to the BCIM. The BCIM processes the ATM cells through the IMA, and then the main control unit (MCU) of the BCKM processes and sends them to the CCPM through the cell bus.

2) The CCPM processes channels, covering coding, interleaving, spreading, modulating and multiplexing. After the processing, the baseband signals carrying the Abis traffic (received over the PCH) from the BCIM are sent to the related CTRM.

3) The CTRM performs demultiplexing, up-conversion and filtering on the received baseband signals, and sends them to the CHPA.

4) The CHPA amplifies the signals and forwards them to the CDDU, which transmits the signals through the antenna and feeder system.

8.3.2 Reverse Signaling Flow

In the reverse direction, the signaling is processed as follows:

1) Through the main and diversity antennas, the CDDU receives two CDMA signals transmitted from the MS. Then it sends the signals to the CTRM.

2) The CTRM performs filtering, down-conversion and multiplexing on the main and diversity signals, and sends them to the CCPM.

3) The CCPM processes channels, covering demultiplexing, demodulating, de-interleaving, and decoding. Then under the control of the BCKM, the baseband signals carrying the Abis traffic (received over the ACH) are sent to the BCIM through the cell bus in the form of ATM cells.

4) The BCIM processes the ATM cells through the IMA, and then sends them to the BSC over the E1/T1 link.

8.4 O&M Signal Flow The operations and maintenance over the BTS, originated either from the remote BAM or from the local maintenance terminal, are implemented by the operation & maintenance unit (OMU) on the BCKM.

For the direction of the signal flow, see Figure 8-1.



8-6

8.5 Clock Signal Flow The BCKM receives satellite signals and 1PPS signals through the GPS/GLONASS synchronization antenna.

The BCKM uses the 1PPS signals as its reference source. The CLK unit processes these signals to generate the 10 MHz clock, the 2S, and the 16Fc clock (19.6608 MHz) required by the CCPM.

The BCKM also synthesizes the 2S and the 10 MHz signals required by the test devices.

The following provides the detailed description of clock signal flows:

The BCIM obtains the 25 MHz clock signals from the clock bus. Although the BCKM provides the BCIM with the 2S and 16 Fc clock signals, the BCIM does not use them. Instead, the BCIM uses the clock signals generated by the internal oscillator and in turn provides these clock signals to major chips.

The CCPM obtains the 2S signals, 25 MHz signals, and 16Fc signals from the clock bus. The BCPM processes the 16Fc signals to generate the 32Fc and 50Fc signals. The 32Fc signals are further processed to generate the 16Fc signals, and the 2S signals are processed to generate the 2S signals required by CSM5000.

The CTRM obtains the 10 MHz clock signals from the BCKM through clock cables. These signals are processed by clock units of the CTRM to generate other clock signals that the CTRM needs.

The soft site obtains the 1Fc signals from optical fibers connected with the CCPM while the ODU3601C soft site is cascaded, and then converts them to 100Fc signals for the ODU3601C.


System PincipleChapter 9 BTS Configuration

9-1

Chapter 9 BTS Configuration

This chapter details the configuration of each part of the BTS3606 based on the introduction to physical structure of the BTS3606 in Chapter 1, “Overall Structure”.

9.1 Configuration Principle

To configure the BTS3606, you need to observe the following rules listed in the order of precedence.

1) Use minimum trunk cables. 2) Use minimum antennas. 3) Use minimum CDDUs.

9.2 Cabinet Configuration

The BTS3606 cabinet configuration covers:

Configuration of baseband boards Configuration RF modules Configuration of power modules

9.2.1 Configuration of Baseband Boards

The baseband boards include BCIM, CCPM/CECM, BCKM, and HPCM (optional). They are inserted into the upper and lower parts of the baseband subrack, performing the functions of interface, control, clock and baseband processing.

Figure 9-1 shows the fully-equipped baseband subrack without HPCM.



9-2

4 2 0 0 0

5 3 1 1

(2)(1)

BCIM

BCKM

C

M

C

M

BCKM

C

M

C

M

(3)

C

M

CEM

EE

E E E

(1) Connection part between the upper and the lower subracks (2) Baseband boards (3) Slot numbers

Figure 9-1 Fully-equipped baseband subrack

I. BCIM

The BCIM provides the interface between the BTS and the BSC.

Each BCIM supports eight E1/T1 interfaces at most. When the BTS3606 is configured with one BCIM (fully configured), the BCIM provides the physical interface to the BSC in the form of load sharing. The maximum of eight E1/T1 links are provided. In practice, you can configure the BCIM according to the capacity requirements and service types.

For the configuration of BCIM links, refer to the following typical data:

For S(1/1/1) BTS, configure one E1/T1. For S(2/2/2) BTS, configure two E1/T1s.

The above data is given for the CDMA 1X system. For the IS95 system, the above quantity can be reduced by half.

When the transmission resource is limited, you can deploy the fractional ATM networking function of the BCIM to configure specific timeslot in a specific E1/T1 system to the BTS.

II. CCPM

The compact-BTS channel process module (CCPM) in the BTS3606 system processes channels to the reverse traffic and the forward traffic. Its functions include multiplexing and de-multiplexing, modulating and demodulating, coding and decoding,



9-3

and interleaving and de-interleaving. There are three slots for the CCPM in the upper subrack and the lower subrack respectively.

The CCPM includes two types. One has two optical interfaces, while the other has no optical interface. If the BTS3606 shall be cascaded with ODU3601C, you should use the CCPM with optical interfaces and single-mode optical fibers.

The CCPM covers type-A CCPM and type-B CCPM in view of the processing capability.

The type-A CCPM can process 64 (two chips) reverse channels and 128 forward channels.

The type-B CCPM can process 128 (four chips) reverse channels and 256 forward channels.

You should configure the CCPMs according to the channel processing capability required by the system.

Table 9-1 lists the typical configuration of CCPM.

Table 9-1 Typical configuration of CCPM

BTS configuration Number of type-A CCPM Number of type-B CCPM (recommended for three-sector configurations)

O(1) 1 Not recommended

O(2) 2 Not recommended

S(1/1) 1 Not recommended

S(1/1/1) 2 1

S(2/2/2) 4 2

Caution:

The above configurations are given for the CDMA 1X system. For the IS95 configuration, the quantity should be reduced by half. For three-sector configurations such as S(1/1/1) and S(2/2/2), type-B CCPMs are recommended.

In general, redundancy is unnecessary. If a CCPM fails, the system automatically shields it. In this case, the system capacity decreases, but the operation goes on without any interruption. Whether the redundancy configuration is necessary depends on users’ requirements.

III. CECM

You must configure the CECM when the BTS support CDMA2000 1xEV-DO. The CECM resides in the slot of the CCPM. Configure the CECM according to the channel



9-4

processing capability and the quantity of the CTRMs. You can configure a maximum of six CECMs.

Similar to the CCPM, The CECM can be divided into two types. One is with two optical interfaces, and the other is without optical interfaces. If you want to cascade the BTS3606A with the ODU3601C, you must use the CECM with optical interfaces, and the optical fibers deployed must be single-mode ones.

The CECM can process 24 to 96 reverse channels and 192 forward channels.

IV. BCKM

One BTS can be configured with at most two BCKMs which operate in the active-standby mode. When the active BCKM goes faulty, the standby BCKM becomes the active status automatically.

Caution:

There are two types of BCKMs: GPS BCKM and GPS/GLONASS BCKM. The latter is more expensive. The selection of the BCKM varies with the actual requirements. But it should be consistent with the satellite antenna and feeder system. Each BCKM supports one set of independent satellite antenna and feeder system. Hence, during the backup of the BCKM, you should backup the relevant antenna and feeder information simultaneously.

V. HPCM

The HPCM is optional. If the BTS is required to maintain the clock signal as long as 24 hours when the BTS cannot lock the satellite synchronization clock signal, you need to configure the HPCM. In this case, you need to configure only one BCKM at the upper part of the BCKM slot and the HPCM at the lower part.

9.2.2 Configuration of RF Modules

You can configure the RF modules in the single-channel or multi-channel mode:

Single-channel mode: RF modules include CTRM, CHPA, and CDDU. Multi-channel mode: RF modules include CMTR, CMPA, and CDDU.

Figure 9-2 shows the full-configured single-channel RF modules.



9-5

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

CHPA

CTRM

Cable trough

CDDU

CDDU

CDDU

Cable trough

Figure 9-2 Fully-equipped RF modules

I. CTRM/CHPA

One CTRM and one CHPA forms one carrier unit. A single cabinet can be configured with at most six carrier units, three for the upper RF module and three for the lower one.

II. CDDU

Each CDDU supports two sector carriers. That is, it supports the O(2) or S(2/2/2) configuration without requirements on the carrier spacing.

A single cabinet can be configured with at most three CDDUs. You should configure the CTRMs and CHPAs corresponding with the CDDU from bottom to up and from left to right, as shown in Figure 9-2.

Note:

The BTS3606 supports O(1), O(2), S(1/1), S(1/1/1) and S(2/2/2) configurations. For the configuration methods of the CTRM/CHPA and the CDDU, see section 4.2.3, "Installing RF Cables Connected to the Front of CDDU" in the "Cabinet Equipment Installation" module of Airbridge BTS3606 CDMA Base Station Installation Manual.



9-6

9.2.3 Configuration of PSUs

The PSUDC/DC subrack can be fully configured with three power modules, as shown in Figure 9-3.

PSU PSU PSU

Figure 9-3 PSUDC/DC subrack in full configuration

The PSUDC/DC subrack implements DC/DC conversion from –48 V DC to +27 V DC. The Power Supply Units (PSUs) are configured in the N+1 backup mode.

The number of the PSUs varies with the number of sector carriers. If the number of sector carriers is equal to or less than three, you should configure two (1+1) PSUs.

If the number of sector carriers is three to six, three PSUs shall be configured.

9.3 Configuration of Antennas

The configuration of antennas involves the configuration of:

RF antennas Satellite synchronization antennas

9.3.1 RF Antennas

This section only gives the general guide to the antenna configuration. In practice, you shall select the antenna according to the actual network planning scheme of the office. The general guide is as follows:

For the omni cell, select omni antennas. For the directional cell, select directional bi-polarization or uni-polarization

antenna. For large coverage area, select the antenna with greater gain (for omni cell or

directional cell). As for the directional cell, try to select the bi-polarization antenna to facilitate the

construction. During the antenna configuration, use the directional antenna or the omni

antenna as per the section design in the network planning. As for the omni cell, use two omni uni-polarization antennas which operate in

transceiving duplexing mode.



9-7

9.3.2 GPS/GLONASS Synchronization Antennas

Normally, one BTS3606 is configured with one set of GPS/GLONASS synchronization antenna.

If it is necessary to improve system reliability, you can configure two BCKMs for the BTS3606. In this case, you must configure one set of satellite synchronization antenna for each BCKM.

If one of the two satellite synchronization antennas fails, switchover happens and the standby BCKM serves as the active one. Then, the other set of antenna is responsible for receiving the synchronization signals

9.4 Networking Configuration

The BTS3606 supports star networking, chain networking and tree networking. In addition, it also supports fractional ATM networking and cascading with ODC3601Cs. These networking modes are usually used together in practice.

The proper utilization of different networking modes can ensure the Quality of Service (QoS) and save the investment on the transmission equipment.

9.4.1 Star Networking

The following details star networking.

I. Application Scope

Star networking is widely used, especially in the densely populated urban area. Figure 9-4 shows a star networking diagram.

E1/T1

BSC

BTS

BTS

BTS

E1/T1

E1/T1

Figure 9-4 BTS star networking



9-8

II. Advantage

In the star networking mode, each BTS is directly connected with the BSC through E1/T1 trunk cables. The simple networking facilitates the maintenance and construction.

Because the signals go through a few sections of links, the line is more reliable and future expansion is easier.

III. Disadvantage

Compared with other networking modes, star networking requires the largest number of transmission lines.

IV. Implementation

The internal network of Huawei CDMA BSS is built on the fractional ATM platform. The logic links of Abis interface, such as traffic link and signaling link, are carried by ATM links, which are carried by E1/T1 links in IMA mode or UNI mode.

Star networking means that the BTS is connected with the BSC through independent E1/T1 links.

9.4.2 Chain Networking

The following details chain networking.


Figure 9-5 shows a chain networking diagram. Chain networking is applicable to sparsely populated stripe areas, for example, along the highways and railways.

BSC

BTS BTS BTS

E1/T1 E1/T1 E1/T1

Figure 9-5 BTS chain networking

II. Advantage

The adoption of the chain networking mode can reduce the cost on transmission equipment, engineering construction, and the lease of transmission links.

III. Disadvantage

As the signals go through more nodes in the chain networking mode, the line reliability is poor.

The failure of the upper-level BTS may affect the normal operation of the lower-level BTS.



9-9

A maximum of three-level cascading is allowable. That is, the nodes cascaded should not exceed 3.

IV. Implementation

Chain networking is realized through the transmission trunk function of the BTS. The transmission trunk is essentially virtual path (VP) switching. One BTS can be configured with at most ten E1/T1 trunk links.

Note:

ATM switching covers two types: VP switching and virtual channel (VC) switching. In the VP switching process, only the value of VPI is changed, while the value of VCI is transmitted transparently. In the VC switching process, values of both VPI and VCI are changed. The VP is equivalent to a large channel, while the VC a small one.

During the configuration of a BTS trunk link, it is necessary to properly configure the forward/reverse BCIM No., the forward/reverse link set No., and the forward/reverse VP No.

9.4.3 Tree Networking

The following details tree networking.


Tree networking mode is applicable to the area where network structure, site and subscriber distribution are complicated, such as the area where different types of subscribers are unevenly distributed.

Figure 9-6 shows a tree networking diagram.



9-10

BTS

BTS

BTS

BSC

BTS

BTS

E1/T1

E1/T1 E1/T1

E1/T1

E1/T1

Figure 9-6 BTS tree networking

II. Advantage

Compared with the star networking mode, tree networking needs less transmission lines.

III. Disadvantage

In this mode, because signals go through too many nodes, the line reliability is low, and construction and maintenance are difficult.


Inconvenient expansion may cause substantial network reconstruction. The cascaded BTSs should not exceed three levels, that is, the tree should not

exceed three layers.

IV. Implementation

The tree networking is in fact one application of the chain networking.

For example, the first-level BTS can be configured with multiple trunk links. These trunk links can be allocated to each of the lower-level BTSs (note that these BTSs do not share the same trunk lines). The lower-level BTS can in turn allocate the trunk links to its own lower-level BTSs. In this way, a tree network comes into being.

9.4.4 Fractional ATM Networking

The following details fractional ATM networking.


When the transmission resource is rather limited and the BTS capacity is not large, the BTS3606 supports the fractional ATM networking. That is, the BTS only uses specific timeslots in one or more E1/T1 links.



9-11

Fractional ATM networking is similar to the tree networking. It adopts only part of the timeslots of E1/T1 links.

II. Advantage

The use of this mode can fully and flexibly utilize the transmission resource and thus reduce the related cost.

III. Disadvantage

As the transmission resource is limited, the capacity of the BTS cannot be too large.

If the actual BTS capacity is more than what the transmission resource can support, the call completion rate will be affected.


Inconvenient expansion may cause substantial network reconstruction.

IV. Implementation

The BTS3606 can use the timeslot cross-connection function of the BCIM to implement the fractional ATM networking without the support of external equipment.

In practice, the timeslot cross-connection should be added to the upper-level BTS, while the E1/T1 timeslots should be specified for the lower-level BTS by adding the E1/T1 fractional ATM transmission link to this BTS.

9.4.5 Cascading with ODU3601Cs

The following details the connection between the BTS3606 and ODU3601C.


The ODU3601C is an outdoor SoftSite. By connecting ODU3601C, the BTS3606 can cover different places including the indoors, underground, highways, and railways.

II. Advantage

The satellite synchronization antenna and feeder is spared, which saves the investment.

This networking mode is applicable in the areas like the metro where it is not easy to install the satellite synchronization antenna and feeder.

Compared with the repeater, the ODU3601C supports the centralized management of the upper-level BTS. This facilitates the network planning.

III. Disadvantage




9-12

IV. Implementation

The CCPM can connect to the ODU3601C using single-mode optical fiber. ODU3601C can be configured either into a certain sector of the master BTS, or as an independent cell.

9.5 Configuration of Auxiliary Equipment

The BTS3606 is an indoor BTS. It requires the support of the environment monitoring instrument and digital distribution frame (DDF).

9.5.1 Environment Monitoring Instrument

The environment monitoring instrument monitors the humidity, the temperature, and the smoke in the equipment room, collects related parameters and generates relevant alarms.

9.5.2 DDF

The DDF serves as distribution connection equipment between digital multiplexing equipment, and between SPC exchange or non-voice traffic equipment and the digital multiplexing equipment.

At present, there are two types of DDFs: 75 DDF and 120 DDF. They respectively connect to 75 and 120 trunk cables. They support the following transmission rate:

75 DDF: 2 Mbit/s, 8 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 155 Mbit/s 120 DDF: 2 Mbit/s

9.6 Typical Configuration

Table 9-2 lists typical configurations of the BTS3606.

Table 9-2 BTS3606 typical configurations

Mode Working bands Typical configuration

Single-channel 450MHz, 800MHz, and 1900MHz O(1), O(2), S(1/1/1), and S(2/2/2)

Multi-channel 800MHz and 1900MHz O(1), O(2), O(3), O(4), O(5), O(6), S(1/1/1), S(2/2/2), S(3/3/3), S(4/4/4), S(5/5/5), and S(6/6/6)

The typical configurations in the multi-channel mode are introduced in the later versions. This section introduces two common typical configurations in the single-channel mode.



9-13

9.6.1 O(1) Configuration

In the O(1) configuration, the BTS3606 is equipped with the following parts:

Baseband boards: One BCKM, one BCIM, and CCPM (configured according to the actual requirement)

PSUs: Two to three PSUs RF antennas: One uni-polarization directional antenna for each sector RF modules: One CTRM, one CHPA, and one CDDU

Figure 9-7 shows the configuration of the RF module.

Sector B Sector C

TX1

TX2

CTRM

RX2

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

RX1

CDDU

Sector A

Figure 9-7 O(1) RF module configuration

9.6.2 S(2/2/2) Configuration

In the S(2/2/2) configuration, the BTS3606 is equipped with the following parts:

Baseband boards: One BCIM, one BCKM, and CCPM (configured according to the actual requirement)

PSUs: Three PSUs RF antennas: Two uni-polarization directional antennas or one bi-polarization

directional antenna for each sector RF modules: Six CTRMs, six CHPAs, and three CDDUs

Figure 9-8 shows the configuration of the RF module.



9-14

Sector A Sector B Sector C

TX1

TX2

CTRM

RX2

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

RX1

CDDU

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

TX1

TX2

CTRM

RX2

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

RX1

CDDU

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

TX1

TX2

CTRM

RX2

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

RX1

CDDU

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRI

PAin

CHPA

CTRM

PAout

TX1

TX2

MRO

MRI

DRICHPA

Figure 9-8 S(2/2/2) RF module configuration

Caution:

When the BTS3606 adopts S(2/2/2) configuration and cascades with ODU3601Cs, the additional CCPM with optical interface should be configured.


System PincipleAppendix A Performance of Receiver and Transmitter

A-1

Appendix A Performance of Receiver and Transmitter

The technical specifications of BTS receivers and transmitters comply with or surpass all the performance requirements defined in the IS-97-D Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Base Stations.

A.1 Introduction to Band Class

The base station receive CDMA frequency assignments are associated on a one-to-one basis with transmit CDMA frequency assignments. Each CDMA frequency assignment must be conducted within the specified band class. The base station shall support at least one of the preferred CDMA channels for each band class supported.

Band classes defined in IS-97-D protocol include:

Band class 0 (800 MHz band) Band class 1 (1900 MHz band) Band class 2 (TACS band) Band class 3 (JTACS band) Band class 3 (Korean PCS band) Band class 5 (450 MHz band) Band class 6 (2 GHz band) Band class 7 (700 MHz band) Band class 8 (1800 MHz band) Band class 9 (900 MHz band)

This chapter focuses on the 800 MHz band, 1900 MHz band, 450 MHz, and 2 GHz band.

A.1.1 800 MHz Band

Table A-1 CDMA channel number to CDMA frequency assignment correspondence for band class 0

Transmitter CDMA channel number CDMA frequency assignment (MHz)

1 ≤ N ≤ 799 0.030 N + 825.000 Mobile Station

991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.030 (N-1023) + 825.000

1 ≤ N ≤ 799 0.030 N + 870.000 Base Station

991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.030 (N-1023) + 870.000



A-2

Table A-2 CDMA channel numbers and corresponding frequencies for band class 0 and spreading rate 1

Transmit frequency band (MHz) Band subclass

System designator

CDMA channel validity

CDMA channel number Mobile station Base station

A" (1 MHz)

Not validValid

991−1012 1013−1023

824.040−824.670 824.700−825.000

869.040−869.670 869.700−870.000

A (10 MHz)

Valid Not valid

1−311 312−333

825.030−834.330 834.360−834.990

870.030−879.330 879.360−879.990

B (10 MHz)

Not validValid Not valid

334−355 356−644 645−666

835.020−835.650 835.680−844.320 844.350−844.980

880.020−880.650 880.680−889.320 889.350−889.980

A' (1.5 MHz)


667−688 689−694 695−716

845.010−845.640 845.670−845.820 845.850−846.480

890.010−890.640 890.670−890.820 890.850−891.480

0

B' (2.5 MHz)


717−738 739−777 778−799

846.510−847.140 847.170−848.310 848.340−848.970

891.510−892.140 892.170−893.310 893.340−893.970

A" (1 MHz)

Not validValid

991−1012 1013−1023

824.040−824.670 824.700−825.000

869.040−869.670 869.700−870.000

A (10 MHz)

Valid Not valid

1−311 312−333

825.030−834.330 834.360−834.990

870.030−879.330 879.360−879.990

B (10 MHz)


334−355 356−644 645−666

835.020−835.650 835.680−844.320 844.350−844.980

880.020−880.650 880.680−889.320 889.350−889.980

A' (1.5 MHz)

Not validValid

667−688 689−716

845.010−845.640 845.670−846.480

890.010−890.640 890.670−891.480

1

A''' (2.5 MHz)

Valid Not valid

717−779 780−799

846.510−848.370 848.400−848.970

891.510−893.370 893.400−893.970

Table A-3 CDMA preferred set of frequency assignments for band class 0

Band subclass System designator Spreading rate Preferred set channel numbers

A 1 283 (Primary) and 691 (Secondary)

3 37, 78, 119, 160, 201, 242

B 1 384 (Primary) and 777 (Secondary)0

3 425, 466, 507, 548, 589



A-3

Band subclass System designator Spreading rate Preferred set channel numbers

A 1 779 (Primary) and 738 (Secondary)

3 37, 78, 119, 160, 201, 242, 738

B 1 486 (Primary) and 568 (Secondary)1

3 404, 445, 486, 527, 568

A.1.2 1900 MHz Band


Transmitter CDMA channel number Center frequency for CDMA channel (MHz)

Mobile station 0 ≤ N ≤ 1199 1850.000 + 0.050 N

Base station 0 ≤ N ≤ 1199 1930.000 + 0.050 N


Transmit frequency band (MHz) System designat

or CDMA channel

validity

CDMA channel number Mobile Station Base Station

A (15 MHz)

Not validValid Conditionally valid

0–24 25–275 276–299

1850.000–1851.200 1851.250–1863.750 1863.800–1864.950

1930.000–1931.200 1931.250–1943.750 1943.800–1944.950

D (5 MHz)

Conditionally validValid Conditionally valid

300–324 325–375 376–399

1865.000–1866.200 1866.250–1868.750 1868.800–1869.950

1945.000–1946.200 1946.250–1948.750 1948.800–1949.950

B (15 MHz)


400–424 425–675 676–699

1870.000–1871.200 1871.250–1883.750 1883.800–1884.950

1950.000–1951.200 1951.250–1963.750 1963.800–1964.950

E (5 MHz)


700–724 725–775 776–799

1885.000–1886.200 1886.250–1888.750 1888.800–1889.950

1965.000–1966.200 1966.250–1968.750 1968.800–1969.950

F

(5 MHz)


800–824 825–875 876–899

1890.000–1891.200 1891.250–1893.750 1893.800–1894.950

1970.000–1971.200 1971.250–1973.750 1973.800–1974.950

C (15 MHz)

Conditionally validValid Not valid

900–924 925–1175 1176–1199

1895.000–1896.200 1896.250–1908.750 1908.800–1909.950

1975.000–1976.200 1976.250–1988.750 1988.800–1989.950



A-4


Block designator Spreading rate Preferred set channel numbers

A 1 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275

3 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250

D 1 325, 350, 375

3 350

B 1 425, 450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650, 675

3 450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650

E 1 725, 750, 775

3 750

F 1 825, 850, 875

3 850

C 1 925, 950, 975, 1000, 1025, 1050, 1075, 1100, 1125, 1150, 1175

3 950, 975, 1000, 1025, 1050, 1075, 1100, 1125, 1150

A.1.3 450 MHz Band



1 ≤ N ≤ 300 0.025 (N-1) + 450.000

539 ≤ N ≤ 871 0.025 (N-512) + 411.000

1039 ≤ N ≤ 1473 0.020 (N-1024) + 451.010 Mobile station

1792 ≤ N ≤ 2016 0.020 (N-1792) + 479.000

1 ≤ N ≤ 300 0.025 (N-1) + 460.000

539 ≤ N ≤ 871 0.025 (N-512) + 421.000

1039 ≤ N ≤ 1473 0.020 (N-1024) + 461.010 Base Station

1792 ≤ N ≤ 2016 0.020 (N-1792) + 489.000



A-5


Transmit frequency band (MHz) System designator

CDMA channel validity

CDMA channel number Mobile station Base station

A (4.5 MHz)

Not validConditionally validValid Not valid

121-125 126-145 146-275 276-300

453.000-453.100 453.125-453.600 453.625-456.850 456.875–457.475

463.000-463.100 463.125-463.600 463.625-466.850 466.875-467.475

A’ (0.5 MHz) Not valid 101-120 452.500-452.975 462.500-462.975

B (4.5 MHz)


81-105 106-235 236-260

452.000-452.600 452.625-455.850 455.875–456.475

462.000-462.600 462.625-465.850 465.875-466.475

C (4.8 MHz)


1-25 26-168 169-193

450.000-450.600 450.625-454.175 454.200–454.800

460.000-460.600 460.625-464.175 464.200-464.800

D (4.2 MHz)


539-563 564-681 682-706

411.675-412.275 412.300-415.225 415.250-415.850

421.675-422.275 422.300-425.225 425.250-425.850

E (4.5 MHz)


692-716 717-846 847-871

415.500-416.100 416.125-419.350 419.375-419.975

425.500-426.100 426.125-429.350 429.375-429.975

F (4.5 MHz)


1792-1822 1823-1985 1986-2016

479.000-479.600 479.620-482.860 482.880-483.480

489.000-489.600 489.620-492.860 492.880-493.480

G (4.76 MHz)


1235-1265 1266-1442 1443-1473

455.230-455.830 455.850-459.370 459.390-459.990

465.230-465.830 465.850-469.370 469.390-469.990

H (4.42 MHz)


1039-1069 1070-1229 1230-1260

451.310-451.910 451.930-455.110 455.130-455.730

461.310-461.910 461.930-465.110 465.130-465.730


System designator Preferred set channel numbers

A 160, 210, 260

B 120, 170, 220

C 47, 97, 147

D 573, 623, 673

E 731, 781, 831

F 1841, 1904, 1967

G 1291, 1354, 1417



A-6

System designator Preferred set channel numbers

H 1087, 1150, 1213

A.1.4 2 GHz Band



Mobile Station 0 ≤ N ≤ 1199 1920.000 + 0.050 N

Base Station 0 ≤ N ≤ 1199 2110.000 + 0.050 N


Transmit frequency band (MHz) CDMA channel validity CDMA channel number

Mobile station Base station

Not valid Valid Not valid

0−24 25−1175 1176−1199

1920.000−1921.200 1921.250-1978.750 1978.800-1979.950

2110.000-2111.200 2111.250-2168.750 2168.800-2169.950


Spreading rate Preferred set channel numbers

1 25, 50, …, 1150, 1175

3 50, 75, …, 1125, 1150

A.2 Performance of Receiver

A.2.1 Frequency Coverage

450 MHz band: 450 MHz – 460 MHz 800 MHz band: 824 MHz – 849 MHz 1900 MHz band: 1850 MHz – 1910 MHz



A-7

A.2.2 Access Probe Acquisition

The access probe failure ratio under the reliability of 90% is below the maximum values listed in Table A-13:

Table A-13 Access probe failure ratio

Eb/N0 Per RF input point (dB) Maximum failure rate

5.5 50%

6.5 10%

A.2.3 R-TCH Demodulation Performance

I. Performance of R-TCH in Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN)

The demodulation performance of the Reverse Traffic Channel in AWGN (no fading or multipath) environment is determined by the frame error rate (FER) at specified Eb/N0 value.

FER of 4 possible data rates should be calculated respectively. With 95% confidence, the FER for each data rate does not exceed the two given FERs in Table A-14 to Table A-21, which adopt the linear interpolation in the form of Log10(FER).

The Eb/NO measurement value uses the bigger Eb/NO value measured on the two RF input ports.

Table A-14 Maximum FER of F-FCH or R-DCCH receiver in demodulation performance test under RC1

FER limits (%) Data rate (bit/s)

Lower limit Eb/N0 Upper limit Eb/N0

9600 3.0 @ 4.1dB 0.2 @ 4.7dB

4800 8.0 @ 4.1dB 1.0 @ 4.7dB

2400 23.0 @ 4.1dB 5.0 @ 4.7dB

1200 22.0 @ 4.1dB 6.0 @ 4.7dB



A-8


FER limits (%) Data rate (bit/s)


14400 5.0 @ 3.2dB 0.2 @ 3.8dB

7200 6.3 @ 3.2dB 0.7 @ 3.2dB

3600 5.8 @ 3.2dB 1.0 @ 3.2dB

1800 3.5 @ 3.2dB 1.0 @ 3.2dB


FER limit (%) Data rate (bit/s)


9600 2.3% @ 2.4 dB 0.3% @ 3.0 dB

4800 2.3% @ 3.8 dB 0.4% @ 4.4 dB

2700 2.5% @ 5.0 dB 0.5% @ 5.6 dB

1500 1.7% @ 7.0 dB 0.4% @ 7.6 dB

Table A-17 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3



19200 9% @ 1.7 dB 1.7% @ 2.3 dB

38400 13% @ 1.4 dB 2.1% @ 2.0 dB

76800 14% @ 1.3 dB 2.4% @ 1.9 dB

153600 14% @ 1.3 dB 2.4% @ 1.9 dB

307200 14% @ 1.8 dB 2.0% @ 2.4 dB

Table A-18 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver in demodulation performance test under RC3



19200 20% @ 0.6 dB 0.9% @ 1.2 dB

38400 24% @ -0.1 dB 0.3% @ 0.5 dB

76800 30% @ -0.5 dB 0.2% @ 0.1 dB



A-9



153600 60% @ -0.9 dB 0.1% @ -0.3 dB

307200 90% @ -0.3 dB 0.1% @ 0.3 dB




14400 2.4% @ 0.8 dB 0.3% @ 1.4 dB

7200 2.4% @ 3.1 dB 0.4% @ 3.7 dB

3600 1.7% @ 4.6 dB 0.3% @ 5.2 dB

1800 1.6% @ 6.6 dB 0.5% @ 7.2 dB

Table A-20 Maximum FER of R-SCH receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4



28800 10% @ 1.7 dB 1.9% @ 2.3 dB

57600 12% @ 1.6 dB 1.7% @ 2.2 dB

115200 14% @ 1.6 dB 2.0% @ 2.2 dB

230400 12% @ 1.7 dB 1.7% @ 2.3 dB

Table A-21 Maximum FER of R-SCH (Turbo Code) receiver of demodulation performance test under RC4



28800 27% @ 0.7 dB 0.5% @ 1.3 dB

57600 28% @ 0.2 dB 0.2% @ 0.8 dB

115200 60% @ -0.2 dB 0.1% @ 0.4 dB

230400 33% @ -0.5 dB 0.1% @ 0.1 dB



A-10

II. R-TCH Performance in Multipath Fading without Closed-Loop Power Control

The performance of the demodulation of the Reverse Traffic Channel in a multipath fading environment is determined by the frame error rate (FER) at specified Eb/N0 value.

FER for four possible data rates should be calculated respectively. With 95% confidence, the FER for each data rate shall not exceed that given by linear interpolation on a Log10(FER) scale between the two values given in Table A-25 and Table A-26.

The test value of Eb/N0 assumes the average value of Eb/N0 in two RF input ports.

During the test, the reverse service channel Eb/N0 of each RF input port adopted is within the limits specified in Table A-24.

Table A-22 lists configurations of standard channel simulator.

Table A-23 lists the channel models of the R-TCH receiving performance test in multipath environment.

Table A-22 Standard channel simulator configuration

Standard channel

Simulator configuration

Speed Number of Paths

Path 2 power (corresponds

to path 1)

Path 3 power (corresponds

to path 1)

Deferring path 1 input



B 8 km/h 2 0dB N/A 0µs 2.0 µs N/A

C 25 km/h 1 N/A N/A 0µs N/A N/A

D 100 km/h 3 0dB -3dB 0µs 2.0 µs 14.5 µs

Table A-23 Channel models for the R-TCH receiving performance test

Case Channel Simulator configurations

B 2 (8 km/h, 2 paths)

C 3 (30 km/h, 1 path)

D 4 (100 km/h, 3 paths)

D2 4 (100 km/h, 3 paths)



A-11

Table A-24 Eb/N0 limits of R-TCH without closed-loop power control

Eb/N0 Limits (dB) Rate aggregation Condition

Lower limit Upper limit

B 11.1 11.7

C 11.2 11.8

D 8.8 9.4 RC1

D2 9.2 9.8

B 10.7 11.3

D 8.5 9.1 RC2

D2 8.9 9.5

Table A-25 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-FCH or R-DCCH receiver under RC1

FER limits (%) Case Data rate (bit/s)


9600 1.3 0.8

4800 1.4 0.9

2400 1.6 1.2 B

1200 1.3 0.9

9600 1.2 0.7

4800 1.4 0.9

2400 2.5 1.7 C

1200 2.0 1.4

9600 1.6 0.6

4800 2.6 1.2

2400 6.4 3.4 D

1200 5.6 3.5

9600 0.9 0.3

4800 1.6 0.7

2400 4.2 2.3 D2

1200 4.1 2.6



A-12




14400 1.3 0.8

7200 1.0 0.5

3600 0.7 0.4 B

1800 0.6 0.5

14400 1.7 0.6

7200 1.6 0.6

3600 1.5 0.9 D

1800 2.2 1.2

14400 0.9 0.3

7200 0.9 0.4

3600 1.1 0.6 D2

1800 1.5 0.9

III. Performance in Multipath Fading with Closed-Loop Power Control

The performance of the demodulation of the reverse traffic channel in a multipath fading environment is determined by the frame error rate (FER) at specified Eb/N0 value.

FER for four possible data rates needs to be calculated respectively. With 95% confidence, the FER for each data rate shall not exceed that given by linear interpolation on a log10 scale between the two values given in Table A-28 and Table A-35.

The test value of Eb/N0 assumes the average value of Eb/N0 tested on the two RF input ports.

Table A-27 Channel models for the R-TCH receiving performance test

Condition Number of Channel Simulator configurations

A 1 (3 km/h, 1 path)

B 2 (8 km/h, 2 paths)

C 3 (30 km/h, 1 path)

D 4 (100 km/h, 3 paths)



A-13

Table A-28 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-FCH receiver under RC1

FER limits (%) Condition Data rate (bit/s)


9600 2.8% @ 5.9 dB 0.3 @ 6.5 dB

4800 7.6 @ 5.9 dB 2.2 @ 6.5 dB

2400 23.0 @ 5.9 dB 12.0 @ 6.5 dB B

1200 22.0 @ 5.9 dB 14.0 @ 6.5 dB

9600 1.5 @ 7.1 dB 0.7 @ 7.7 dB

4800 8.0 @ 7.1 dB 4.8 @ 7.7 dB

2400 18.0 @ 7.1 dB 13.0 @ 7.7 dB C

1200 16.0 @ 7.1 dB 12.0 @ 7.7 dB

Table A-29 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-FCH receiver under RC2



14400 2.8 @ 5.2 dB 0.4 @ 5.8 dB

7200 4.7 @ 5.2 dB 1.3 @ 5.8 dB

3600 8.7 @ 5.2 dB 4.6 @ 5.8 dB B

1800 15.0 @ 5.2 dB 9.8 @ 5.8 dB

14400 1.3 @ 7.7 dB 0.7 @ 8.3 dB

7200 3.2 @ 7.7 dB 1.8 @ 8.3 dB

3600 4.7 @ 7.7 dB 3.5 @ 8.3 dB C

1800 5.2 @ 7.7 dB 3.9 @ 8.3 dB




9600 (20 ms) 2.4% @ 3.4 dB 0.5% @ 4.0 dB

4800 2.0% @ 4.4 dB 0.5% @ 5.0 dB

2700 1.8% @ 5.6 dB 0.5% @ 6.2 dB A

1500 1.8% @ 7.2 dB 0.6% @ 7.8 dB



A-14



9600 (20 ms) 2.0% @ 3.9 dB 0.5% @ 4.5 dB

4800 2.0% @ 4.9 dB 0.5% @ 5.5 dB

2700 1.8% @ 6.1 dB 0.5% @ 6.7 dB B

1500 1.7% @ 7.8 dB 0.5% @ 8.4 dB

9600 (20 ms) 1.5% @ 5.2 dB 0.6% @ 5.8 dB

4800 1.5% @ 6.1 dB 0.6% @ 6.7 dB

2700 1.4% @ 7.2 dB 0.6% @ 7.8 dB C

1500 1.4% @ 8.8 dB 0.6% @ 9.4 dB

9600 (20 ms) 2.0% @ 4.7 dB 0.5% @ 5.3 dB

4800 2.0% @ 5.7 dB 0.5% @ 6.3 dB

2700 1.8% @ 6.9 dB 0.5% @ 7.5 dB D

1500 1.7% @ 8.5 dB 0.5% @ 9.1 dB

Table A-31 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-SCH (turbo code) receiver under RC3



307200 10% @ 2.6 dB 2.0% @ 3.2 dB

153600 10% @ 2.6 dB 2.0% @ 3.2 dB

76800 10% @ 2.1 dB 2.4% @ 2.7 dB

38400 9.0% @ 2.4 dB 2.4% @ 3.0 dB

B

19200 9.0% @ 2.8 dB 2.5% @ 3.4 dB




307200 15% @ 0.8 dB 1.8% @ 1.4 dB

153600 12% @ 0.2 dB 2.0% @ 0.8 dB

76800 10% @ 0.7 dB 2.0% @ 1.3 dB

38400 10% @ 1.3 dB 2.0% @ 1.9 dB

B

19200 10% @ 2.1 dB 2.5% @ 2.7 dB



A-15




14400 2.2% @ 3.2 dB 0.4% @ 3.8 dB

7200 1.9% @ 3.9 dB 0.4% @ 4.5 dB

3600 1.9% @ 5.1 dB 0.5% @ 5.7 dB A

1800 1.8% @ 7.0 dB 0.5% @ 7.6 dB

14400 2.0% @ 3.8 dB 0.4% @ 4.4 dB

7200 2.0% @ 4.3 dB 0.5% @ 4.9 dB

3600 1.8% @ 5.6 dB 0.5% @ 6.2 dB B

1800 1.8% @ 7.5 dB 0.5% @ 8.1 dB

14400 1.6% @ 5.1 dB 0.6% @ 5.7 dB

7200 1.7% @ 5.6 dB 0.7% @ 6.2 dB

3600 1.5% @ 6.7 dB 0.6% @ 7.3 dB C

1800 1.6% @ 8.4 dB 0.7% @ 9 dB

14400 2.0% @ 4.6 dB 0.5% @ 5.2 dB

7200 2.0% @ 5.1 dB 0.5% @ 5.7 dB

3600 1.9% @ 6.3 dB 0.5% @ 6.9 dB D

1800 1.8% @ 8.1 dB 0.6% @ 8.7 dB

Table A-34 Maximum FER of demodulation performance test of R-SCH(turbo code) receiver under RC4



230400 10% @ 2.4 dB 1.4% @ 3.0 dB

115200 9.0% @ 2.5 dB 2.3% @ 3.1 dB

57600 9.0% @ 2.6 dB 2.2% @ 3.2 dB B

28800 7.5% @ 2.8 dB 2.5% @ 3.4 dB



A-16


FER limits (%) Case

Data rate

(bit/s) Lower limit Eb/N0 Upper limit Eb/N0

230400 10% @ 1.1 dB 2.0% @ 1.7 dB

115200 10% @ 1.0 dB 1.5% @ 1.7 dB

57600 11% @ 1.5 dB 1.8% @ 2.1 dB B

28800 10% @ 2.1 dB 2.0% @ 2.7 dB

A.2.4 Receiving Performance

I. Sensitivity

450 MHz band and 1900 MHz band

The R-TCH FER shall be less then 1.0% with 95% confidence when –126 dBm/1.23 MHz CDMA RC3 signal level is inputted at BTS RF main and diversity input ports.

800 MHz band

The R-TCH FER shall be less then 1.0% with 95% confidence when –127 dBm/1.23 MHz CDMA RC3 signal level is inputted at BTS RF main and diversity input ports.

II. Receiver Dynamic Range


The R-TCH FER shall be 1.0% or less with 95% confidence when –126 dBm/1.23 MHz to –65 dBm/1.23 MHz CDMA signal level is inputted at BTS RF main and diversity input ports.

800 MHz band

The R-TCH FER shall be 1.0% or less with 95% confidence when –127 dBm/1.23 MHz to –65 dBm/1.23 MHz CDMA signal level is inputted at BTS RF main and diversity input ports.

III. Single-Tone Desensitization

450 MHz band

Input the single-tone interference signal deviated from the center frequency at the BTS RF input port: when the single-tone interference signal deviates from the center frequency +900 kHz and -900 kHz, the input single-tone interference power is 87 dB higher than the output power of the mobile station simulator.



A-17

When R-TCH FER maintains less than 1.5%, the output power of mobile station simulator changes less than 3dB no matter whether there is single-tone interference signal or not.

800 MHz band

Input the single-tone interference deviated from the center frequency at the BTS RF input port:

When the single-tone interference deviates from the center frequency about +750 kHz and –750 kHz, the input single-tone interference power is 50 dB higher than the output power of the mobile station simulator.

When the single-tone interference deviates from the center frequency +900 kHz and –900 kHz, the input single-tone interference power is 87dB higher than the output power of the mobile station simulator.

When R-TCH FER maintains less than 1.5%, the output power of mobile station simulator changes less than 3 dB no matter whether there is single-tone interference signal or not.

1900 MHz band

Input the single-tone interference deviated from the center frequency at the BTS RF input port.

When the single-tone interference deviates from the center frequency +1.25 MHz and –1.25 MHz, the input single-tone interference power is 80dB higher than the output power of the mobile station simulator.

When R-TCH FER maintains less than 1.5%, the output power of mobile station simulator changes less than 3 dB no matter whether there is single-tone interference signal or not.

IV. Intermodulation Spurious Response Attenuation


Input two single-tone interference signals of center frequency at the BTS RF input port: both deviate from the center frequency +900 kHz and +1700 kHz respectively, and –900kHz and –1700 kHz respectively, the input single-tone interference power is 72dB higher than the output power of the mobile station simulator.

When R-TCH FER keeps less than 1.5%, the output power of the mobile station simulator changes less than 3 dB whether there are two single-tone interference signals or no interference signal.

1900 MHz band



A-18

Input two single-tone interference signals of center frequency at the BTS RF input port: both deviate from the center frequency +1.25 MHz and +2.05 MHz respectively, and –1.25 MHz and –2.05 MHz respectively.

When R-TCH FER keeps less than 1.5%, the output power of the mobile station simulator changes less than 3 dB whether there are two single-tone interference signals or no interference signal.

V. Adjacent Channel Selectivity

The output power of the mobile station simulator shall increase by no more than 3 dB and the FER shall be less than 1.5% with 95% confidence.

A.2.5 Limitations on Emissions

I. Conducted Spurious Emissions

At BTS RF input port, the conducted spurious emissions within the BTS receiving frequency range is less than –80dBm/30kHz.

At BTS RF input port, the conducted spurious emissions within the transmitting frequency range is less than –60dBm/30kHz.

At BTS RF input port, the conducted spurious emissions within other frequency range of 0 to 6 GHz is less than –47dBm/30kHz.

II. Radiated Spurious Emissions

The performance is in compliant with local radio specifications.

A.2.6 Received Signal Quality Indicator (RSQI)

The RSQI is defined as the signal-to-noise ratio Eb/N0, where Eb is the energy per bit including the pilot and power control overhead and N0 is the total received noise-pulse-interference power in the CDMA bandwidth including the interference from other subscribers.

Table A-36 lists the RSQI report values of the BTS.

Table A-36 RSQI range

Eb/N0 (dB) per input port Minimum acceptable report value

Maximum acceptable report value

4 10 18

5 12 20



A-19

Eb/N0 (dB) per input port Minimum acceptable report value

Maximum acceptable report value

6 14 22

7 16 24

8 18 26

9 20 28

10 22 30

11 24 32

12 26 34

13 28 36

14 30 38

A.3 Performance of Transmitter

A.3.1 Frequency Requirements

I. Frequency Coverage

450 MHz band: 460 MHz – 470 MHz 800 MHz band: 869 MHz – 894 MHz 1900 MHz band: 1930 MHz – 1990 MHz

II. Frequency Tolerance

Within the working temperature range, the average difference between the actual carrier frequency of CDMA transmit sector and the carrier frequency of the dedicated transmit sector is less than !5%10-8(!0.05ppm) of the designated frequency.

A.3.2 Modulation Requirements

I. Synchronization and Timing

Time tolerance for pilot frequency: The pilot time alignment error should be less than 3 µs and shall be less than 10 µs. For BTSs supporting multiple simultaneous CDMA Channels, the pilot time tolerance of all CDMA Channels radiated by a BTS shall be within ±1 µs of each other.



A-20

Time tolerance of pilot channel and other code-division channels: in the same CDMA channel, time error between the pilot channel and other forwarding code-division channels is less than !50ns.

The phase differences between the Pilot Channel and all other code channels sharing the same Forward CDMA Channel should not exceed 0.05 radians and shall not exceed 0.15 radians.

II. Waveform Quality

The normalized cross correlation coefficient, ρ, shall be greater than 0.912 (excess power < 0.4 dB).

A.3.3 RF Output Power

I. Total Power

Total power is the mean power delivered to a load with resistance equal to the nominal load impedance of the transmitter. The total power of this system is +43dBm (20W), the deviation in all kinds of environmental conditions must range between +2dB and –4dB.

II. Pilot Power

The Pilot Channel power to total power ratio shall be within ±0.5 dB of the configured value.

III. Code Domain Power

For RC1and RC2, the code domain power in each inactive Wn64 channel shall be 27 dB

or more below the total output power.

For RC3 and RC4, the code domain power in each inactive Wn128 channel shall be 30

dB or more below the total output power.

For RC1 and RC2, the code domain power in each inactive Wn256 channel shall be 33

dB or more below the total output power of each carrier.

A.3.4 Limitations on Emissions

I. Conducted Spurious Emissions

The requirements on Conducted Spurious Emissions vary with frequency bands, as shown in Table A-37 and Table A-38. Local radio requirements should also be observed.



A-21

Table A-37 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (450 MHz band and 800 MHz band)

Offset from carrier central frequency Spurious requirement

750 kHz – 1.98 MHz –45 dBc/30 kHz

1.98 MHz – 4.00 MHz

–60 dBc/30 kHz; Pout ≥ 33 dBm

–27 dBm/30 kHz; 28 dBm ≤ Pout < 33 dBm

–55 dBc/30 kHz; Pout < 28 dBm

> 4.00 MHz (ITU Class A Requirement)

–13 dBm/1 kHz; –13 dBm/10 kHz; –13 dBm/100 kHz; –13 dBm/1 MHz;

9 kHz < f < 150 kHz 150 kHz < f < 30 MHz 30 MHz < f < 1 GHz 1 GHz < f < 5 GHz

> 4.00 MHz (ITU Class B Requirement)


9 kHz < f < 150 kHz 150 kHz < f < 30 MHz 30 MHz < f < 1 GHz 1 GHz < f < 12.5 GHz

Table A-38 Conducted Spurious Emissions Performance (1900 MHz band)

Offset from carrier central frequency Spurious requirement

885 kHz – 1.25 MHz –45 dBc/30 kHz

1.25 MHz – 1.98 MHz

–60 dBc/30 kHz; Pout ≥ 33 dBm

–27 dBm/30 kHz; 28 dBm ≤ Pout < 33 dBm

–55 dBc/30 kHz; Pout < 28 dBm

1.98 MHz – 2.25 MHz

–55 dBc/30 kHz, Pout ú 33 dBm

–22 dBm/30 kHz, 28 dBm ≤ Pout < 33 dBm

–50 dBc/30 kHz, Pout < 28 dBm

2.25 MHz – 4.00 MHz –13 dBm/1 MHz

> 4.00 MHz (ITU Class A Requirement)


9 kHz < f < 150 kHz 150 kHz < f < 30 MHz 30 MHz < f < 1 GHz 1 GHz < f < 5 GHz

II. Radiated Spurious Emissions

The performance complies with local radio specifications.


System PincipleAppendix B EMC Performance

B-1

Appendix B EMC Performance

ETSI EN 300 386 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network Equipment; ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Requirements are the international EMC standards.

The EMC performance of BTS complies with ETSI EN 300 386 V1.2.1 (2000-03). They are described in two aspects: ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) and ElectroMagnetic Sensitivity (EMS).

B.1 EMI Performance

I. Conductive Emission (CE) at DC Input/Output Port

CE indices are listed in Table B-1.

Table B-1 CE indices at -48V port

Threshold (dB µV) Frequency range (MHz)

Average Quasi-peak

0.15 – 0.5

0.5 – 5

5 – 30

56 – 46

46

50

66 – 56

56

60

II. Radiated Emission (RE)

RE indices are listed in Table B-2.

Table B-2 RE indices

Band (MHz) Threshold of quasi-peak (dB µV/m)

30 – 1000 61.5

1000 – 12700 67.5

Note:

Test field is arranged according to ITU-R 329-7 [1].



B-2

B.2 EMS Performance

I. RF EM Field Immunity (80 MHz – 1000MHz)

RF EM field immunity indices are listed in Table B-3.

Table B-3 RF EM field immunity indices

Port Level Performance class

Whole cabinet 3V/m A

Note:

Test method complies with IEC1000-4-3 [9].

II. Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions Immunity

Among all test items of EMS, the requirement for continuous interference immunity is class A and the requirement for transient interference immunity is class B. Requirements for voltage dips and short interruptions is shown in Table B-4.

Table B-4 Voltage dips and short interruptions indices

Port Test level Performance class

Dip 30% Duration: 10ms A

Dip: 60% Duration: 100ms

With backup power: A With no backup power: The communication link need not be maintained. It can be re-created and the subscriber data can be lost. AC port

Dip: over95% Duration: 5000ms

With backup power: A With no backup power: The communication link need not be maintained. It can be re-created and the subscriber data can be lost.

Note:




B-3

III. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Immunity

ESD immunity indices are shown in Table B-5.

Table B-5 ESD immunity indices

Discharge mode Level Performance class

Contact 2kV, 4kV B

Air 2kV, 4kV, 8kV B

Note:

Test method complies with IEC 61000-4-2 [5]. In addition to the protection measures specified in the user's documents, ESD measures should be taken to all exposed surface of equipment to be tested.

IV. RF Induced Currents

In CDMA equipment, the port where a cable of more than 1 meter may be connected to, including control port, DC input/output port and the input/output port of the connection line when cabinets are combined, should satisfy the requirements for RF induced currents. The indices are shown in Table B-6.

Table B-6 Induced currents indices

Port Voltage level Performance class

DC line port

AC line port

Signal line port and control line port

3V A

Note:


V. Surge Immunity

For CDMA equipment, the DC power input port, indoor signal line of more than 3 m, control line (such as E1 trunk line, serial port line) and the cable that may be led out to



B-4

the outdoor should all satisfy the requirements for surge immunity. The indices are shown in Table B-7.

Table B-7 Surge immunity indices


AC port Line – line, 2kV

Line – ground, 4kV B

Control line, signal line Line – line, 0.5kV


Control line, signal line (outdoors) Line – line, 1kV


Note:

The test method complies with IEC61000-4-5 [11].

VI. Common-Mode Fast Transient Pulse Immunity

The signal & data line between CDMA cabinets and that connected with other systems (such as E1 trunk line), control line and cable connected to DC input/output port, should satisfy the requirements for fast transient pulse immunity. The indices are shown in Table B-8.

Table B-8 Common-mode fast transient pulse immunity indices


Signal control line port 0.5kV B

DC line input/output port 1kV B

AC line input port 2kV B



B-5

Note:

Performance class A: BTS can withstand the test without any damage and it can run normally in the specified range. There is not any change in the software or data (all data in the storage or the data being processed) related to the tested switching equipment. Equipment performance is not lowered. Performance class B: BTS can withstand the test without any damage. There is no change in the software or the data in storage. Communication performance is lowered a little, but in the tolerance (as defined for different products). The existing communication link is not interrupted. After the test, the equipment can recover to the normal status before the test automatically without any interference of the operator. Performance class C: Some functions of BTS are lost temporarily during the test, but they will recover to normal performance in a specific period after the test (normally the shortest time needed for system reboot). There is no physical damage or system software deterioration. Performance class R: After the test, there is no physical damage or fault (including software corruption) with BTS. Protection equipment damage caused by external interference signal is acceptable. When the protection equipment is replaced and the running parameters are re-configured, the equipment can operate normally.


System PincipleAppendix C Environment Requirements

C-1

Appendix C Environment Requirements

The environment requirements of BTS involve storage, transportation, and operation environments. These requirements are specified based on the following standards:

ETS 300019 Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment

IEC 60721 Classification of environmental conditions

C.1 Storage Environment

I. Climate Environment

Table C-1 lists the requirements for climate environment.

Table C-1 Requirements for climate environment

Item Range

Altitude ñ5000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature –40°C to +70°C

Temperature change rate ñ1°C/min


Solar radiation ñ1120 W/s²

Thermal radiation ñ600 W/s²

Wind speed ñ30 m/s

Rain Drippings

II. Biotic Environment

No microorganism like fungal or mould multiplied around or inside. Free from the attack of rodential animals (such as rats).

III. Air Cleanness

No explosive, electrically/magnetically conductive, or corrosive particles around. The density of physically active substances shall meet the requirements listed in

Table C-2.



C-2

Table C-2 Requirements for the density of physically active substances

Substance Unit Density

Suspending dust mg/m³ ñ5.00

Falling dust mg/m²·h ñ20.0

Sands mg/m³ ñ300

Note:

Suspending dust: diameter ñ75 3m

Falling dust: 75 3mñdiameterñ150 3m

Sands: 150 3mñdiameterñ1,000 3m

The density of chemically active substances must meet the requirements listed in Table C-3.

Table C-3 Requirements for the density of chemically active substances


SO2 mg/m³ ñ0.30

H2S mg/m³ ñ0.10

NO2 mg/m³ ñ0.50

NH3 mg/m³ ñ1.00

Cl2 mg/m³ ñ0.10

HCl mg/m³ ñ0.10

HF mg/m³ ñ0.01

O3 mg/m³ ñ0.05

IV. Mechanical Stress

Table C-4 lists the requirements for mechanical stress.

Table C-4 Requirements for mechanical stress

Item Sub-item Range

Displacement ñ7.0 mm –

Acceleration – ñ20.0 m/s² Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range 2 Hz – 9 Hz 9 Hz – 200 Hz



C-3

Item Sub-item Range

Impact response spectrum II ñ250 m/s² Unsteady impact

Static load capability ñ5 kPa

Note:

Impact response spectrum: The max. acceleration response curve generated by the equipment under the specified impact excitation. Impact response spectrum II refers to the semi sinusoidal impact response spectrum whose duration is 6ms.

Static load capability: The capability of the equipment in package to bear the pressure from the top in normal pile-up method.

C.2 Transportation Environment



Table C-5 Requirements for climate environment

Item Range

Altitude ñ5,000 m


Temperature –40°C to +70°C

Temperature change rate ñ3°C/min


Solar radiation ñ1,120 W/s²

Thermal radiation ñ600 W/s²

Wind speed ñ30 m/s



III. Air Cleanness


Table C-6.



C-4



Suspending dust mg/m³ No requirement

Falling dust mg/m²·h ñ3.0

Sands mg/m³ ñ100

Note:




The density of chemically active substances shall meet the requirements listed in Table C-7.



SO2 mg/m³ ñ0.30

H2S mg/m³ ñ0.10

NO2 mg/m³ ñ0.50

NH3 mg/m³ ñ1.00

Cl2 mg/m³ ñ0.10

HCl mg/m³ ñ0.10

HF mg/m³ ñ0.01

O3 mg/m³ ñ0.05




Item Sub-item Range

Displacement ñ7.5 mm – –

Acceleration – ñ20.0 m/s² ñ40.0 m/s² Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range 2 Hz – 9 Hz 9 Hz – 200 Hz 200 Hz – 500 Hz

Acceleration spectrum density 10 m²/s³ 3 m²/s³ 1 m²/s³ Random vibration Frequency range 2 Hz – 9 Hz 9 Hz – 200 Hz 200 Hz – 500 Hz



C-5

Item Sub-item Range

Impact response spectrum II ñ300 m/s² Unsteady impact Static load capability ñ10 kPa

Note:



C.3 Operation Environment



Table C-9 Temperature and humidity requirements

Temperature Product

Long-term Short-term Relative humidity

BTS –40°C to +55°C –40°C to +45°C 5% to 100%

Note:

The measurement point of temperature and humidity is 2 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment, when there are no protective panels in front of or behind the cabinet.

Table C-10 Other climate environment requirements

Item Range

Altitude ñ4000 m


Temperature change rate ñ5 Celsius degree/min

Solar radiation ñ1120 W/m²

Rain ñ12.5 L/min±0.625 L/min (IPX5)

Wind speed ñ50 m/s



C-6



III. Air Cleanness


Table C-11.



Suspending dust mg/m³ ñ5

Falling dust mg/m²·h ñ20

Sands mg/m³ ñ300

Note:




The density of chemically active substances shall meet the requirements listed in Table C-12.



SO2 mg/m³ ñ0.30

H2S mg/m³ ñ0.10

NH3 mg/m³ ñ1.00

Cl2 mg/m³ ñ0.10

HCl mg/m³ ñ0.10

HF mg/m³ ñ0.01

O3 mg/m³ ñ0.05

NO2 mg/m³ ñ0.5



C-7




Item Sub-item Range

Displacement ñ3.5 mm –

Acceleration – ñ10.0m/s² Sinusoidal vibration

Frequency range 2 Hz – 9 Hz 9 Hz – 200 Hz

Impact response spectrum II ñ100 m/s²

Unsteady impact Static load capability 0

Note:




System PincipleAppendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms

D-1

Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms

D.1 Component

B

BBFL BTS BTRM FAN Lamp Module

BBKM Baseband Backplane Module

BCIM BTS Control Interface Module

BCKM BTS Control and Clock Module

BDCS BTS Direct Current Switchbox

BESP BTS E1 Surge Protector

BPLI Base station Power and Lighting protection lamp Indicator board

C

CCPM Compact-BTS Channel Process Module

CDDU Compact-BTS Dual Duplexer Unit

CECM Compact-BTS EVDO Channel Module

CFAN Compact-BTS FAN Module

CFIB Compact-BTS Fan Block Interface Board

CFMM Compact-BTS Fan Monitor Module

CHPA Compact-BTS High Power Amplifier Unit

CIFM Compact-BTS Intermediate Frequency Module

CMCB Compact-BTS Monitor Control Board

CPBM Compact-BTS Power Backplane Module

CRCM Compact-BTS Radio Up-Down Converter Module

CRFM Compact-BTS RF Fan Module

CSLM Compact-BTS Serial port Lightningproof Module

CTBM Compact-BTS Transceiver Backplane Module

CTRM Compact-BTS Transceiver Module

H

HPAU High Power Amplifier Unit

HPCM BTS High Precision Clock Module

M



D-2

MTRM Micro-BTS Transceiver Module

P

PIB Power Inspecting Board

PSU Power Supply Unit

D.2 Terminology

A

A Availability

A1/A2/A5

A3/A7

A8/A9

A10/A11


AAL2 ATM Adaptation Layer 2


Abis

AC Authentication Center

ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Radio

A/D Analog/Digit

ADC Analog Digit Converter

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ARQ Automatic Repeat Request


AUC Authentication

B


BPF Band-Pass Filter

BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying

BS Base Station






D-3

C

CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee


CEs Channel Elements

CLI Command Line Interpreter

CLK Clock

CM Connection Management

CN Core Network

CTC Common Transmit Clock

D

D/A Digit/Analog

DAC Digit Analog Converter

DAGC Digit Automatic Gain Control

DC Direct Current

DCE Data Communications Equipment

E

EIA Electronics Industry Association

EIB Erasure Indicator Bit

EIR Equipment Identity Register

EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility

EMI Electro Magnetic Interference

F

FA Foreign Agent

F-APICH Forward Assistant Pilot Channel

F-ATDPICH Forward Transmit Diversity Assistant Pilot Channel

F-BCH Forward Broadcast Channel

FCACH Forward Common Assignment Channel


F-CPCCH Forward Common Power Control Channel


FER Frame Error Rate






D-4



F-SCCH Forward Supplemental Code Channel


F-SYNCH Forward Sync Channel

F-TCH Forward Traffic Channel

F-TDPICH Forward Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G


GMSC Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre


GRIL GPS/GLONASS Receiver Interface Language

GUI Graphics User Interface

H

HA Home Agent

HDLC High level Data Link Control

HLR Home Location Register

HPAU High Power Amplifier Unit

HPBW Half Power Beam Width

HPSK Hybrid Phase Shift Keying

I

ICP IMA Control Protocol

ID Identity

IF Intermediate Frequency

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

IP Internet Protocol

IPOA IP over ATM


ITC Independent Transmit Clock

ITU International Telecommunications Union

ITU-T ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector

IWF InterWorking Function

J



D-5

JTAG Joint Test Action Group

L

LAC Link Access Control

LMF Local Maintenance Function

LNA Low-Noise Amplifier

LPF Low-Pass Filter

M

MAC Medium Access Control


Modem Modulator-Demodulator

MPU Micro Process Unit

MS Mobile Station


MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time To Repair

N

NID Network Identification

O

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OCXO Oven voltage Control Oscillator

OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer

OMC Operation and Maintenance Center

OML Operation and Maintenance Link

OMU Operation and Maintenance Unit

OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

OTD Orthogonal Transmit Diversity

P



PGND Protection Ground


PN Pseudo Noise

PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network




D-6

PVC Permanent Virtual Channel

PVP Permanent Virtual Path

PWM Pulse-Width Modulation

Q

QIB Quality Identification Bit



R



R-CCCH Reverse Common Control Channel



RF Radio Frequency


RLP Radio Link Protocol

RM Radio Management

R-PICH Reverse Pilot Channel

R-SCCH Reverse Supplemental Code Channel


RSQI Receive Signal Quality Indicator

R-TCH Reverse Traffic Channel

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDU Selection/Distribution Unit

SID System Identification

SME Signaling Message Encryption

SPU Signaling Process Unit

SRBP Signaling Radio Burst Protocol

SSSAR Special Service Segmentation and Reassemble

STM-1 Synchronization Transfer Mode 1

STS Space Time Spreading

T

TA Timing Advance



D-7

TA Terminal Adapter

TAm Mobile Terminal Adapter

TCP Transport Control Protocol

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access

TE Terminal Equipment 1

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

TMA Tower Mounted Amplifier

TMSI Temp Mobile Subscriber Identifier

TRX Transceiver

U

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter


Um

UTC Universal Coordinated Time

V

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

VLR Visitor Location Register

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

HUAWEI




Interface Protocols and Service FlowsTable of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Interface Protocols ...................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Introduction to BTS3606 External Interfaces..................................................................... 1-1 1.2 CDMA2000 1X Um Interface ............................................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 Physical Layer ......................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.2 Data Link Layer ....................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um Interface .................................................................................. 1-7 1.3.1 Physical Layer ......................................................................................................... 1-9 1.3.2 MAC Layer .............................................................................................................. 1-9

1.4 Abis Interface................................................................................................................... 1-12 1.4.1 Physical Layer ....................................................................................................... 1-14 1.4.2 Data Link Layer ..................................................................................................... 1-14 1.4.3 Layer 3 .................................................................................................................. 1-15

Chapter 2 Call Processing............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 MS Call Processing ........................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 MS Initialization State.............................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.2 MS Idle State........................................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.3 System Access State .............................................................................................. 2-7 2.1.4 MS Control on the Traffic Channel State ................................................................ 2-9 2.1.5 Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-10 2.1.6 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 2-11

2.2 BTS Call Processing........................................................................................................ 2-13 2.2.1 Pilot and Sync Channel Processing...................................................................... 2-13 2.2.2 Paging Channel and Quick Paging Channel Processing...................................... 2-14 2.2.3 Access Channel Processing ................................................................................. 2-15 2.2.4 Traffic Channel Processing ................................................................................... 2-16 2.2.5 Registration ........................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.6 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 2-19

Chapter 3 Service Flows............................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 CDMA2000 1X Service Flows ........................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Voice Service .......................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.2 Handoff.................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.1.3 SMS Delivery......................................................................................................... 3-13 3.1.4 Packet Data Service.............................................................................................. 3-16

3.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Service Flows............................................................................... 3-19 3.2.1 Service Flows........................................................................................................ 3-20 3.2.2 Handoff.................................................................................................................. 3-25


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsTable of Contents

ii

Appendix A Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................................................................A-1


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsList of Figures

iii

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 BTS external interfaces ........................................................................................ 1-2

Figure 1-2 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface .............................................. 1-3

Figure 1-3 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um interface.................................... 1-7

Figure 1-4 Composition of the Abis interface....................................................................... 1-13

Figure 1-5 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis signaling and OML signaling) ........... 1-13

Figure 1-6 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis traffic) ................................................ 1-14

Figure 2-1 MS call processing states..................................................................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2 MS initialization state............................................................................................ 2-3

Figure 3-2 Mobile originated call............................................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3-3 Mobile terminated call........................................................................................... 3-4

Figure 3-4 Mobile initiated release......................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-5 BTS initiated release ............................................................................................ 3-7

Figure 3-6 Release initiated by BSC/MSC............................................................................. 3-8

Figure 3-7 Intra-BTS soft/softer handoff add ......................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3-8 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff add ....................................................................... 3-10

Figure 3-9 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff drop ...................................................................... 3-11

Figure 3-10 Inter-BTS hard handoff ..................................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3-11 SMS-MO delivery on the access channel......................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-12 SMS-MT delivery on the paging channel ......................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-13 SMS-MO delivery on the traffic channel........................................................... 3-15

Figure 3-14 SMS-MT delivery on the traffic channel............................................................ 3-15

Figure 3-15 Mobile originated packet data service .............................................................. 3-17

Figure 3-16 Reverse SCH setup procedure ........................................................................ 3-19

Figure 3-17 AT initiated connection setup procedure........................................................... 3-20

Figure 3-18 AN initiated connection re-activation procedure............................................... 3-22

Figure 3-19 AT initiated connection release procedure ....................................................... 3-23

Figure 3-20 AN initiated connection release procedure....................................................... 3-25

Figure 3-21 Handoff add procedure..................................................................................... 3-26

Figure 3-22 Handoff drop procedure.................................................................................... 3-27


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsList of Tables

iv

List of Tables

Table 1-1 Major serving bands ............................................................................................... 1-4

Table 1-2 Length and quantity of the packet carried by each channel................................... 1-9

Table 3-1 Service flows .......................................................................................................... 3-1


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsChapter 1 Interface Protocols

1-1

Chapter 1 Interface Protocols

This chapter introduces the Um interface protocol and Abis interface protocol of the CDMA base station (BTS) based on the following references:

TIA/EIA/ IS-2000-2 Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems

TIA/EIA/ IS-2000-3 Medium Access Control (MAC) Sublayer for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems

3GPP2 C.S0024 cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification 3GPP2 A.R0003: Abis interface technical report for CDMA 1X Spread Spectrum

System Huawei self-defined protocol: CDMA Abis Interface Upper Layer Protocol

The Um interface protocol for the CDMA2000 1X system differs a lot from that for the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system. The Abis interface protocols of these two systems can find their major difference in Layer 3.

1.1 Introduction to BTS3606 External Interfaces Figure 1-1 shows major external interfaces of the BTS3606.



1-2

MS: Mobile station AT: Access terminal BTS: Base transceiver station BSC: Base station controller LMF: Local maintenance function OML: Operation and maintenance link OMC: Operation and maintenance center

Figure 1-1 BTS external interfaces

The following describes the external interfaces of the BTS3606:

Um interface: Interface between BTS and MS. Abis interface: The interface between BTS and BSC. OML interface: The interface between BTS and OMC. It shares the transmission

resource with the Abis interface. LMF interface: The interface between BTS and LMF. System synchronization interface: It includes GPS/GLONASS antenna interface

and system external synchronization interface. When the GPS/GLONASS is unavailable and there is other clock synchronization equipment, the clock synchronization output of the equipment can be connected with the external synchronization interface of the BTS.

BTS test interface: The interface used for testing signals such as 10 MHz and 2s signals.

Environment alarm interface: The interface between BTS and environment alarm chest (EAC). (Applicable to indoor BTSs only)

1.2 CDMA2000 1X Um Interface In the public land mobile network (PLMN), the MS connects to the BTS through the radio channel to access the network and receive telecommunication services.



1-3

To realize interconnection between different MSs and base station subsystems (BSSs), standards must be developed for signal transmission on radio channels. These standards are called radio interface (or CDMA2000 1X Um interface) standards.

The CDMA2000 1X Um interface is one of the most important interfaces in the CDMA system. The standard Um interface ensures full compatibility of MSs provided by different manufacturers with different networks, which is fundamental in realizing the roaming function of the CDMA system. The Um interface also determines the spectrum efficiency and capacity of the CDMA system.

The CDMA2000 1X Um interface is defined by the following factors:

Channels structure and access capability MS-BSS communication protocol Maintenance and operation features Performance features Service features

The protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface is divided into three layers. Figure 1-2 shows the structure of the protocol stack.

Physical Layer

Multiplexing and QoS Delivery

MACControlStates RLP

MACSublayer

LAC LAC Protocol Null LAC

SignalingServices

Packet DataApplication

VoiceServices

Circuit DataApplication

High SpeedCircuit NetworkLayer Services

IP

UDP

PPP

TCP

Figure 1-2 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface

The following describes the protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface:

Layer 1

Layer 1 is the physical layer and also the lower layer. It includes various physical channels, providing basic radio channels for information transmission of the upper layer.



1-4

Layer 2

Layer 2 is the data link layer. It includes medium access control (MAC) sub-layer and link access control (LAC) sub-layer.

The MAC sub-layer implements mapping between logical channels and physical channels, and provides the radio link protocol (RLP) function.

The LAC sub-layer implements such functions as authentication, automatic repeat request (ARQ), addressing, and segmentation and reassembly (SAR).

Layer 3

Layer 3 is the upper layer. It provides signaling service, voice service, packet data application, and circuit data application. It also implements radio resource management, mobility management, and connection management through the signaling service.

The physical layer and MAC sub-layer are closely related to the BTS and thus are detailed in this section.

1.2.1 Physical Layer

This section introduces the serving band, functions, radio configuration (RC), and channels supported by the physical layer.

I. Serving Band

Table 1-1 lists the major serving bands of the physical layer. For detailed introduction to the band class, see Appendix A, “Performance of Receiver and Transmitter” in “System Principle”.

Table 1-1 Major serving bands

Band Forward band Reverse band Duplex spacing

Channel bandwidth

Carrier spacing

450 MHz 460 MHz – 470 MHz 450 MHz – 460 MHz 10 MHz 1.23 MHz 1.25 MHz



II. FunctionsThe physical layer provides the following functions:

Service bearer

Physical channels on the physical layer act as bearer for logical channels on the upper layer.

Bit error check

The physical layer provides transmission service with error protection, including error detection and error correction.



1-5

User identification

The physical layer provides an exclusive ID for every user by code division.

III. Radio Configuration and Supported Channels

The CDMA2000 1X physical layer supports several RCs. Each RC can support different data rates on the traffic channel. For details about RCs and physical channel configuration, see Chapter 4, “Main Functions” in “System Description”.

1.2.2 Data Link Layer

The data link layer includes the MAC sub-layer and LAC sub-layer. Introduction of these two sub-layers to the data link layer aims to:

Support more upper-layer services, such as signaling, voice, packet data, and circuit data services.

Support data services at different rates. Support packet data service and circuit data service with higher quality of service

(QoS). Support multi-media service, that is, process concurrently the voice, packet data,

and circuit data with different QoS requirements.

I. MAC Sub-Layer

The CDMA2000 1X provides powerful MAC layer to support the data service and multi-media service and ensure the reliability of services. The MAC layer provides:

RLP to ensure reliable transmission of radio links.

The MAC layer supports a wide range of upper layer services, and provides high efficiency and low latency for data services operating over a wide performance range (1.2 kbps to 2 Mbps).

The multiplexing function and QoS control to enrich service types and improve service quality.

The MAC layer enforces negotiated QoS levels by mediating conflicting requests from competing services and the appropriate prioritization of access requests. It supports advanced QoS delivery of circuit and packet data services, such as limitations on acceptable delay and bit error rate (BER). The MAC layer also supports concurrent multiplexing of voice, packet data, and circuit data services - each with varying QoS requirements.

II. LAC Sub-Layer

The LAC sub-layer implements such functions as ARQ, authentication, and addressing. The following introduces the functions of the LAC sub-layer on the dedicated channel and classification of logical channels.

Functions of the LAC sub-layer on the dedicated channel



1-6

--Deliver service data units (SDUs) to the Layer 3 peer entity using ARQ techniques, when needed, to provide reliability.

--Build and validate protocol data units (PDUs), appropriate for carrying the SDUs.

--Segment encapsulated PDUs into LAC PDU fragments of sizes suitable for transfer by the MAC sub-layer.

--Re-assemble LAC PDU fragments into encapsulated PDUs.

--Perform access control through authentication. Some messages failing authentication on a common channel should not be delivered to the upper layers for processing.

--Perform address control to ensure delivery of PDUs based upon addresses which identify particular mobile stations.

Logical Channels

Layer 3 and LAC sub-layer send and receive signaling, data, and voice information on the logical channels.

The CDMA2000 1X system uses the following logical channels to carry the information.

--Forward/reverse common signaling channel (F-CSCH/R-CSCH): A point to multipoint logical channel that carries upper layer signaling traffic over a common physical channel.

--Forward/reverse dedicated signaling channel (F-CSCH/R-CSCH): A point-to-point logical channel that carries upper layer signaling traffic over a dedicated physical channel.

--Forward/reverse dedicated traffic channel (F-DTCH/R-DTCH): A point-to-point logical channel that carries data or voice traffic over a dedicated physical channel.

--Logical channels are classified by the following criteria:

--Number of destinations for the message sent: One or several.

--Type of the information sent: Signaling or user data.

--Direction of data transmission: forward, reverse, or others.

Logical channels are defined according to their functions:

--Synchronization

--Broadcast

--General signaling, including paging.

--Access

--Dedicated signaling

One logical channel can be configured with multiple logical channels of the same type.



1-7

As the traffic on the logical channel is sent over one or multiple physical channels, correspondence between the logical channel and physical channel must be set up. This correspondence is also called mapping.

One logical channel may permanently occupy a physical channel, for example, the synchronization channel; or temporarily occupy a physical channel, for example, the consecutive R-CSCH access probe sequence can be sent over different physical access channels, or share one physical channel with other logical channels when the multiplexing function is available.

1.3 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um Interface In the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO network, to realize the interconnection between the access terminal (AT) and the access network (AN), a set of Um interface specifications are defined for the transmission of signals on the Um channels.

The protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um interface is divided into seven layers. Figure 1-3 shows the structure of the protocol stack.

Physical LayerProtocol

Control ChanelMAC Protocol

Forward TrafficChanel MAC

Protocol

Access ChanelMAC Protocol

Reverse TrafficChanel MAC

ProtocolMAC Layer

SecurityProtocol

PacketConsolidation

Protocol

Air LinkManagement

Protocol

Key ExchangeProtocol

AuthenticationProtocol

EncryptionProtocol

InitializationState Protocol

Idle StateProtocol

Connected StateProtocol

Route UpdateProtocol

OverheadMessagesProtocol

SessionManagement

Protocol

AddressManagement

Protocol

SessionConfiguration

Protocol

StreamProtocol

StreamProtocol

StreamProtocol

StreamProtocol Stream Protocol

Stream Protocol

PhysicalLayer

SecurityLayer

ConnectionLayer

SessionLayer

StreamLayer

ApplicationLayer

Defaultsignaling

Application

DefaultPacket

Application

Figure 1-3 Protocol stack of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um interface

The following introduces each layer of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Um interface protocol stack:

Physical layer



1-8

The physical layer is a lower layer associated with the physical media-based transfer of message flows.

The physical layer specifications include frequency, power output, channel structure, encoding, and modulation.

MAC layer

The MAC layer provides rules that govern the transmit and receive functions over the physical layer. There are MAC layer protocols respectively for the control channel, access channel, forward channel, and reverse channel.

Security layer

The security layer provides the following functions: Key exchange, used by the AN and the AT to exchange security keys for authentication and encryption. Authentication, used by the AN and the AT to authenticate the traffic. Encryption, used by the AN and the AT to encrypt the traffic.

The security protocol provides cryptosync needed by the authentication and encryption protocols.

Connection layer

The connection layer provides air links to set up connections and maintain service, and meanwhile prioritizes traffic transmitted over the air link. Except the overhead messages protocol, each of connection layer protocols can be negotiated independently at the beginning of the session.

Session layer

The session layer protocols include protocols used for the session negotiation between the AT and the AN. A session is a shared state between the AT and the AN.

Stream layer

The stream layer provides the following functions: The stream layer provides a mechanism to tag application layer packets by adding a stream identifier. The connection layer's packet consolidation protocol uses tags to prioritize signaling and user traffic. Both the user and the signaling traffic are tagged. Applications with different QoS requirements can be assigned separate streams.

Application layer

The application layer provides the default signaling application used for the transmission of 1xEV-DO protocol messages and the default packet application used for the transmission of user data. The signaling application includes signaling network protocol and signaling link protocol. The packet application includes flow control protocol, radio link protocol, and location update protocol.

Regarding the close relationship with the BTS, this section introduces the physical layer and MAC layer in details.



1-9


This section introduces the serving band, functions, channels supported, and data packet of the physical layer.

I. Serving Band

The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system shares the same band with the CDMA2000 1X system. For details, see section 1.2.1 I. Serving Band.

II. Functions

The physical layer is concerned with the transmission of unstructured bit streams over the physical medium. It provides basic radio channels for the transmission of upper level messages.

Functions of the physical layer of the 1xEV-DO Um interface are similar to those of the CDMA2000 1X Um interface. For details, see section 1.2.1 II. Functions.

III. Channels Supported

For channels supported by the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system, see Chapter 4, “Main Functions” in “System Description”.

IV. Data Packet

The transmission unit of the physical layer is a physical layer packet, which can be 256 bits, 512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits, or 4096 bits in length. The format of the physical layer packet varies with the channel on which the packet is transmitted. One physical layer packet carries one or multiple MAC layer packets.

Table 1-2 lists the length and quantity of the packet carried by each channel.

Table 1-2 Length and quantity of the packet carried by each channel

Channel Packet length (unit: bits) Number of packets carried

Control channel 1024 1

Access channel 256 1

Forward channel 1024, 2048, 3072, or 4096 1 – 4

Reverse channel 256, 512, 1024, 2048, or 4096 1

1.3.2 MAC Layer

This section introduces the default protocols for the MAC layer. Each of these protocols can be independently negotiated at the beginning of the session.

The MAC layer contains the following protocols:



1-10

Control channel MAC protocol Access channel MAC protocol Forward traffic channel MAC protocol Reverse traffic channel MAC protocol

The following provides contents of these protocols:

I. Control Channel MAC Protocol

This protocol constructs a control channel MAC layer packet out of one or more security layer packets. It contains the rules concerning:

AN transmission and packet scheduling on the control channel AT acquisition of the control channel AT control channel MAC layer packet reception Addition of the AT address to the transmitted packets

1) Packet encapsulation

In the transmit direction, the MAC layer adds MAC layer-related headers, trailers, and padding to security layer packets, and then forwards the packets to the physical layer for transmission.

In the receive direction, the MAC layer receives MAC packets from the physical layer and removes the layer-related headers, trailers, and padding. If the packets are addressed to the AT, the MAC layer forwards the packets to the security layer.

2) 1xEV-DO paging cycle

The AT can request a specific 1xEV-DO control channel paging cycle (equivalent to paging slots in IS-95) for paging purpose.

II. Access Channel MAC Protocol

This protocol defines the AT timing and power characteristics for the access control channel.

Packet encapsulation

The PDU for the access channel MAC protocol is the access channel packet. Unlike the control channel packets, one access channel packet can consist of only one security layer packet.

In the transmit direction, the MAC layer adds MAC layer-related headers, frame check sequence (FCS), trailers, and padding to security layer packets, and then forwards the resulting packets to the physical layer for transmission.

In the receive direction, the MAC layer receives MAC packets from the physical layer, removes the layer-related headers, FCS, trailers, and padding, and then forwards the packets to the security layer.

Access channel MAC protocol messages

Access channel MAC protocol messages are classified into:



1-11

--ACAck: The AN uses this message to identify and acknowledge the receipt of an access channel MAC capsule.

--Access Parameters: The AN uses this message to send the access channel messages to ATs.

The AN includes an Access Parameters Message in the synchronous capsule once at least every three control channel cycles or 768 slots.

III. Forward Traffic Channel MAC Protocol

This protocol includes rules governing the operations on the forward traffic channel:

Transmission of the DRC channel by the AT Interpretation of DRC by the AN Support for both variable and fixed rate operations

1) Packet encapsulation Packet encapsulation (Format A)

Format A is used when the security payload fills the entire session layer payload.

The PDU for this protocol is the forward traffic channel (FTC) packet. Each packet consists of a security layer packet. This protocol constructs an FTC packet out of the security layer packet by adding a MAC layer trailer.

Packet encapsulation (Format B)

Format B is used when the highest priority security payload does not fill the entire session layer payload.

2) DRC rules

The forward traffic channel MAC protocol consists of DRC transmission and FTC rate selection rules. There are two states of operation:

Variable rate

The AT uses the DRC channel to provide rate feedback to the AN and the AN only uses the requested rate.

The AT assigns DRC to the best serving sector in its active set. The AN transmits to the AT using the sector and rate values of the DRC.

Fixed rate

The AT transmits messages to the AN at a specific rate and from a specific sector. If the data is transmitted from the AN to the AT, the AN uses the sector and rate values specified in the message.

When there is an imbalance in forward and reverse links and the AN cannot receives the DRC correctly, the fixed rate mode is used.

IV. Reverse Traffic Channel MAC Protocol

This protocol includes rules governing the operations on the reverse traffic channel:



1-12

Acquisition of the reverse traffic channel by the AN through assistance of the AT Selection of transmission rate on the reverse traffic channel by the AT or AN

1) Packet encapsulation

The transmission unit for this protocol is the reverse traffic channel (RTC) packet. Each packet consists of one security layer packet. The protocol constructs a RTC packet out of the security layer packet by adding one MAC layer trailer to the trailer of the security layer packet.

2) Reverse link data rate

The AN uses the following techniques to control the reverse link data rate of the AT:

Reverse rate limit message

This message is transmitted over the forward control channel. It specifies the maximum reverse channel link rate allowed for each AT connection. It can be broadcast.

Reverse activity bit

The reverse activity bit is transmitted over the forward control channel. It specifies whether the reverse link of the section is busy. The reverse link of the AT is not busy when the reverse activity bit indicates not busy for all sectors in the active set.

Reverse rate transition probability vectors

The AN configures two rate transition vectors for each AT. One is used when the reverse link is not busy, and the other is used when the reverse link is busy. One rate transition vector contains one rate transition probability. The AT uses the rate transition probability value related to the current reverse link status (busy or not busy) and the current data rate.

The AT must transmit at the data rate lower than the maximum data rate and the rate necessary to empty the buffer of the AT.

1.4 Abis Interface The Abis interface is the interface between the BSC and the BTS, two functional entities in the BSS. It is the interface defined for the BTS to access the BSC through terrestrial links.

Abis interface consists of three parts: Abis traffic, Abis signaling and OML signaling, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Abis traffic is the interface connecting the SDU of the BSC with the channel processing unit of the BTS. It carries the user traffic.

Abis signaling is the signaling transmission channel between the BSC and the BTS. It controls the cell setup, transmission of messages over paging channels and access channels, and call setup and release.



1-13

OML signaling is used to implement the operation and maintenance functions. It is defined by equipment manufacturers. On the Abis interface, there is a transparent channel used to carry the OML signaling between the OMC and OMU of the BTS.

SPU SDU

Abis Signaling

Abis

Sig

nalin

g Abis Traffic

Abis

Tra

ffic O

ML

OM

L

CEs CEs

BSC

BTS BTS

OMU MCMC OMU

Abis Interface

SPU: Signaling processing unit CEs: Channel elements SDU: Selection and distribution unit OMU: Operation and maintenance unitMC: Main control unit BTS: Base transceiver station BSC: Base station controller

Figure 1-4 Composition of the Abis interface

Note:

The BSC CFMR implements the SDU functions. The BSC CSPU implements the SPU functions. In the BTS3606, the BCKM implements the MC and OMU functions, and the CCPM implements the CE functions.

Figure 1-5 shows the protocol stack used by the Abis signaling and OML signaling.

Abis Signaling Application/OAM ApplicationAbis Signaling Application/OAM Application

TCP

IP

AAL5

ATM

Physical Layer

Figure 1-5 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis signaling and OML signaling)

Figure 1-6 shows the protocol stack used by the Abis traffic.



1-14

AAL2

ATM

Physical Layer

SSSAR

Abis Traffic

Figure 1-6 Protocol stack of the Abis interface (Abis traffic)


The physical layer of the Abis interface can be an E1/T1 interface. The physical electrical performance of the E1/T1 interface is in compliance with the ITU-T G.703 recommendations. The multiple E1/T1 trunk lines transmit ATM cells by means of inverse multiplexing on ATM (IMA).

The physical layer also provides the SDH optical interface to improve the flexibility.

1.4.2 Data Link Layer

The ATM technology is introduced to the data link layer of the Abis interface.

The ATM PVC is used for the transmission of both the signaling and traffic.

When only 1X module or EV-DO module exists, or 1X module and EV-DO module coexist, and they connect to the same subrack of the BSC, one PVC is allocated for the Abis signaling.

When 1X module and EV-DO module coexist, and they connect to the different subracks of the BSC, two PVCs are allocated for the Abis signaling.

One PVC is allocated for the OML signaling. One or two PVCs are allocated to each channel processing board.

Adaptation of Abis signaling and OML signaling is performed over the AAL5. These two types of signaling are carried in the IP over ATM (IPoA) mode. On the Abis interface, the Abis signaling path connects the main control software (MC) with SPU of BSC through permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) to transmit Abis signaling.

The OML signaling transmission path also uses one PVC to connect BTS OMU and BSC. The BSC forwards the OML signaling to OMC transparently without processing the signaling.

AAL2 is used for the adaptation of the Abis traffic. On the Abis interface, each channel processing board uses several PVCs to connect the channel processing unit of BTS to the SDU of BSC. The BTS uses these PVCs to send the uplink data from the Um interface to BSC, while the BSC uses these PVCs to send the downlink data to be transmitted over the Um interface to the BTS.



1-15

1.4.3 Layer 3

On the Abis interface, the Abis signaling, OML signaling, and Abis traffic are in the range of traffic management. Specifically, Abis traffic management includes the following functions:

I. BTS Logic O&M Functions

The following lists 1X and 1xEV-DO logic O&M functions.

1X logic O&M functions

The 1X logic O&M functions include:

--Resource status indication: With this function, the BTS requests the logic configuration from BSC, reports the logic status to BSC, and checks the logic resource regularly.

--Cell configuration: With this function, the BSC configures the cell logic parameters for the BTS, including cell pilot pseudo noise (PN) offset, sector gain, number of common channels, and common channel parameters.

--Overhead message update: With this function, the BSC configures or updates overhead messages for the BTS.

--Cell breathing control function

--Cell blocking function

--Radio measurement report function

1xEV-DO logic O&M functions

Except cell breathing control function, the 1xEV-DO logic O&M function covers the same functions as the 1X logic O&M function.

II. Common Channel Management Function

Common channels management functions cover different procedures in different systems.

1) 1X common channel management function Paging channel management procedure

Transmit paging channel messages from the BSC to MSs through the Abis interface.

Access channel management procedure

Transmit access channel messages received on the BTS access channel to the BSC through the Abis interface.

2) 1xEV-DO common channel management function Control channel management procedure



1-16

Transmit control channel messages from the BSC to MSs through the Abis interface.

Access channel management procedure

Transmit access channel messages received on the BTS access channel to the BSC through the Abis interface.

III. Dedicated Channel Setup and Release Function

This function controls the setup and release of the dedicated radio channel and Abis interface terrestrial channel.

1X dedicated channel

The Abis interface supports the setup and release of various dedicated channels specified in IS95A/B and CDMA2000 1X protocols, including IS95-FCH, IS95-SCCH, IS2000-FCH, IS2000-DCCH, and IS2000-SCH.

1xEV-DO dedicated channel

The Abis interface supports the setup and release of various dedicated channels specified in IS856.

Each radio channel is allocated with one AAL2 link on the Abis interface to carry the user traffic data.

Note:

Only one AAL2 link is allocated for the softer handoff on the Abis interface.

IV. Service Bearer Function

The BTS needs to process the Abis interface frame protocol, and transmit the data from the reverse traffic channel on the Um interface to BSC and the data from BSC through the forward traffic channel of the Um interface.

The traffic channel bearing procedure also implements functions such as AAL2 traffic adaptation, time adjustment of the traffic data frame, and adjustment of reverse outer loop power control and forward power control.

V. Power Control and Rate Control

The Abis interface supports various types of power control. The process of power control can be controlled by configuring different parameters.

1X power control is classified into:

--Quick forward closed-loop power control

--Slow forward closed-loop power control



1-17

--Quick reverse closed-loop power control

--Reverse open-loop power control

1xEV-DO power control is classified into

--Quick reverse open-loop power control

--Slow reverse open-loop power control

The 1xEV-DO mode uses rate control in the forward direction and power control and rate control in the reverse direction.

The AT specifies the DRC channel to control the rate of the forward traffic channel. The reverse link transmits at the maximum allowed rate through the control

channel.


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsChapter 2 Call Processing

2-1

Chapter 2 Call Processing

This chapter introduces the call processing of the CDMA 1X system based on the TIA/EIA/IS-2000-5 Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems.

This chapter includes two parts:

Mobile station (MS) call processing

This part covers all state transitions of the MS in call processing.

Base transceiver station (BTS) call processing

This part covers processing of BTS channels during call processing.

For specific service flows, see Chapter 3, “Service Flows”.

2.1 MS Call Processing MS call processing involves the following states:

MS initialization state MS idle state System access state MS control on the traffic channel state

Figure 2-1 illustrates the MS call processing states.



2-2

MS initialization state

Power-Up

MS idle state

System access state

MS control on thetraffic channel

Initialization taskBegin analog mode operation

End analog mode operation

MS has fully acquiredsystem timingMS idle handoff operation

Receives anacknowledgmentto an access

channel transmission otherthan an origination message

Receives a paging channelmessage requiring an

acknowledgment or response,originates a call or performs

registration

Directed to a traffic channel

Ends use of thetraffic channel

Figure 2-1 MS call processing states

After the MS is powered up, it enters the system determination substate of the MS initialization state with a power-up indication.

2.1.1 MS Initialization State

In this state, the MS first selects a system to use. If the selected system is a CDMA system, the MS proceeds to acquire and then synchronize to the CDMA system. If the selected system is an analog system, the MS begins analog mode operation.

Note:

This chapter introduces the call processing of the CDMA system. Thus, the description of the analog system is omitted.

The MS initialization state consists of the following substates:

System determination substate Pilot channel acquisition substate Sync channel acquisition substate Timing change substate

Figure 2-2 illustrates the MS initialization state.



2-3

Systemdetermination

substate

Power-up or anyother state

Pilot channelacquisition substate

Sync channelacquisition substate

Timing changesubstate

CDMA system selected

Acquires pilot channel

Receives syncchannel message

MS idle state

Figure 2-2 MS initialization state

While in the MS initialization state, the MS updates all active registration timers.

I. System Determination Substate

In this substate, the MS selects the system to use and initializes registration parameters.

Custom system selection process

The precise process for custom system selection is determined by the MS manufacturer according to the expressed user preferences. The MS performs this process in the following way:

1) The MS selects the system to use.

If the MS selects a CDMA system, it sets the band class for the selected system.

2) The MS sets the primary or secondary CDMA channel number for the selected system.

If the MS fails to acquire a CDMA system on the first CDMA channel it tries, it attempts to acquire on the alternate CDMA channel (primary or secondary) before attempting other alternatives.

System selection using current redirection criteria



2-4

To perform system selection using current redirection criteria, the MS uses and stores the following messages:

--Service redirection message

--Global service redirection message

--Extended global service redirection message

System selection using system reselection criteria

The MS uses information received in the extended neighbor list message or the general neighbor list message to perform the system reselection process.

If there are pilots in the neighbor list on a different frequency assignment than that of the MS, the MS selects the CDMA system consisting of these neighbor pilots. If the MS uses a CDMA system, it sets the band class and CDMA channel number for the selected system.

Acquisition of the selected system

The MS attempts to acquire the selected system as follows:

--If the selected system is an analog system, the MS enters the initialization task.

--If the selected system is a CDMA system, the MS enters the pilot channel acquisition substate.

II. Pilot Channel Acquisition Substate

In this substate, the MS acquires the pilot channel of the selected CDMS system.

Upon entering the pilot channel acquisition substate, the MS sets the CDMA channel number and pilot channel, and searches for the length of the pilot channel. If the MS supports orthogonal transmit diversity, the MS uses energy on the forward pilot channel and transmit diversity pilot channel when acquiring a system.

If the MS acquires the pilot channel, it enters the sync channel acquisition substate.

If the MS determines that it is unlikely to acquire the pilot channel, it enters the system determination substate with an acquisition failure indication.

III. Sync Channel Acquisition Substate

In this substate, the MS receives and processes the sync channel message to obtain system configuration and timing information. Upon entering the sync channel acquisition substate, the MS sets its code channel for the sync channel.

After setting these parameters, the MS enters the timing change substate.

IV. Timing Change Substate

In this substate, the MS timing changes occur. The MS synchronizes its long code timing and system timing to those of the CDMA system, using the values obtained from the received sync channel message.

After setting these parameters, the MS enters the MS idle substate.



2-5

2.1.2 MS Idle State

In this state, the MS monitors the paging channel. The MS can receive messages, receive an incoming call (mobile terminated call), initiate a call (mobile originated call), cancel a priority access and channel assignment (PACA) call, initiate a registration, or initiate a message transmission.

I. Idle Procedures

The following introduces six types of idle procedures:

Paging channel monitoring procedures

The paging channel is divided into 80 ms slots called paging channel slots.

Paging and control messages for a MS operating in the non-slotted mode can be received in any of the paging channel slots. Therefore, the non-slotted mode of operation requires the MS to monitor all slots.

--Quick paging channel monitoring procedures

The quick paging channel is divided into 80 ms slots called quick paging channel slots.

--The quick paging channel protocol provides for scheduling the transmission of paging indicators for MSs in quick paging channel slots. Support of this feature is optional.

--The quick paging channel protocol also provides for scheduling the transmission of configuration change indicators for MSs in quick paging channel slots. Support of this feature is optional.

Registration

While in the MS idle state, the MS performs the registration procedure.

Idle handoff

An idle handoff occurs when a MS moves from the coverage area of one BTS into the coverage area of another BTS during the MS idle state. If the MS detects a pilot channel signal from another BTS, and this signal is sufficiently stronger than that of the current BTS, the MS determines to perform an idle handoff.

System reselection procedures

If the MS supports more than one operating mode or the remaining set (or neighbor set) contains pilots on frequencies different from the current frequency, the MS enters the system determination substate of the MS initialization state with a system reselection indication.

Slotted timer expiration

Upon expiration of the slotted timer, the MS disables the timer.



2-6

II. Response to Overhead Information Operation

The response to overhead information operation is performed whenever the MS receives an overhead message. The MS updates internally stored information from the received message’s data fields.

The above messages are all configuration messages except the access parameters message. The MS receives configuration parameters in the configuration messages and access parameters in the access parameters message.

The MS may store the configuration parameters from paging channels it has recently monitored.

III. MS Page Match Operation

The MS page match operation is performed whenever the MS receives a general page message.

If the MS receives a general page message that contains the international mobile station identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) assigned to the MS, it transmits a page response message on the access channel.

If the MS is configured to receive broadcast messages, and it receives a general page message that contains a burst type and broadcast address that the MS has been configured to receive, the MS performs the broadcast page procedures.

IV. MS Order and Message Processing Operation

During the MS order and message processing operation, the MS processes all messages except overhead messages and page messages.

If any field value of the message or order is outside its permissible range, the MS sends a Mobile Station Reject Order.

V. MS Origination Operation

If the MS is directed by the user to initiate a call, it performs the MS origination operation when entering the MS idle state.

The MS enters the update overhead information substate of the system access state with an origination indication.

VI. MS Message Transmission Operation

This operation is performed when the user directs the MS to transmit a Data Burst Message.

Support of this operation is optional.



2-7

VII. MS Power-Down Operation

When the user directs the MS to power down, the MS performs this operation, updates stored parameters, and performs other registration procedures. If no power-down registration is performed, the MS powers down.

VIII. MS PACA Cancel Operation

The MS PACA cancel operation is performed when the user directs the MS to cancel a PACA call.

The MS disables the PACA state timer and indicates to the user that the PACA call has been cancelled. The MS enters the update overhead information substate of the system access state with a PACA cancel indication.

IX. MS Resource Control Primitives Response Operation

The MS resource control primitives response operation is performed when Layer 3 receives a primitive from the resource control.

The MS enters the update overhead information substate of the system access state with a resource control initiated reconnect indication.

2.1.3 System Access State

In this state, the MS sends messages to the BTS on the R-CSCH and receives messages from the BTS on the F-CSCH.

The system access state consists of the following substates:

Update overhead information substate MS origination attempt substate Page response substate MS order/message response substate Registration access substate MS message transmission substate PACA cancel substate

I. Access Procedures

Access procedures include:

Access attempts

The MS transmits on the access channel using a random access procedure. Many parameters of the random access channel are supplied by the BTS in the Access Parameters Message.

Handoffs

While in the system access state, the MS continues its pilot search and performs an access handoff or an access probe handoff.



2-8

--The MS is permitted to perform an access handoff to use the paging channel with the best pilot strength and an associated access channel.

--An access handoff is permitted after an access attempt while the MS is in the page response substate or the MS origination attempt substate.

System access state exit procedures

Upon exiting the system access state, the MS directs Layer 2 to cancel any access attempt in progress and discard the associated message. The mobile station then disables the system access state timer.

Full-TMSI timer

Whenever the MS sends its full TMSI, it enables the full-TMSI timer. If the full-TMSI timer expires, the MS deletes the TMSI.

Monitoring pilots

The MS assists the BTS in the traffic channel assignment process by monitoring and reporting the pilot strength of the pilot in the MS’s paging channel active set. The MS can also monitor and report other pilots on the same frequency.

Paging channel monitoring

When in the system access state, the MS monitors the paging channel at all times.

The MS sets a timer when it begins to monitor the paging channel and whenever it gets an indication that a valid message was received on the paging channel, whether addressed to the MS or not.

II. Update Overhead Information Substate

In this substate, the MS monitors the paging channel until it has received the current configuration messages. The MS compares sequence numbers to determine whether all of the configuration messages are up-to-date.

If the system access state timer expires while in this substate, the MS enters the system determination substate of the MS initialization state with a system lost indication.

III. MS Origination Attempt Substate

In this substate, the MS sends an Origination Message to the BTS.

IV. Page Response Substate

In this substate, the MS sends a Page Response Message in response to a General Page Message from a BTS.

While in this substate, the MS monitors the paging channel and performs an access probe handoff or access handoff.



2-9

V. MS Order/Message Response Substate

In this substate, the MS sends a message that is a response to a message received from the BTS.

VI. Registration Access Substate

In this substate, the MS sends a registration message to the BTS. While in this substate, the MS monitors the paging channel.

VII. MS Message Transmission Substate

In this substate, the MS sends a data burst message or a peer-to-peer resource control message to the BTS.

Support of this substate is optional.

VIII. PACA Cancel Substate

In this substate, the MS sends a PACA Cancel Message to the BTS.

2.1.4 MS Control on the Traffic Channel State

In this state, the MS communicates with the BTS over the forward and reverse traffic channels.

The MS control on the traffic channel state consists of the following substates:

Traffic channel initialization substate Waiting for order substate Waiting for MS answer substate Conversation substate Release substate

I. Special Functions and Actions

The MS performs special functions and actions in one or more of the substates of the MS control on the traffic channel state.

II. Traffic Channel Initialization Substate

In this substate, the MS verifies that it can receive the forward traffic channel and begins transmitting on the reverse traffic channel.

III. Waiting for Order Substate

In this substate, the MS waits for an alert with information message.

IV. Waiting for MS Answer Substate

In this substate, the MS waits for the user to answer the mobile terminated call or to invoke special treatments.



2-10

V. Conversation Substate

In this substate, the MS exchanges traffic channel frames with the BTS in accordance with the current service configuration. The MS may perform the gating operation of the reverse pilot channel.

VI. Release Substate

In this substate, the MS disconnects the call.

2.1.5 Registration

Registration is the process by which the MS notifies the BTS of its location, status, identification, slot cycle, and other characteristics. The MS informs the BTS of its location and status so that the BTS can efficiently page the MS when establishing a mobile terminated call.

I. Forms of Registration

The CDMA 1X system supports ten different forms of registration:

Power-up registration

The MS registers when it is powered up or switches from different serving personal communications services (PCS) frequency blocks, different band classes, alternate operating modes, and analog system.

Power-down registration

If the MS has previously registered in the current serving system, the MS registers when it is powered down.

Timer-based registration

The MS registers when a timer expires.

Distance-based registration

The MS registers when the distance between the current BTS and the BTS in which it last registered exceeds a threshold.

Zone-based registration

The MS registers whenever it moves into a new zone.

Parameter-change registration

The MS registers when it modifies its stored parameters or enters a new system.

Ordered registration

The MS registers when the BTS requests it to register.

Implicit registration



2-11

Whenever the MS successfully sends an Origination Message or Page Response Message, the BTS can infer the location of the MS. This is considered an implicit registration.

Traffic channel registration

Whenever the BTS has registration information for a MS that has been assigned to a traffic channel, the BTS can notify the MS that it is registered.

User zone registration

The MS registers when it selects an active user zone.

II. Roaming

Two types of roaming are defined:

Foreign network identification (NID) roaming Foreign system identification (SID) roaming

The MS has a list of one or more home (non-roaming) (SID, NID) pairs. A MS is roaming if the stored (SIDs, NIDs) pair does not match one of the MS’s non-roaming (SID, NID) pairs.

III. Registration Timers and Indicators

The MS provides a means of enabling and disabling each timer. When a timer is disabled, it is considered expired. A timer that has been enabled is referred to as active.

IV. Registration Procedures

Registration procedures consist of the following actions:

Actions in the MS initialization state Actions in the MS idle state Actions in the system access state Actions in the MS control on the traffic channel state

2.1.6 Handoff

The MS supports the following three handoff procedures in the MS Control on the Traffic Channel State:

Soft handoff: A handoff in which the MS starts communications with a new BTS without interrupting communications with the old BTS. Soft handoff can only be used between CDMA channels having identical frequency assignments. Soft handoff provides diversity of forward traffic channels and reverse traffic channel paths on the boundaries between BTSs.

CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff: A handoff in which the MS is transitioned between disjoint sets of BTSs, different band classes, different frequency assignments, or different frame offsets.



2-12

CDMA-to-analog handoff: A handoff in which the MS is directed from a CDMA traffic channel to an analog voice channel.

I. Pilot Sets

All pilots in a pilot set have the same CDMA frequency assignment.

The MS searches for pilots on the current CDMA frequency assignment to detect the presence of CDMA channels and to measure their strengths. When the MS detects a pilot of sufficient strength that is not associated with any of the forward traffic channels assigned to it, it sends a Pilot Strength Measurement Message to the BTS. The BTS can then assign a forward traffic channel associated with that pilot to the MS and direct the MS to perform a handoff.

II. Requirements

The following lists the handoff-specific requirements:

Pilot search

For the pilot sets, the BTS sets the search window in which the MS is to search for usable multi-path components of the pilots in the set.

Pilot strength measurement

The MS assists the BTS in the handoff process and in the reverse supplemental code channel operation and in the reverse supplemental channel operation by measuring and reporting the strengths of received pilots.

Handoff drop timer

The MS maintains a handoff drop timer for each pilot in the active set and candidate set.

Pilot PN phase

The MS measures the arrival time for each pilot reported to the BTS. The pilot arrival time is the time of occurrence, as measured at the MS antenna connector, of the earliest arriving usable multi-path component of the pilot.

Handoff messages

Handoff messages include the processing of forward traffic channel handoff messages, reverse supplemental burst assignment, and reverse traffic channel handoff messages.

Set maintenance

Pilot set maintenance includes the maintenance of the active set, candidate set, and neighbor set.

Soft handoff

When the active set contains more than one pilot, the MS provides diversity combining of the associated forward traffic channels.



2-13

A set consists of one or more forward fundamental code channels or forward dedicated control channels with identical power control information. Sets are identified through an Extended Handoff Direction Message, a General Handoff Direction Message, or a Universal Handoff Direction Message.

CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff

The BTS directs the MS to perform a CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff by sending an Extended Handoff Direction Message, a General Handoff Direction Message, or a Universal Handoff Direction Message. The MS is transitioned between disjoint sets of BTSs, different frequency assignments, or different frame offsets.

CDMA-to-analog handoff

The BTS directs the MS to perform a CDMA-to-analog handoff by sending an Analog Handoff Direction Message.

Search of analog frequencies

The MS supports analog frequencies single search or analog frequencies periodic search.

2.2 BTS Call Processing This section describes BTS call processing. It contains frequent references to the messages that flow between the BTS and MS.

BTS call processing consists of the following types of processing:

Pilot and sync channel processing Paging channel and quick paging channel processing Access channel processing Traffic channel processing

2.2.1 Pilot and Sync Channel Processing

During pilot and sync channel processing, the BTS transmits the pilot and sync channels. When the MS is in the MS initialization state, it uses these pilot and sync channels to acquire and synchronize to the CDMA system.

I. Preferred Set of CDMA Channels

The preferred set of frequency assignments are the CDMA channels on which the MS attempts to acquire the CDMA system. The BTS supports at least one member of the preferred set of frequency assignments. The BTS may support additional CDMA channels.

II. Pilot Channel Operation

The pilot channel is a reference channel which the MS uses for acquisition, timing, and as a phase reference for coherent demodulation. The BTS continually transmits a pilot



2-14

channel for every CDMA channel supported by the BTS, unless the BTS is classified as a hopping pilot beacon.

III. Sync Channel Operation

The sync channel provides the MS with system configuration and timing information.

The BTS transmits at most one sync channel for each supported CDMA channel. The BTS continually sends the Sync Channel Message on each sync channel that the BTS transmits.

2.2.2 Paging Channel and Quick Paging Channel Processing

This section describes paging channel and quick paging channel processing in detail.

I. Paging Channel Procedures

During paging channel processing, the BTS transmits the paging channel which the MS monitors to receive messages while the MS is in the MS idle state and system access state. The BTS may transmit up to seven paging channels on each supported CDMA channel. For each paging channel that the BTS transmits, the BTS continually sends valid paging channel messages.

CDMA channel determination

To determine the CDMA channel assigned to the MS, the BTS uses the hash function with the corresponding parameters input.

Paging channel determination

To determine the paging channel assigned to the MS, the BTS uses the hash function with the corresponding parameters input.

Paging slot determination

Paging slot determination is to determine the assigned paging channel slots for a MS with a given slot cycle index.

Message transmission and acknowledgment procedures

The paging channel message transmission and acknowledgment procedures facilitate the reliable exchange of messages between the BTS and MS on the F-CSCH and R-CSCH.

II. Quick Paging Channel Processing

The BTS may support a quick paging channel. The BTS may transmit up to three quick paging channels on each supported CDMA channel.

Quick paging channel determination

To determine the MS’s assigned quick paging channel, the BTS uses the hash function with the following inputs:

--IMSI with which the MS registered



2-15

--Number of quick paging channels which the BTS transmits on the MS’s assigned CDMA channel

Quick paging channel slot determination

Assigned quick paging channel slots of the MS are determined by the slot formula.

Paging indicator position determination

To determine the MS’s assigned paging indicators, the BTS uses the same formula as used by the MS.

Configuration change indicator position determination

Configuration change indicators are transmitted on the first quick paging channel.

Reserved indicator positions

On the first quick paging channel and non first quick paging channel, if the quick paging channel data rates are 4800 bps and 9600 bps respectively, the reserved indicator positions are different.

2.2.3 Access Channel Processing

During access channel processing, the BTS monitors the access channel to receive messages which the MS sends while the MS is in the system access state.

Each access channel is associated with a paging channel. Up to 32 access channels can be associated with a paging channel. The number of access channels associated with a particular paging channel is specified in the Access Parameters Message sent out on that paging channel.

The BTS continually monitors all access channels associated with each paging channel that the BTS transmits.

I. Response to Page Response Message

If the BTS receives a Page Response Message, it sends a Channel Assignment Message, an Extended Channel Assignment Message, or a Release Order. The BTS may also start authentication procedures, start TMSI assignment procedures, send a Data Burst Message, or request status information records.

II. Response to Orders

No requirements.

III. Response to Origination Message

If the BTS receives an Origination Message, it sends a Channel Assignment Message, an Extended Channel Assignment Message, an Intercept Order, a Reorder Order, a Release Order, a PACA Message, or a Service Redirection Message. The BTS may also start authentication procedures, start TMSI assignment procedures, or request status information records.



2-16

IV. Response to Registration Message

If the BTS receives a Registration Message, it may send a Registration Accepted Order, a Registration Rejected Order, or a Service Redirection Message. The BTS may also start authentication procedures, start TMSI assignment procedures, or request status information records.

V. Response to Data Burst Message

No requirements.

VI. Response to Service Release Response Message

If the BTS receives a Service Release Response Message, it changes parameter configuration and perform relevant procedures.

VII. Response to Peer-to-Peer Resource Control Message

If the BTS receives a Peer-to-Peer Resource Control Message, Layer 3 sends relevant parameters to the resource control and the value received in the message.

VIII. Service Redirection

If the BTS sends a Service Redirection Message or a Global Service Redirection Message to the MS, Layer 3 sends a MS inactive on common channel indication to Layer 2.

2.2.4 Traffic Channel Processing

During traffic channel processing, the BTS uses the forward and reverse traffic channel to communicate with the MS while the MS is in the MS control on the traffic channel state.

Traffic channel processing consists of the following substates:

Traffic channel initialization substate Waiting for order substate Waiting for answer substate Conversation substate Release substate

I. Special Functions and Actions

The BTS performs the following special functions and actions in one or more of the traffic channel processing substates:

Forward traffic channel power control

When the BTS enables forward traffic channel power control, the MS reports frame error rate statistics to the BTS using the Power Measurement Report Message.



2-17

The BTS may enable forward traffic channel power control using the System Parameters Message sent on the paging channel and the Power Control Parameters Message sent on the forward traffic channel.

Service configuration and negotiation

During traffic channel operation, the MS and BTS communicate through the exchange of forward and reverse traffic channel configurations. The MS and BTS use a common set of attributes for building and interpreting traffic channel frames. This set of attributes is referred to as a service configuration.

Ordering of messages

The Layer 2 protocol does not guarantee delivery of messages in any order. If the BTS requires that the MS receive a set of messages in a certain order, the BTS sends each message in assured mode requiring confirmation of delivery and waits for the confirmation of delivery of each message before transmitting the next message in the set.

Message action times

A message with an explicit action time is called a pending message.

The BTS supports two pending messages at any given time, not including pending service option control orders, service option control messages, or power up function messages. The number of pending service option control orders or service option control messages that the BTS is required to support is specific to the service option. In addition, the BTS supports one pending Power Up Function Message.

Long code transition request processing

If a request for voice privacy is specified in the Origination Message or Page Response Message, the BTS may send a Long Code Transition Request Order requesting a transition to the private long code.

Processing resource request messages

The BTS processes Resource Request Message and Resource Request Mini Message.

Processing the resource control primitives

If resource control is supported, Layer 3 may receive a primitive from resource control and process it.

Additional operations when resource control is supported

When resource control is supported, the BTS performs additional operations on the Service Connect Message and General Handoff Direction Message to be sent to the MS.



2-18

II. Traffic Channel Initialization Substate

In this substate, the BTS begins transmitting on the forward traffic channel and acquires the reverse traffic channel.

III. Waiting for Order Substate

In this substate, the BTS sends an alert with information message to the MS.

IV. Waiting for Answer Substate

In this substate, the BTS waits for a connect order from the MS.

V. Conversation Substate

In this substate, the BTS exchanges traffic channel frames with the MS in accordance with the current service configuration.

VI. Release Substate

In this substate, the BTS disconnects the call.

2.2.5 Registration

Registration is the process by which the MS notifies the BTS of its location, status, identification, slot cycle, and other characteristics.

The BTS can make use of location information to efficiently page the MS when establishing a mobile terminated call. The BTS can also determine which paging channel slots a MS operating in the slotted mode is monitoring. Registration also provides the protocol revision number so that the BTS knows the capabilities of the MS.

I. Registration on the Paging and Access Channels

The BTS specifies the forms of registration that are enabled, the corresponding registration parameters, and the roaming status conditions for which registration is enabled in the System Parameters Message. If any of the autonomous registration forms are enabled, the BTS also enables parameter-change registration.

The BTS processes an Origination Message or Page Response Message sent on the access channel as an implicit registration of the MS sending the message. The BTS can obtain complete registration information about the MS at any time by sending a Registration Request Order to the MS.

II. Registration on the Traffic Channel

The BTS can obtain registration information from a MS on the traffic channel by means of the Status Request Message or the Status Request Order. When the BTS has registration information for a MS, it may send a MS Registered Message to the MS, specifying the BTS's registration system, zone, and location information.



2-19

2.2.6 Handoff

The BTS supports the following three handoff procedures:

Soft handoff CDMA-to-CDMA hard handoff CDMA-to-analog handoff

For details, see section 2.1.6 , “Handoff”.

I. Active Set

The active set contains the pilots associated with the forward traffic channels assigned to the MS.

The BTS informs the MS of the contents of the active set using the Channel Assignment Message or the Extended Channel Assignment Message. Subsequent changes to the contents of the active set are provided using the Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message.

II. Requirements

Overhead information

The BTS sends the following messages governing the pilot search procedures performed by the MS.

Call processing during handoff

Call processing during handoff includes processing the pilot strength measurement message and processing the extended handoff direction message.

Active set maintenance

The BTS maintains an active set for each MS under its control.

The BTS deletes the pilots that were not included in the most recent Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff Direction Message, or Universal Handoff Direction Message, from the active set upon receipt of the Handoff Completion Message.

Soft handoff

The BTS uses soft handoff when directing a MS from on forward traffic channel to another forward traffic channel having the same frequency assignment.

CDMA-to-analog handoff

The BTS may direct the MS to perform a handoff from the CDMA system to an analog system in a band class that the MS supports by sending an Analog Handoff Direction Message.


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsChapter 3 Service Flows

3-1

Chapter 3 Service Flows

This chapter introduces the service flows of the CDMA BTS by referring to the following protocols:

3GPP2 C.S0024 cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification 3GPP2 A.R0003: Abis interface technical report for CDMA 1X Spread Spectrum

System Huawei self-defined protocol: CDMA Abis Interface Upper Layer Protocol

This chapter respectively introduces service flows of the CDMA BTS in the CDMA2000 1X and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO systems, as listed in Table 3-1.

The introduction to these service flows is intended to help readers to:

Understand how the interface messages are transferred between the MS and the BTS (or between the AT and the AN).

Use this basic knowledge for proper interface message tracing and troubleshooting.

Table 3-1 Service flows

System Category of the

service flow Service flow

Mobile Originated Call

Mobile Terminated Call

Mobile Initiated Release

BTS Initiated Release

Voice service

Release Initiated by BSC/MSC

Intra-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff

Inter-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff Add

Inter-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff Drop Handoff

Inter-BTS Hard Handoff

Mobile Originated SMS Delivery on the Access Channel

Mobile Terminated SMS Delivery on the Paging Channel

Mobile Originated SMS delivery on the Traffic Channel Short Message Service (SMS)

Mobile Terminated SMS Delivery on the Traffic Channel

Packet Data Service (Abis Connection Not Yet Established)

CDMA2000 1X

Packet data service Packet Data Service (Abis Connection Is Established)



3-2

System Category of the

service flow Service flow

AT Initiated Connection Setup

AN Initiated Connection Re-activation

AT Initiated Connection Release Service flows

AN Initiated Connection Release

Handoff Add

CDMA2000 1x EV-DO

Handoff Handoff Drop

3.1 CDMA2000 1X Service Flows This section introduces the service flows supported by the CDMA2000 1X system.

3.1.1 Voice Service

This section introduces fives types of voice service flow.

I. Mobile Originated Call

Figure 3-1illustrates the mobile originated call (MOC) procedure.

MS BTS BSCOrigination Msg

Abis-ACH Msg Transfer(ORM)Base Ack Order

Abis-BTS SetupAbis-Connect

Abis-Connect Ack

Abis-BTS Setup Ack

Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Null data)Null Traffic Data

Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Idle data)

Abis-PCH Msg Transfer(ECAM)ECAM

Traffic Channel Preamble Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Preamble)

Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)Base Ack OrderIdle TCH Data Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Idle Data)

MS Ack Order Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Ms Ack)Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Service Connect)Service Connect Msg

Service Connect CompleteAbis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Ser Conn Comp)

CM Service Req

Assignment Complete

MSC

Assignment Req

ACH

PCH

TCH

PCH

TCH

TCHTCHTCH

TCHTCH

(1)(2)

(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)

(8)(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)(14)(15)

(16)(17)

Figure 3-1 Mobile originated call



3-3

The following describes the mobile originated call procedure:

1) The MS sends an Origination Message to the BTS on the access channel. 2) Upon the reception of the Origination Message, the BTS sends an Abis-ACH Msg

Transfer message to the BSC, forwards the origination message to the BSC, and sends a Base Ack Order to the MS on the paging channel.

3) The BSC sends a CM Service Request to the MSC, requesting service assignment.

4) The MSC sends an Assignment Request to the BSC, requesting the BSS to assign radio resources.

5) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Setup message to the BTS, requesting the BTS to allocate the radio resource for the call.

6) The BTS sends an Abis-Connect message to the BSC to establish the Abis service connection.

7) The BSC sends an Abis-Connect Ack message to the BTS in response to the Abis-Connect message.

8) The BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack to the BSC.

9) The BSC sends an Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message to the BTS, instructing the BTS to send a null frame to the MS.

10) After receiving the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message, the BTS sends a null frame to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message, and performs Abis link delay adjustment.

11) The BSC sends a channel assignment message to the BTS using the Abis-PCH Msg Transfer message. The BTS forwards the message to the MS on the paging channel.

12) The MS begins to send a traffic channel preamble on the assigned reverse traffic channel. After acquiring the preamble, the BTS sends a traffic channel preamble to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message.

13) After the BSC receives the traffic channel preamble from the MS, it sends a Base Ack Order to the BTS using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message. The BTS forwards the order to the MS over the forward traffic channel.

14) After the MS receives a Base Ack Order, it stops sending the traffic channel preamble and starts sending data frames.

15) The MS receives and then sends a Base Ack Order to the BTS. Then, the BTS forwards the order to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message.

16) After the BSC receives the MS Ack Order, it sends a service connection message to the BTS using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message. The BTS forwards the message to the MS, and then the MS starts to handle the service according to the designated service configuration.

17) To respond to the service connection message, the MS sends the Service Connect Complete message.



3-4

18) After the BSC receives the Service Connect Complete message, it sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC.

II. Mobile Terminated Call

Figure 3-2 illustrates the mobile terminated call (MTC) procedure.

MS BTS BSC

Paging ResponseAbis-ACH Msg Transfer(PRM)

Base Ack Order


Abis-Connect Ack

Abis-BTS Setup Ack

Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Null data)Null Traffic Data

Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Idle data)

Abis-PCH Msg Transfer(ECAM)ECAM

Traffic Channel Preamble Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Preamble)

Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)Base Ack OrderIdle TCH Data Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Idle Data)

MS Ack Order Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Ms Ack)Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd(Service Connect)Service Connect Msg

Service Connect CompleteAbis-IS2000 FCH Rvs(Ser Conn Comp)

CM Service Req

Assignment Complete

MSC

Assignment Req

Paging RequestAbis-PCH Msg Transfer(GPM)

GPM(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)

(6)(7)(8)(9)

(10)(11)(12)(13)

(14)(15)

(16)

(17)(18)

(19)(20)

PCH

ACH

PCH

TCH

PCH

TCH

TCH

TCHTCH

TCH

TCH

Figure 3-2 Mobile terminated call

The following describes the mobile terminated call procedure:

1) The MSC sends a Paging Request to the BSC. 2) The BSC constructs a general paging message (GPM), embeds it into the

Abis-PCH Msg Transfer message, and then sends it to the BTS. Then, the BTS sends the GPM on the paging channel.

3) After the MS receives the GMP, it sends a paging response message (PRM) to the BTS.

4) The BTS uses the Abis-ACH Msg Transfer message to send the PRM to the BSC and sends a Base Ack Order on the paging channel.

5) The BSC sends a CM Service Request to the MSC, requesting service assignment.



3-5

6) The MSC sends an Assignment Request to the BSC, requesting the BSS to assign radio resources.


8) The BTS sends an Abis-Connect message to the BSC to establish the Abis service connection.

9) The BSC sends an Abis-Connect Ack message to the BTS in response to the Abis-Connect message.

10) The BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

11) The BSC sends an Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message to the BTS, instructing the BTS to send a null frame to the MS.

12) After receiving the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message, the BTS sends a null frame to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message, and performs Abis link delay adjustment.

13) The BSC sends a channel assignment message to the BTS using the Abis-PCH Msg Transfer message. The BTS forwards the message to the MS on the paging channel.

14) The MS begins to send the traffic channel preamble on the assigned reverse traffic channel. After acquiring the preamble, the BTS sends the traffic channel preamble to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message.

15) After the BSC receives the traffic channel preamble from the MS, it sends the Base Ack Order to the BTS in the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message. The BTS forwards the order to the MS over the forward traffic channel.

16) After the MS receives the Base Ack Order, it stops sending the traffic channel preamble and starts sending data frames.

17) The MS receives and then sends the Base Ack Order to the BTS. Then, the BTS forwards the order to the BSC using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Rvs message.

18) After the BSC receives the MS Ack Order, it sends a service connection message to the BTS using the Abis-IS2000 FCH Fwd message. The BTS forwards the message to the MS, and then the MS starts to handle the service according to the designated service configuration.

19) To respond to the service connection message, the MS sends a Service Connect Complete message.

20) After the BSC receives the Service Connect Complete message, it sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC.

III. Mobile Initiated Release

After the MS initiates a network access request, it can originate a release owing to the service requirement, for example, the user hooks on.

Figure 3-3 illustrates the mobile originated release.



3-6

MS BTS BSC

Release Order Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Release Order)

Abis-BTS Release

Abis-Remove

Abis-Remove Ack

Abis-BTS Release Ack

Clear Req

MSC

Clear CommandAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Release Order)Release Order

Clear Complete

(1)(2)

(3)(4)(5)

(6)

(7)(8)

Figure 3-3 Mobile initiated release

The following describes the mobile initiated release procedure:

1) The MS sends a Release Order message to the BTS on the reverse channel. In response to the order, the BTS sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs containing the Release Order message to the BSC.

2) The BSC sends a Clear Request to the MSC. 3) The MSC sends a Clear Command to instruct the BSC to release the associated

dedicated resources (such as the terrestrial circuit). 4) The BSC sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd containing the Release Order

message to the BTS. The BTS sends a Release Order message to the MS and then release the radio resource.

5) The BSC sends the Abis-BTS Release message to the BTS. 6) The BTS sends an Abis-Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to

remove the specified cell from the service connection. In response to the Abis-Remove message, the BSC sends an Abis-Remove Ack message to the BTS.

7) The BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Ack to the BSC in response to the Abis-Remove Ack message.

8) Upon receipt of the Clear Command message from the MSC, the BSC releases the allocated terrestrial circuit and responds to the Clear Complete message. After the MSC receives the Clear Complete message, it releases the underlying transport connection (SCCP connection).

IV. BTS Initiated Release

The BTS may send the Release Request message to the BSC to initiate the call release in one of the following cases:

The MS is not activated and the MS-BTS radio connection fails to be set up. The call fails to be set up because the BTS equipment is faulty.

Figure 3-4 illustrates the release initiated by the BTS.



3-7

MS BTS BSC

Release OrderAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Release Order)

Abis-BTS Release

Abis-Remove

Abis-Remove Ack


MSC

Clear CommandAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Release Order)

Release Order

Clear Complete

Abis-BTS Release RequestClear Request (1)

(2)(3)(4)

(5)(6)

(7)

(8)(9)

Figure 3-4 BTS initiated release

The following describes the BTS initiated release procedure:

1) The BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Request to the BSC to initiate the release. 2) The BSC sends a Clear Request to the MSC. 3) The MSC sends a Clear Command to instruct the BSC to release the associated



5) The MS sends a Release Order message to the BTS on the reverse channel. Then, the BTS sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs containing the Release Order message to the BSC.

6) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Release message to the BTS. 7) The BTS sends an Abis-Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to

remove the specified cell from the service connection. The BSC responds with an Abis-Remove Ack message, indicating the processing result of the Abis Remove message.

8) The BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Ack message to the BSC in response to the Abis-Remove Ack message.


V. Release Initiated by BSC/MSC

The BSC may send the Release Request message to the MSC to initiate the call release in one of the following cases:

The MS is not activated and the MS-BSS radio connection fails to be set up. The call fails to be set up because the BTS equipment is faulty.



3-8

Figure 3-5 illustrates the release initiated by the BSC/MSC.

MS BTS BSC

Release OrderAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Release Order)

Abis-BTS Release

Abis-Remove

Abis-Remove Ack


MSC

Clear CommandAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Release Order)

Release Order

Clear Complete

Clear Request (1)(2)(3)

(4)(5)

(6)

(7)(8)

Figure 3-5 Release initiated by BSC/MSC

The following describes the BSC/MSC initiated release procedure:

1) The BSC sends a Clear Request to the MSC. 2) The MSC sends a Clear Command to instruct the BSC to release the associated



4) The MS sends a Release Order message to the BTS on the reverse channel. Then, the BTS sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs containing the Release Order message to the BSC.

5) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Release message to the BTS. 6) The BTS sends an Abis-Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to

remove the specified cell from the service connection. The BSC responds with an Abis-Remove Ack message, indicating the processing result of the Abis Remove message.

7) The BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Ack message to the BSC in response to the Abis-Remove Ack message.


3.1.2 Handoff

There are three types of handoff:

Soft handoff: A handoff in which the MS starts the communication with a new BTS without interrupting the communication with the old BTS. Soft handoff brings better



3-9

voice quality, realizes seamless handoff, reduces the call drop rate, and increases the reverse capacity.

Softer handoff: A handoff similar to the soft handoff. It occurs when the MS moves from one sector of a BTS to another sector in the same BTS.

Hard handoff: A handoff in which the MS stops the communication with the old BTS before it starts to communicate with the new BTS. An ongoing call can be interrupted temporarily or even dropped during the hard handoff process.

I. Intra-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff Add

Figure 3-6 illustrates the intra-BTS soft/softer handoff add procedure.

In the case of softer handoff, only one Abis service connection is required on the Abis interface, without setting up new Abis service connections.

MS BTS BSCPilot Strength Meas. Msg

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Pilot Strength)

Abis-BTS Setup

Abis-Connect

Abis-Connect Ack

Abis-BTS Setup Ack

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(EHDM)EHDM

MS Ack OrderAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Ms Ack)

Handoff Completion MsgAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(HCM)

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)Base Ack Order

Base Ack OrderAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Figure 3-6 Intra-BTS soft/softer handoff add

The following describes the intra-BTS soft/softer handoff add procedure:

1) The MS sends a Pilot Strength Meas. Msg to the BTS and the BTS sends this message to the BSC.

2) In response to the message, the BTS sends a Base Ack Order message to the MS.


4) The BTS sends an Abis-Connect message to the BSC to set up the Abis service connection. In response to the Abis-Connect message, the BSC sends the



3-10

Abis-Connect Ack message to the BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Connect message.

5) The BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

6) The BSC sends an extended/general/universal handoff direction message (EHDM) to the MS to add the new cell to the active set.

7) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the EHDM with an MS Ack Order. 8) The MS sends a Handoff Completion Msg, indicating the successful handoff. 9) The BSC acknowledges the receipt of the Handoff Completion Msg by sending a

Base Ack Order.

II. Inter-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff Add

Figure 3-7 illustrates the inter-BTS soft/softer handoff add procedure.

MS BSCBTS_D

Pilot Strength Meas. MsgAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Pilot Strength)


Abis-Connect Ack

Abis-BTS Setup AckAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Forward Frame)

Forward Traffic FrameAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Idle)

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(EHDM)

MS Ack Order

EHDM

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(MS Ack)



Base Ack Order

BTS_S

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Figure 3-7 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff add

Note:

BTS_S stands for the source BTS, and BTS_D stands for the target BTS.

The following describes the inter-BTS soft/softer handoff add procedure:

1) The MS sends a Pilot Strength Meas. Msg to the source BTS and the source BTS sends this message to the BSC.

2) In response to the message, the source BTS sends a Base Ack Order message to the MS.



3-11

3) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Setup message to the target BTS, requesting the target BTS to allocate the radio resource for the call.

4) The target BTS sends an Abis-Connect message to the BSC to set up the Abis service connection. In response to the Abis-Connect message, the BSC sends the Abis-Connect Ack message to the target BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Connect message.

5) The target BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

6) The BSC starts to send forward traffic frames to the target BTS. The target BTS starts to transmit the forward traffic frames to the MS as soon as synchronization has occurred.

7) The target BTS sends the reverse idle frames. The reverse frames contain the timing adjustment information necessary to achieve synchronization.

8) The BSC sends an EHDM to the MS to add a new cell to the active set. 9) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the EHDM with an MS Ack Order. 10) The MS sends a Handoff Completion Msg, indicating the successful handoff. 11) The BSC acknowledges the receipt of the Handoff Completion Msg by sending a

Base Ack Order.

III. Inter-BTS Soft/Softer Handoff Drop

Figure 3-8 illustrates the inter-BTS soft/softer handoff drop procedure.

MS BTS_S BSCBTS_DPilot Strength Meas. Msg Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Pilot Strength)


MS Ack Order

EHDM




Abis-BTS Release

Abis-Remove

Abis-Remove Ack


Base Ack Order Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Figure 3-8 Inter-BTS soft/softer handoff drop

The following describes the inter-BTS soft/softer handoff drop procedure:

1) The MS sends a Pilot Strength Meas. Msg to the BTS and the BTS sends this message to the BSC.



3-12

2) In response to the message, the BTS sends a Base Ack Order message to the MS.

3) The BSC sends an EHDM to the MS to drop a cell from the active set. 4) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the EHDM with an MS Ack Order. 5) The MS sends a Handoff Completion Msg, indicating the successful handoff. 6) The BSC responds the target BTS with a Handoff Completion message. 7) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Release message to the source BTS, requesting the

removal of a specified cell. 8) The source BTS removes associated resources and sends an Abis-Remove

message to the SDU function of the BSC. The SDU function of the BSC sends the Abis-Remove Ack message to the source BTS.

9) The source BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Ack message to the BSC to acknowledge the removal of the specified cell.

IV. Inter-BTS Hard Handoff

Figure 3-9 illustrates the inter-BTS hard handoff procedure.

MS BSCBTS_D

Pilot Strength Meas. MsgAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Pilot Strength)


Abis-Connect Ack

Abis-BTS Setup AckAbis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Forward Frame)

Forward Traffic FrameAbis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Idle)


MS Ack Order

EHDM




Base Ack Order

BTS_S

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Base Ack)(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Abis-BTS Release

Abis-Remove

Abis-Remove Ack


Reverse Traffic Frame Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs( Idle Frames)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

Figure 3-9 Inter-BTS hard handoff

The following describes the inter-BTS hard handoff procedure:

1) The MS sends a Pilot Strength Meas. Msg to the source BTS and the source BTS sends this message to the BSC.



3-13

2) In response to the message, the source BTS sends a Base Ack Order message to the MS.

3) The BSC decides that one or more cells at the target BTS are needed to support the call in hard handoff. The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Setup message to the target BTS to request allocation of radio resources at the BTS.

4) If resources are available, the target BTS responses with an Abis-Connect message to set up an Abis service connection. In response to the Abis-Connect message, the BSC sends the Abis-Connect Ack message to the target BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Connect message.

5) The target BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

6) The BSC starts to send forward traffic frames to the target BTS. The target BTS starts to transmit the forward traffic frames to the MS as soon as synchronization has occurred.

7) The target BTS sends the reverse idle frames. The reverse frames contain the timing adjustment information necessary to achieve synchronization.

8) The BSC sends an EHDM to the MS to change the cell to the active set. 9) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the EHDM with an MS Ack Order. 10) The MS sends reverse traffic channel frames or the traffic channel preamble to the

target BTS. 11) The MS sends a Handoff Completion Msg, indicating the successful handoff. 12) The BSC acknowledges the receipt of the Handoff Completion Msg by sending a

Base Ack Order. 13) The BSC sends an Abis-BTS Release message to the source BTS, requesting the

removal of a specified cell. 14) The source BTS removes associated resources and sends an Abis-Remove

message to the SDU function of the BSC. The SDU function of the BSC sends the Abis-Remove Ack message to the source BTS.

15) The source BTS sends an Abis-BTS Release Ack message to the BSC to acknowledge the removal of the specified cell.

3.1.3 SMS Delivery

This section introduces four types SMS delivery operations.

I. Mobile Originated SMS Delivery on the Access Channel

When an idle MS requests to send a short-length SMS message, the SMS message is sent on the access channel.

Figure 3-10 illustrates the mobile originated SMS (SMS-MO) delivery on the access channel.



3-14

MS MSC

Data Burst MessageAbis-ACH Msg Transfer(Data Burst Message)

BS Ack Order

BTS

(1)

(2)

(3)ADDS Deliver

BSC

Figure 3-10 SMS-MO delivery on the access channel

The following describes the SMS-MO delivery on the access channel:

1) The MS sends a Data Burst Message on the access channel to transfer the SMS message.

2) The BTS sends an Abis-ACH Msg Transfer message that contains the Data Burst Message received on the access channel. When the MS requires Layer 2 acknowledgement, the BTS sends the MS Ack Order to the MS on the paging channel.

3) The BSC sends the ADDS Transfer message to the MSC that contains the Data Burst Message received from the MS.

II. Mobile Terminated SMS Delivery on the Paging Channel

When the MSC requests to send a short-length SMS message to an idle MS, the SMS message is sent on the paging channel.

Figure 3-11 illustrates the mobile terminated SMS (SMS-MT) delivery on the paging channel.

MS MSC

Abis-PCH Msg Transfer(Data Burst Message)

MS Ack Order

BTS

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)ADDS Deliver Ack

BSC

Data Burst Message

ADDS Deliver

Figure 3-11 SMS-MT delivery on the paging channel

The following describes the SMS-MT delivery on the paging channel:

1) When the MSC determines that a point-to-point SMS message should be sent to an idle MS, the MSC sends an ADDS Deliver message to the BSC. The ADDS Deliver message contains the SMS message in the ADDS User Part information element.

2) The BSC sends an Abis-PCH Msg Transfer containing the Data Burst Message to the BTS.

3) The BTS sends the Data Burst Message to the MS. The MS acknowledges the receipt of the Data Burst Message if it is required.

4) The BSC responds with an ADDS Deliver Ack message.



3-15

III. Mobile Originated SMS delivery on the Traffic Channel

When the idle MS requests to send an SMS message and the message is too long to be sent on the access channel, the SMS message is sent on the traffic channel instead.

Figure 3-12 illustrates the SMS-MO delivery on the traffic channel.

MS MSC

Data Burst MessageA3-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(Data Burst Message)

BS Ack Order

BTS

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

A3-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(BS Ack Order)

ADDS Deliver

BSC

Figure 3-12 SMS-MO delivery on the traffic channel

The following describes the SMS-MO delivery on the traffic channel:

1) The MS sends a Data Burst Message on the access channel to transfer the SMS message.

2) The BTS sends an A3-IS-2000 FCH Rvs containing the Data Burst Message to the BSC.

3) The BSC sends an ADDS Deliver message to the MSC. The ADDS User Part element contains the SMS message.

4) The BSC sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd message containing the BS Ack Order to acknowledge the receipt of the Data Burst Message, if it is required.

5) The BTS responds with a BS Ack Order.

IV. Mobile Terminated SMS Delivery on the Traffic Channel

When the MSC requests to send an SMS message to an idle MS and the message is too long to be sent on the paging channel, the SMS message is sent on the traffic channel instead.

Figure 3-13 illustrates the SMS-MT delivery on the traffic channel.

MS MSC

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd(Data Burst Message)

MS Ack Order

BTS

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs(MS Ack Order)

ADDS Deliver Ack

BSC

Data Burst Message

ADDS Deliver

(6)

Figure 3-13 SMS-MT delivery on the traffic channel

The following describes the SMS-MT delivery on the traffic channel:



3-16

1) When the MSC determines that a point-to-point SMS message should be sent to an idle MS, the MSC sends an ADDS Deliver message to the BSC. The ADDS Deliver message contains the SMS message in the ADDS User Part information element.

2) The BSC sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Fwd containing the Data Burst Message. 3) The Data Burst Message is sent on the traffic channel. 4) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the Data Burst Message, if it is required. 5) The BTS sends an Abis-IS-2000 FCH Rvs message containing the MS Ack Order. 6) The BSC responds with an ADDS Deliver Ack message.

3.1.4 Packet Data Service

This section introduces two types of packet data service flows.

I. Packet Data Service (Abis Connection Not Yet Established)

Figure 3-14 illustrates the packet data service operation when the Abis connection is not yet established. In the following figure, BSS consists of BTS and BSC.



3-17

A11 Registration Request(Life time)

BSSMS

(1) Origination

(2) BS ACK

MSC

(3)CM Service Request

(11) A9-Setup-A8

(4) Assignment Request

PCF PDSN

(14) A 9-Connect -A8

(15) Assignment Complete

Transmitting packet data

Establishing PPP connection , Mobile IP Registration

A11-Registration Reply (Life time, Accept)

ECAM

(7) BS Ack Order

(8) MS Ack Order

(9) Service Connect Msg

(10) Service Connect Cmp Msg

(6) Tch Preamble

(12)

(5)

(13)

Figure 3-14 Mobile originated packet data service

The following describes the mobile originated packet data service operation:

1) The MS sends an Origination Message to the BTS on the access channel of the Um interface.

2) After the BTS receives the Origination Message, it sends a BS Ack message to the MS.

3) The BSC constructs a CM Service Request message and sends it to the MSC. 4) The MSC sends an Assignment Request message to the BSC, requesting the

BTS to assign radio resources. 5) The BTS sends an extended channel assignment message (ECAM) on the paging

channel of the Um interface. 6) The MS begins to send the preamble on the assigned reverse traffic channel.



3-18

7) After acquiring the reverse traffic channel, the BTS sends the BS ACK Order to the MS on the forward traffic channel.

8) The MS acknowledges the receipt of the BS ACK Order by sending the MS ACK Order, and transmits null service frames on the reverse traffic channel.

9) The BTS sends the Service Connect Msg to the MS to assign the service configuration for the call. The MS processes the service according to the assigned service configuration.

10) The MS responds with one Service Connect Complete Message upon receipt of the Service Connect Msg.

11) The BSC sends an A9-Setup-A8 message to the PCF, requesting to set up an A8 connection.

12) The PCF sends an A11-Registration-Request message to the PDSN, requesting to set up an A10 connection.

13) The PDSN accepts the A11-Registration-Request, and returns an A11-Registration-Reply message to the PCF.

14) The PCF returns an A9-Connect-A8 message to the BSC, indicating the successful establishment of the A8/A10 connection.

15) After both radio traffic channel and terrestrial circuit are established, the BSC sends an Assignment Complete message to the MSC.

16) The MS negotiates with the PDSN to establish a PPP connection between them. The mobile IP registration is also performed. The PPP message and Mobile IP message are transmitted over the traffic channel, and are transparent for the BSC/PCF.

17) After the PPP connection is established, the data service enters the connection state.

II. Packet Data Service (Abis Connection Is Established)

This section describes the packet data service flow when the Abis connection has been established, that is, the mobile initiated SCH setup procedure. The BSC initiated SCH setup procedure is similar to the mobile initiated SCH setup procedure, except that the triggering conditions are different.

There is no special SCH release procedure when the SCH is allocated dynamically. Instead, the BSC determines the SCH rate and duration. Once the time is due, the SCH is released.Figure 3-15 illustrates the mobile initiated SCH setup procedure.



3-19

MS BTS BSC

(2) Abis-BTS Setup

(3) Abis Connect

(4) Abis Connect Ack

(5) Abis-BTS Setup Ack

(1) Supplemental Channel Request Message

(6) Abis Burst Request

(7) Abis Burst Response

(8) Abis Burst Commit

(9) Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message

Figure 3-15 Reverse SCH setup procedure

The following describes the reverse SCH setup procedure::

1) If the packet data call is established, the MS may send a Supplemental Channel Request Message to the BSC, requesting to set up an SCH.


3) After the BTS establishes the channel, it sends an Abis-Connect message to the BSC.

4) The BSC responds with an Abis-Connect Ack message. 5) After the BTS establishes all the channels, it sends an Abis-BTS Setup Ack

message to the BSC, indicating the establishment of terrestrial circuits is completed.

6) The BSC sends an Abis-Burst Request to the BTS to activate the BTS. 7) The BTS responds with an Abis-Burst Response. 8) The BSC sends an Abis-Burst Commit message to the BTS, and the BTS starts to

transmit data over the SCH. 9) The BSC constructs an Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message

and sends it to the MS to assign an SCH for the MS, so that the packet data service can be transmitted at a high rate over the SCH.

3.2 CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Service Flows As a pure data communication system, the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system is constructed on the packet domain instead of the circuit switched domain part.

This section introduces service flows of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system.



3-20

3.2.1 Service Flows

This section introduces the service flows of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system.

I. AT Initiated Connection Setup

Figure 3-16 illustrates the AT initiated connection setup procedure.

AT BTS BSC PCF PDSN

RouteUpdate + ConnectionRequest

Abis-Do ACH Msg Transfer(RU+CR)ACAck

A9-Setup-A8

A11-Registration Request

A11-Registration ReplyA9-Connect-A8

Abis-Do BTS Setup

Abis-Do BTS Connect

Abis-Do BTS Connect Ack

Abis-Do BTS Setup Ack

Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer(TCA)TrafficChannelAssignment

Pilot + DRC

RTCAck

TrafficChannelCompleteAbis-Do ReverseTraffic(TCC)

Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(Preamble)

Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(Idle Data)

Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(Idle Data)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

AN

(15)

Figure 3-16 AT initiated connection setup procedure

The following describes the AT initiated connection setup procedure:

1) The AT sends a Connection Request and a RouteUpdate message to the BTS to initiate a connection setup procedure. The BTS responds with an AC Ack message.

2) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ACH Msg Transfer (RU+CR) message to the BSC. 3) The AN sends an A9-Setup-A8 message to the PCF, requesting to set up an A8

connection. 4) The PCF sends an A11-Registration-Request message to the PDSN, requesting

to set up an A10 connection. The PDSN returns an A11-Registration-Response message.

5) The PCF returns an A9-Connect-A8 message to the AN, indicating the successful setup of the A8/A10 connection.



3-21

6) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup message to the BTS, requesting the BTS to allocate the radio resource for the call.

7) The BTS sends an Abis-Do Connect message to the BSC to set up an Abis-Do service connection. In response to the Abis-Do Connect message, the BSC sends an Abis-Connect Ack to the BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Connect message.

8) The BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

9) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Forward Traffic (Idle Data) message to the BTS to transmit the forward idle data.

10) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Reverse Traffic (Idle Data) message to the BTS to transmit the reverse idle data.

11) The BSC sends an Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer (TCA) message to the BTS to transfer the control channel message.

12) The AN assembles the TrafficChannelAssignment message and sends it to the AT.

13) The AN sends the Pilot and DRC messages to the BTS. Then the BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (Preamble) message to the BSC. After that, the AN sends an RTC Ack message to the AT.

14) The AT sends a TrafficChannelComplete message, confirming that the connection is set up over the Um interface.

15) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (TCC) message to the BSC to transmit the reverse traffic data.

II. AN Initiated Connection Re-activation

Figure 3-17 illustrates the AN initiated connection re-activation procedure.



3-22

AT BTS BSC PCF

RouteUpdate + ConnectionRequest

Abis-Do ACH Msg Transfer(RU+CR)ACAck

A9-Setup-A8

A9-Connect-A8

Abis-Do BTS Setup

Abis-Do BTS Connect



Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer(TCA)TrafficChannelAssignment

Pilot + DRC

RTCAck


Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(Preamble)

Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(Null Data)


A9-BS Service Request

A9-BS Service Response

Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer(Page)Page

ACAck

PDSN

Packet Data

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(1)

(16)

(17)

(18)

AN

Figure 3-17 AN initiated connection re-activation procedure

The following describes the AT initiated connection re-activation procedure:

1) The PDSN sends a Packet Data message to the PCF on the A10 connection to transfer the packet data.

2) The PCF sends an A9-BS Service Request to the AN, requesting the packet data service. The AN responds with an A9-BS Service Response message.

3) The BSC sends an Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer (Page) message to the BTS to transfer the control channel message.

4) The AN sends the Page message to the AT. 5) The AT sends a Connection Request and a RouteUpdate message to the AN,

requesting the AN to set up the connection over the Um interface. The AN responds with an AC Ack message.

6) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ACH Msg Transfer (RU+CR) message to the BSC. 7) The AN sends an A9-Setup-A8 message to the PCF, requesting to set up an A8

connection.



3-23

8) The PCF returns an A9-Connect-A8 message to the AN, indicating the successful setup of the A8 connection.

9) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup message to the BTS, requesting the BTS to allocate the radio resource for the call.

10) The BTS sends an Abis-Do Connect message to the BSC to set up an Abis-Do service connection. In response to the Abis-Do Connect message, the BSC sends an Abis-Do Connect Ack message to the BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Do Connect message.

11) The BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

12) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Forward Traffic (Null Data) message to the BTS to transmit the forward null data.

13) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Reverse Traffic (Idle Data) message to the BTS to transmit the reverse idle data.

14) The BSC sends an Abis-Do CCH Msg Transfer (TCA) message to the BTS to transfer the control channel message.

15) The AN assembles the TrafficChannelAssignment message and sends it to the AT.

16) The AN sends the Pilot and DRC messages to the BTS. Then the BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (Preamble) message to the BSC. After that, the AN sends an RTC Ack message to the AT.

17) The AT sends a TrafficChannelComplete message, confirming the setup of the connection over the Um interface.

18) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (TCC) message to the BSC to transmit the reverse traffic data.

III. AT Initiated Connection Release

Figure 3-18 illustrates the AT initiated connection release procedure.

AT BTS BSC PCF PDSN

ConnectionClose

A9-Release-A8

A9-Release-A8 CompleteAbis-Do BTS Release

Abis-Do BTS Remove

Abis-Do BTS Remove Ack

Abis-Do BTS Release Ack

Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(CC)


A11-Registration Reply

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

AN

Figure 3-18 AT initiated connection release procedure



3-24

The following describes the AT initiated connection release procedure:

1) The AT sends a Connection Close message on the reverse channel to initiate a call release operation.

2) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (CC) message to the BSC. 3) The AN sends an A9-Release-A8 to the PCF to release the A8 connection. 4) The PCF sends an A11-Registration-Request (Lifetime = 0) to release the A10

connection. The PDSN acknowledges the release of the A10 connection by sending an A11-Registration-Reply message.

5) The PCF acknowledges the release of the A8 connection by sending an A9-Release-A8 Complete message. The call release is completed.

6) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Release message to the BTS. 7) The BTS sends an Abis-Do Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to

remove the specified cell from the service connection. The BSC responds with an Abis-Do Remove Ack message, indicating the processing result of the Abis-Do Remove message.

8) The BTS sends an Abis-Do BTS Release Ack message to the BSC in response to the Abis-Do Remove Ack message.

Note:

When the Lifetime in the A11-Registration Request is not equal to 0, only the charging information is confirmed and the A10 connection is not released.

IV. AN Initiated Connection Release

Figure 3-19 illustrates the AN initiated connection release procedure.



3-25

AT

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

BTS BSC PCF PDSN

ConnectionClose

A9-Release-A8

A9-Release-A8 Complete

Abis-Do BTS Release

Abis-Do BTS Remove



Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(CC)


A11-Registration Reply

Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(CC)ConnectionClose

(9)

AN

Figure 3-19 AN initiated connection release procedure

The following describes the AN initiated connection release procedure:

1) The AN sends an A9-Release-A8 to the PCF to release the A8 connection. 2) The PCF sends an A11-Registration-Request (Lifetime = 0) to release the A10

connection. The PDSN acknowledges the release of the A10 connection by sending an A11-Registration-Reply.

3) The PCF acknowledges the release of the A8 connection by sending an A9-Release-A8 Complete message. The call release is completed.

4) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ForwardTraffic (CC) message to the BSC. 5) The AN sends a Connection Close message to the AT to initiate the call release

operation. The AT acknowledges the call release by sending a Connection Close message to the AN.

6) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (CC) message to the BSC. 7) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Release message to the BTS. 8) The BTS sends an Abis-Do Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to


9) The BTS sends an Abis-Do BTS Release Ack message to the BSC in response to the Abis-Do Remove Ack message.

3.2.2 Handoff

This section introduces the handoff add and drop procedures in the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO system.



3-26

I. Handoff Add

Figure 3-20 illustrates the handoff add procedure.

AT BTS_S BTS_D BSC

RouteUpdate

Abis-Do BTS Setup

Abis-Do BTS Connect



TrafficChannelAssignment


Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(Idle Data)


Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(RU)

Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(TCA)

ResetReportAbis-Do ForwardTraffic(ResetReport)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(12)

AN

Figure 3-20 Handoff add procedure

Note:

BTS_S stands for the source BTS, and BTS_D stands for the target BTS.

The following describes the handoff add procedure:

1) The AT sends a RouteUpdate message to the source BTS. The BSC decides that a reverse link handoff is required.

2) The source BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (RU) message to the BSC. 3) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup message to the target BTS, requesting the

target BTS to allocate the radio resource for the call. 4) The target BTS sends an Abis-Do Connect message to the BSC to set up an

Abis-Do service connection. In response to the Abis-Do Connect message, the BSC sends an Abis-Connect Ack message to the target BTS, indicating the result of processing the Abis-Do Connect message.

5) The target BTS completes resource allocation and sends an Abis-Do BTS Setup Ack message to the BSC.

6) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Forward Traffic (Idle Data) message to the target BTS to transmit the forward idle data.



3-27

7) The target BTS sends an Abis-Do Reverse Traffic (Idle Data) message to the BSC to transmit the reverse idle data.

8) The BSC sends an Abis-Do ForwardTraffic (TCA) message to the source BTS. 9) The source BTS sends an TrafficChannelAssignment message, informing the AT

to use the new active set. 10) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Forward Traffic (ResetReport) message to the source

BTS. The source BTS sends the ResetReport message to the AT. 11) The AT sends a TrafficChannelComplete message to acknowledge the setup of

connection over the Um interface. The reverse softer handoff is completed. 12) The source BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (TCC) message to the BSC.

II. Handoff Drop

Figure 3-21 illustrates the handoff drop procedure.

AT BSC

RouteUpdate

TrafficChannelAssignment


Abis-Do ReverseTraffic(RU)

Abis-Do ForwardTraffic(TCA)

ResetReportAbis-Do ForwardTraffic(RR)

Abis-Do BTS Release

Abis-Do BTS Remove



RouteUpdateAbis-Do ReverseTraffic(RU)


BTS_S BTS_D

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1)

(10)

(9)

AN

Figure 3-21 Handoff drop procedure

The following describes the handoff drop procedure:

1) The AT sends a RouteUpdate message to the BTS. 2) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (RU) message to the BSC. 3) The BSC sends an Abis-Do ForwardTraffic (TCA) message to the source BTS. 4) The source BTS sends a TrafficChannelAssignment message, informing the AT to

use the new active set.



3-28

5) The BSC sends an Abis-Do Forward Traffic (ResetReport) message to the source BTS. The source BTS sends the ResetReport message to the AT.

6) The AT sends a TrafficChannelComplete message to acknowledge the setup of connection over the Um interface. The reverse softer handoff is completed.

7) The BTS sends an Abis-Do ReverseTraffic (TCC) message to the BSC. 8) The BSC sends an Abis-Do BTS Release message to the BTS. 9) The BTS sends an Abis-Do Remove message to the BSC, requesting the BSC to


10) The BTS sends an Abis-Do BTS Release Ack message to the BSC in response to the Abis-Remove Ack message.


Interface Protocols and Service FlowsAppendix A Abbreviations and Acronyms

A-1

Appendix A Abbreviations and Acronyms

#

1xEV-DO Single 1.25 MHz carrier Evolution - Data Optimized

A

A1/A2/A5

A3/A7

A8/A9

A10/A11




Abis

AC Authentication Center

AN Access Network

ARQ Automatic Repeat Request

AT Access Terminal


AUC Authentication

B


BS Base Station




C

CC Control Channel


CEs Channel Elements

CLK Clock

CN Core Network



A-2

CPU Center Processing Unit

DRC Data Rate Control

F

F-APICH Forward Assistant Pilot Channel

F-ATDPICH Forward Transmit Diversity Assistant Pilot Channel

F-BCH Forward Broadcast Channel

FCACH Forward Common Assignment Channel


F-CPCCH Forward Common Power Control Channel

FCS Frame Check Sequence


FER Frame Error Radio






F-SCCH Forward Supplemental Code Channel


F-SYNCH Forward Sync Channel

F-TCH Forward Traffic Channel

F-TDPICH Forward Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel

G


GMSC Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre


I

ICP IMA Control Protocol

ID Identity

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

IMSI International Mobile Station Identity

IP Internet Protocol

IPOA IP over ATM



A-3


L

LAC Link Access Control

LMT Local Maintenance Terminal

LMF Local Maintenance Function

M

MAC Medium Access Control


Modem Modulator-Demodulator

MPU Micro Process Unit

MS Mobile Station


N

NID Network Identification

O

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OMC Operation & Maintenance Center

OML Operation & Maintenance Link

OMU Operation & Maintenance Unit

P

PACA Priority Access and Channel Assignment


PCS Personal Communications Services


PDU Protocol Data Unit


PPP Peer-to-Peer Protocol


PTT Push To Talk

PVC Permanent Virtual Channel

PVP Permanent Virtual Path

Q




A-4


R



R-CCCH Reverse Common Control Channel



RF Radio Frequency


RLP Radio Link Protocol

RM Radio Management

R-PICH Reverse Pilot Channel

R-SCCH Reverse Supplemental Code Channel


RSQI Receive Signal Quality Indicator

R-TCH Reverse Traffic Channel

S

SDU Service Data Unit

SDU Selection/Distribution Unit

SID System Identification

SPU Signaling Process Unit

SRBP Signaling Radio Burst Protocol

SSD Shared Secret Data

T

TCP Transport Control Protocol

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier

U

Um


V

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

VLR Visitor Location Register

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

31026355-bts3606 series technical manual

Documents

base station controller

inside angle brackets

base transceiver station

physically active substances

chemically active substances

code division multiplex

densely populated areas

48v dc input